Home

4.6MB PDF - Ashlar

1. not be accurate if you draw in any other view This tool works in much the same way as the Single Line tool except that it draws double lines or walls Walls created on the same layer automatically trim to where they touch or intersect Automatic trimming of smart walls occurs only when the walls are on the same layer As you drag the mouse the defining side of the wall falls on the construction line you drag along The other side of the wall automatically fills in at the thickness you specify in the Status Line The position of the automatic wall depends on your last activity If the second wall is on the wrong side of the construction line press the SHIFT key to flip it Notice the Message Line reads Shift Flip as a reminder of this feature a eee nena ee If you want to fillet or chamfer or otherwise alter a Smart Wall layout you have to ungroup them with the Ungroup command in the Arrange menu The result is that the selected Smart Walls turn into separate line segments and the smarts are stripped out This cannot be undone Regrouping the pieces will not make them Smart Walls again It is recommended that you place all symbols before you ungroup and fillet chamfer the walls Using the Smart Wall Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Double Line Pick start point Shift Filip 2 In the Status Line specify the thi
2. Using a Balloon Dimension Tool 1 Select the Balloon Dimension tool The Message Line reads Balloon Pick geometry to point to 2 Click the point on the geometry for the dimension arrow The Message Line reads Balloon Pick balloon location 3 Click the second point to specify the location of the symbol The balloon symbol appears 4 Enter the text and frame width in the Status Line data fields Press ENTER Win dows or RETURN Macintosh to update the dimension You can move the dimension by dragging the text to a new location Balloon dimension text does not increment as you place additional balloons If you want specific text in the balloon dimension you must enter it yourself The Status Line contains Text and Width data fields Width 0 50 Using the Dimension Tools Additional Tools for Dimensioning Automatic Dimensioning Tool Tr H ba m J Ys This tool automatically dimensions lines independently from SN their angle circles ellipses and arcs Using the Automatic Dimensioning Tool 1 Choose Utilities gt Show Palette 2 Choose the Automatic Dimensioning tool The Message Line reads Automatic Dimensioning Select object for Auto dimensioning 3 Click at each object with the Automatic Dimensioning tool All lines are dimensioned correctly All circles arcs and ellipses are dimensioned with a radial dimension Circle Center Line Dimension Tool
3. Vom T Detail View Tool a F im The Detail View tool in the last subpalette of the main tool palette creates a detail view of the designated area of your drawing Creating an Associative Detail View An associative detail view is one in which a change will appear in the view if a change is made to geometry in another view 1 In the View Control subpalette select the Detail View tool The Message Line reads Detail View Enter view scale then pick first corner of viewing frame Aas 2 Enter a scale for your detail view in the Status Line 3 Use the pointer to drag a rectangle around the area of your drawing that you want placed in the detail view This rectangle becomes the window frame You can also click the first corner and the opposite corner to define the view 4 Position the pointer in the center of the detail view window frame and drag the window to a clear area on your drawing Creating a Non Associative Detail View You may want a detail view that is not associative that is when you make changes to the original geometry the geometry in the view does not change 1 Create a detail view on an open space 2 Use the Selection tool to click inside the view and make it active Sa Drag a selection fence around all of the geometry inside the original view The geometry inside the view is selected Choose Edit gt Copy Choose Views gt Models Click New
4. Parallel Lines Tool S gt This tool in the second subpalette of the main tool palette constructs lines parallel to existing lines Use one of the following methods for creating parallel lines Using the Parallel Lines Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Parallel Lines Drag new line off exist ing line 2 Select the Parallel Lines tool drag off the desired line and release to indicate the position for the new parallel line A rubberband line moves with the pointer The Status Line shows the distance you dragged If you type in your own value and hit ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh the parallel copy moves to the offset defined by your value or Select the Parallel Lines tool click the line you want to duplicate and then enter a delta distance in the Status Line and then press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh This method does not allow you to control on which side of the original line the new line is drawn The status field allows you to specify the distance between the original line and the new parallel line Drawing Tools Description and Use Smart Wall Tool SS The Smart Wall tool in the second subpal ette of the main tool palette constructs a double line like those used in architectural drawings Please note this tool will function Overlapping lines are correctly only in the Top view Results will automatically trimmed at the intersections
5. Moving Objects with Tools When an object is selected move the pointer near the object until the 4 way Move symbol appears as shown below and drag the object to a new location 4 Note If you have problems displaying the 4 way Move symbol it might be because you have just used the Paste command The 4 way Move symbol does not appear when you move the pointer to the selected object because the drawing tool is still in effect if you copy and paste a selected object immediately after it is drawn You have to click the Selection tool before you can move the selected geometry Using the Drafting Assistant for Moving When the pointer becomes the 4 way Move symbol you can drag the object around and see the Drafting Assistant s notations relative to the object s location when you press the mouse button In this way if you move the pointer over a control point so the Drafting Assistant activates it you can align the object you are moving with that point If you begin dragging when the on notation is displayed the alignment with the corner of the rectangle occurs at the location on the square where you pressed the mouse button to begin dragging If you begin dragging when a the on notation is displayed on the alignment with the corner of the rectangle occurs at the location nw on the square where you pressed the mouse button to begin dragging Sele
6. v Layout 1 New Inertia IXY 4 Attribute 1 New ie Delete rea Delete dele eight z Dizi T Rename Redefine Defining a New Layout 1 Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Layouts The Define Layouts dialog box appears Click New Rename the layout in the Layout Name entry field Click Rename Double click to activate set AW N O Select the Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Attributes The Define Attributes dialog box displays 7 Define all the attributes you want to use in different layouts 8 Make all the attributes visible that you want to save under one layout name All active attributes in the Define Attribute dialog box will automatically be saved under the current layout name for the current Graphite session If you want to save layouts permanently choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences Editing Layouts 1 Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Layouts The Define Layout dialog box displays 2 Double click to activate select the check mark shows which is active Click Current 4 Select the Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Attributes The Define Attribute dialog box displays 5 Show or Hide the attributes as desired visible attributes are indicated by an eye mark All changes made in the Define Attribute dialog box will automatically be saved under the current layout name If you want to save the changes permanently choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferenc
7. Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear Linear Tol Whole Degrees Angular Tol XX XX hy XX XX XX Text XX X Font XX XX Size XX XXX Style XXX Color xxxttol Weight xxxctupper lower Layer yyy xxx limits yyy xxx limits Arrowheads xxx basic Arrow Size _xxx_ not to scale Witness Lines Dimension Appearance 12 25 Dimensions Tech Note Use the xxx basic format to create dimensions for GD amp T symbols 12 26 The default format is degrees with no minutes or seconds and no tolerance or lim its The graphic here shows the appearance of each tolerance format if you entered the limits shown in the Status Line S n A Na 48 44 a yyy xxx limits AN a oT a ie 23 C xxx yyy E xxx basic n A _Xxx_ not to scale Upper 3 __ Lower 1 _ Angular Tolerance This command in the Dimension menu allows you to set the precision of an angular dimension s tolerance values Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear gt Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol Text Font XXX Size o Style XX XX Color Weight Layer gt Arrowheads gt Arrow Size Witness Lines Text Dimension This command in the Dimension menu allows you to specify the position and ori entation for dimension text The default is Horizontal text The Break in Over and Under options produce text that is al
8. Angular dimension will display all angles properly if you keep the angles larger than 3 degrees For smaller than that you should build the dimensions manually using lines and text objects The Angular Dimension tool will not dimension angles over 180 For 3D geometry Angular dimensions are created in the plane of the two lines Arc Length Dimension Tool KA X This tool measures the length of an arc 2 810 Using the Arc Length Dimension Tool 1 Select the Angular Dimension tool The Message Line reads Arc Length Pick start point on the arc 2 Select the start point The Message Line reads Arc Length Pick point on the arc 12 19 Dimensions 12 20 3 Select a point on the arc The Message Line reads Arc Length Pick end point on the arc 4 Select the opposite end of the arc as if you were creating a three point arc Like other dimensions you can manipulate the text by changing its size or font using the Text menu in the Dimension menu You can move the text by positioning the cursor over it The cursor changes to a four headed arrow Then drag the text to the desired position If necessary the line pointing to the dimension will dogleg The Arc Length Dimension tool does not put witness lines perpendicular to the arc for angles less than 180 degrees Balloon Dimension Tool lolmrarelrerel o This tool attaches a Balloon symbol to geometry placed in the location you click
9. Tiled Printi e Double click the Drawing Scale data field SE and enter a scale the ratio you want to Pages Across 1 Down 1 use You can enter real values such as 0 25 1 which Graphite converts to 1 48 Click Apply to see the effect of the scaling you specified Page Order r Fit Apply Cancel e Press the arrow beside the Drawing Scale data field and drag to one of the stan dard ratios from the menu Click Apply to see the specified scaling PH Ek The Cancel button on the Drawing Size dialog box doesn t abort changes if a Fit or Apply are chosen first If you don t need a specific scale you can click Fit to scale the drawing to fit the paper With any of these methods the geometry itself does not change scale it only changes visually not physically 3 If you are printing multiple sheets and taping them together follow the direc tions for Tiled Printing later in this chapter 4 Click OK Setting the Visual Scale with the Sheet Into View Command Once you have drawn and dimensioned a full scale part you can create a visually scaled view of that part The Sheet Into View command performs the details of this operation automatically 1 Choose Arrange gt Zoom All All objects are displayed on the screen 2 Choose the Views gt Sheet Into View 3 Enter the scaling value in the Scale data field of the Sheet Into View dialog box Figuring out this value is similar to what yo
10. Angular Dimension Tool ay This tool measures the angle between two lines Using the Angular Dimension Tool 1 Select the Angular Dimension tool The Message Line reads Angular Pick first line 2 Click on the first line near the endpoint from which you want the angle mea sured The Message Line now reads Angular Pick second line 3 Click near the endpoint of the second line The inside angle is measured between the lines The smaller angle is used The angle between the endpoints of the lines is measured so you do not have to click these endpoints just near them Graphite interprets all mouse clicks left of the line midpoint as the left endpoint and all mouse clicks right of the line midpoint as the right endpoint midpoint left endpoint right endpoint lt gt Clicking here means left Clicking here means endpoint right endpoint If you dimension intersecting lines don t mix up the intersection with the midpoint of the To dimension this angle lines you have to click here A midpoints intersection Using the Dimension Tools If the lines don t meet the angle is measured from the invisible extension of the lines The extension appears as part of the dimension 135 45 lt Click here Click here gt i When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn
11. If you want to treat a polygon as a single object select all lines of the polygon and choose the Group command in the Arrange menu The polygon is drawn with the current pen specifications for Color Weight and Pat tern Rectangle Tool O This tool in the sixth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a horizontal or ver tical rectangle using the opposite corners you specify Using the Rectangle Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Rectangle Pick first corner of rectangle Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Click the opposite corners of the rectangle or Drag the opposite corners of the rectangle You can create a square by aligning the second point on the 45 construction line If the two points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn If you want to draw a square from the center rather than opposite corners use one of the other polygon tools specifying four sides You can t create a rectangle from the center You cannot change the Width and the Height of a rectangle in Edit Objects dialog box You must edit each line individually because rectangles become four line objects after you deselect the rectangle You can create a copy of the last rectangle by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the upper left corner A default 1 inch rectangle is drawn if you have not previously drawn a re
12. the pattern you want to use To crosshatch a figure that is not a closed figure you must add lines or segment lines to make a closed figure In this way you can crosshatch indi vidual sections of the geome try See Crosshatching in the Advanced Features section of the Getting Started section of this manual for a step by step example It is important that you do not select extra objects when you specify the crosshatch or fill area because Graphite does not know how to treat the extra objects To crosshatch Select only the Do not select a rectangle boundaries extraneous lines Tip ie ge You may want to use the Tracer tool to select the boundary NN Crosshatch Command This command in the Pen menu crosshatches the selection with one of the industry standard crosshatching patterns You can change the default pattern by saving changes in the preferences file See Chapter 5 Basic Environment Settings 11 15 Adding Details Adding Crosshatching 1 Select the objects which represent a closed boundary The closed boundary may include cutout areas such as a hole Select both the outside boundary and the hole Crosshatch Standard Solids Natural Materials Metals 2 Choose Pen gt Crosshatch The dialog box appears displaying DIN crosshatching options 3 To display ISO crosshatching options click the ISO radio button in the dialog box Using ISO Crosshat
13. Custom coker Sccscese oE mc saf enfia f ie Coke Lime TOT Bye 152 Add to Custom Coker The color display contains the following elements 5 5 Basic Environment Settings 5 6 Basic Colors Custom Colors Add to Custom Colors Color Palette Color Solid Hue Saturation Luminance Define Custom Colors Red Green Blue Cancel OK This section displays the 64 default colors available in the palette You can display 16 more user defined colors in this area for a particular file These save with the par ticular file but do not save as a default setting when using Layout gt Preferences gt Save Prefer ences Use this button to place a color in the Custom col ors section You select your color by using this palette The selected appears in this swatch These fields are automatically filled in when you select a color You can also enter values into these fields Click this when you see a partial color display to show the full color display These fields are automatically filled in when you select a color You can also enter values into these fields Click Cancel to close the display without saving the color selection Click OK to accept the color selection In the palette on the right place the pointer within the target cursor and drag to the desired color The color displays in the Color Solid area below the palette You can also adjust the Hue Saturation Luminance and the percentage
14. D This tool creates a center line for any circle you have created It also gives you the option to display a thread symbol with the center line Using the Circle Center Line Dimension Tool 1 Choose Utilities gt Show Palette 2 Choose the Circle Center Line tool The Message Line reads Circle Center Line Select circle 3 Click on the circle with the tool If you press the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while clicking on the circle a thread symbol is added 4 In the Axis overlap data field of the Status Line enter the desired axis overlap 5 Press the ENTER Windows or the RETURN Macintosh key A circle center line with an optional thread symbol is added to the circle with the specified overlap 12 21 Dimensions 12 22 The Status Line allows you to enter the Axis overlap Axis Overlap Dimension Appearance Graphite automatically creates dimensions according to ANSI Y14 5 DIN ISO or JIS standards However many companies and individuals have developed their own standards The commands in the Dimension menu allow you to control vir tually every aspect of the dimension appearance without having to construct dimensions manually and while retaining the associativity of Graphite s smart dimensions Settings made in the Dimension menu affect the currently selected dimension and all future dimensions Dimension Views Show Palette Standards GDBT L
15. Font you choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Size j Styl Attributes ul v Align Left Attributes Command Align Right Align Middle This command allows you to define delete Justified redefine and activate attributes Active v Single Space attributes attributes which can be assigned are 1 1 2 Space indicated by an eye mark in front of the eral et Indentation attribute name Locked attributes their values cannot be changed during assignment are indi cated by a lock icon in front of the check mark Bias Shey Bairo Forms Text Define Layouts Options iii bce a depen x mand displays the following pay 2 MEDA lt 3 Attribute 1 New dialog box Attribute Name Default Yalue Lo Rue Show Palette Delete Attributes are defined in the Define Attributes dialog box by three parameters Attributes and Objects 19 3 Bill of Materials 19 4 Attribute Name Default Value Text In this entry field you specify a general name for the attribute like name material serial number etc This entry assigns a specific value to the attribute So you could assign the value of steel to the attribute of material The value of an attribute can be changed in the Status Line before assigning it to object geometry or in the Edit Objects dialog box after it has been assigned In this pop up menu you select a format for the attribute value You can choose between three attrib
16. 3 i CentroidX aj Kj Attribute 1 New attribute s name The lock icon Centroid Y in front of the name appears Inertia IXX InertialYY M ix Attributes for Layout 1 Delete or disappears Redefine Attribute Name The values of locked attributes cannot be changed during assignment Text v ul dikk Default Value Default Changing the Characteristics of an Attribute Choose the Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Attributes to open the Define Attributes dialog box 1 Select the attribute whose name value or format you want to change 2 Type a new name or value or choose a new attribute format 3 Click Redefine The new attribute name appears in the attributes list and the new value and for mat are assigned to the attribute 4 Close the Define Attributes dialog box by clicking the Close button Windows or the Close box Macintosh Deleting Defined Attributes Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Attributes to open the Define Attributes dialog box 1 Select the name of the attribute from the list box 2 Click Delete The selected attribute deletes Saving Attributes With the Redefine button you rename an attribute or assign a new value or format to the attribute If you want to save all attribute definitions permanently choose Layout gt Prefer ences gt Save Preferences Close Graphite and relaunch it for the new preferences to take affect Predefined Attributes Graphite Attribu
17. Calculations Graphite calculates the values for 2D Analysis before the dialog box appears If you make a change in the Tolerance or the Weight Per Area you must click CALCULATE to recalculate the statistics The 2D Analysis mechanism evaluates the boundary in the same way the cross hatching mechanism does for example Graphite considers a circle inside a bounded area to be a hole Crosshatching does not fill the hole and 2D Analysis does not include the area of the circle in the area calculation Displaying the Centroid 1 2 Select the geometry defining the part Choose Layout gt 2D Analysis The 2D Analysis dialog box appears Choose Layout gt Construction The Construction dialog box appears In the Angle field in the Construction dialog box enter 0 90 Be certain to sep arate the numbers with a semicolon Enter the value for Centroid X in the X field of the Construction dialog box Enter the value for Centroid Y in the Y field of the Construction dialog box Press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Calculations Construction lines display intersecting at the centroid of the selected part 18 5 2D Analysis 18 6 Bill of Materials Bill of Materials is an important extension to CAD programs for tracking and listing parts all the way through the product design and manufacturing process In the product manufacturing industry every part produced has some type of distinguish ing mark typically the part
18. Executing a macro with the Run button is useful for testing a macro Should it not work properly you can highlight any dialog box entry and remove it by pressing the Remove button Modify your macro as needed then test it again by pressing the Run button Continue this process until your macro runs properly 6 5 Advanced Environment Settings Macro Limitations Macros are not general programs There are limitations as to what can be encoded in a macro The following rules apply to macros e Only menu items can be included in a macro e A menu item might cause a dialog box to appear but the macro cannot fill in the required entries e There are no conditionals like if or ifelse or loops like while e Subroutines are allowed in that one macro can call another macro provided the called macro is in the Utilities menu and therefore a menu item If a macro calls a nested macro which would end in an infinite loop an alert box appears and the macro aborts e Macro names must be limited to alpha numeric characters with no spaces File Organization Graphite provides you with the ability to organize your files The Directory com mand in Preferences allows you to specify the file location for opening saving importing and exporting See Chapter 15 for more information 3D Viewing Although the transition between 2D and 3D drawing in Graphite is seamless there are a few settings and features that are unique to 3D When you open
19. Windows only This button in the color display allows you to define 16 additional colors to show in the partial color display A pen style or line pattern made up of dashes Built in settings that are used by the system if you do not specify your own value or choice The command to erase selected geometry The selection is not placed on the Clipboard however it can be retrieved within the limits of the Undo command A change usually in position The tool that creates a separate view of the geome try you indicate at the scale you specify A specification box that appears in response to cer tain commands A dialog box allows you to pro vide information that qualifies the execution of those commands Diameter Dimension Divide Double click Drafting Assistant Drag DXF Drawing DWG Ellipse Tool Endpoint Export The distance across an arc or circle passing through the center A graphic object that displays the distance between two points A measurement of an object Also a pen style To segment a line or curve into equal parts To press and release the mouse button twice quickly A unique Graphite feature which displays feedback notations and construction lines to aid with snap alignment and constraint operations The patented Drafting Assistant facilitates exact construction without requiring you to be exact When the pointer is close enough to display feedback the Drafting Assistant
20. ifelse L1 gt L2 L1 L2 ae ae The length represented by the i e se H 4 L1 expression equals L1 because L1 is ro greater than L2 The length represented by the ifelse expression equals L2 because L2 is not less than L1 i ifelse L1 gt L2 L1 L2 ag Resolving the Parameters Once you ve constructed the geometry and added parametric dimensions use the Resolve command to specify the values for the variables and redraw the geometry 16 5 Parametrics Tech Note Example You can use a math ematical exp fastener sym ression with a bol If you want a numbered fastener 2 4 6 etc use the following formula for t he thread size N 13 60 1000 where N is fastener number For a 6 screw the th read size equals 6 13 60 1000 or 138 16 6 Resolve Command This command in the Edit menu allows you to E redraw geometry automatically to fit specified x Gl fi r A ance dimensions This parametric feature enables v you to draw a geometric shape without regard to measurements and then have Graphite redraw the same shape to the values you spec ify Using the Resolve Command with Parametrics 1 Create the geometry 2 Dimension all geometry by using variables constant values and expressions You must dimension the essential related geometry so Graphite can recon struct the geometry Gra
21. thest extension of its base Height This value describes the height of the arrowhead as the vertical distance of its base Side This value describes the length of the edge of the arrowhead Angle This value describes the angle of the tip of the arrowhead If you change any value in the Length Height Side or Angle entry data fields Graphite will change the values in the other entry data fields accordingly Arrows agy 28 4 21 NS Cancel oK Witness Lines This command in the Dimension menu lets you specify which sides of the linear dimension should have witness lines A check mark indicates that a witness line will be placed at the specified location This option is useful if you are going to plot a drawing that contains baseline or chain dimensions By turning off one or more of the overlapping witness lines you can prevent the plotter from drawing multiple witness lines when only one needs to be drawn The Start of a dimension is the first point clicked The End of a dimension is the last point clicked The default settings have witness lines at both the start and end of a dimension This command affects only linear dimensions Radial and diametral dimensions are Dimension Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol Text Font Size Style Color Weight Layer Arrowheads Arrow Size Witness Lines vvvv vvv v a v
22. 1 Select the object s to be moved 2 Choose Edit gt Edit Objects 3 Click the arrow for the Layer data field 4 Click the layer from the list 5 Choose Apply Arranging Geometry The Arrange menu contains some commands that enable you to subdivide geome try group geometry so it behaves like a unit and lock geometry to prevent changes This menu also contains a command to refresh the screen after you have changed geometry Divide Command This command in the Arrange menu subdivides the selected geometry into the spec ified number of equal parts Arranging Geometry Tech Note In the Edit Objects dialog box you can use mathematical operators A list of all allowed operators is in Appendix A Tech Note You can use different units in each data field like inch feet feet inches x y cen timeter cm millimeter mm or meter m You are also allowed to mix English and metric units as long as they are labeled correctly like 10 25 4 cm 10 31 Editing Objects 10 32 1 Select the object to be divided 2 Choose Arrange gt Divide ofpieces 2 Iv Show Points The dialog box appears aoa K 3 Enter the number of equal parts that you want to divide the selection 4 Click OK You can see the divisions when you display the points by clicking Show Points in this dialog box or choosing Layout gt Show Points Group Command CTRL Y Windows
23. 10 16 You can make copies with the following drawing tools e Single Line tool e Center Point and Opposite Point Circle tools e Ellipse tools e Polygon tools e Text tool To create a copy with the drawing tools proceed as follows 1 Construct the geometry you want to copy 2 Hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key 3 Click a new location The click determines the location of the first point speci fied during the construction of the original geometry the center of a center point circle for example 4 Release the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key Copying with the Transformation Tools You can hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while using a Transformation tool to make a copy of the selected geometry 1 Select the object you want to copy and transform Select one of the four Transformation tools Hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key Perform the transformation according to the directions in the Message Line Release the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key ips Oe A copy transforms and the original remains unchanged Copy CTRL Windows or Copy OPTION Macintosh versus Copy Command Usually using the copy option of a geometry tool is faster than using the Copy and Paste commands in the Edit menu The Copy command is very useful for copying to a different document or application Sizing Objects with Tools Normally you size an object with
24. Click New to create a new sheet Click Current to activate the new sheet and draw some geometry A WwW ON Make another sheet active by highlighting a different sheet in the Sheets dialog box and click Current Close the Sheets dialog box and select Views gt Models 6 Search for the before displayed geometry by activating each Model followed by a Zoom All command until the previous geometry displays on the new sheet Displaying Three Components on One Sheet Sheets Views and Models are very helpful to display several components of a part created by different drafters on one sheet The following simple example shows how to perform this task 1 Open a new document 2 Draw an ellipse 3 Save the drawing as ellipse uvco 4 Open a new document and draw a rectangle 5 Select Views gt Sheet Into View 14 39 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 40 6 In that dialog box choose the ViewTop layout set the Scale to 1 nee s and click OK i Model space 2 You now have one Sheet with one view window showing the Rectangle Model 1 The Sheet camera aligns to Model 2 created with the Sheet Into View command displaying a blank model space on the sheet Model 1 i 7 Make the sheet active by clicking on it and draw a circle 8 Select Sheet Into View the sheet still active and choose Top view again with the Scale factor 1 Model space 3 gee Model 2 Circle Model1 4
25. Displaying the Grid Tip If you wish to work with a grid in the drawing area choose Layout gt Show Grid Normally you do not need to display the Grid since the Drafting Assistant offers a more elegant support than the grid When the grid is visible constructions snap to the grid meaning that any geom etry point that you click snaps onto the closest grid point The coordinate symbol appears at the origin when the grid is vis 0 0 Origin i 8 8 Coordinate Symbol ible Scroll Bars The scroll bars allow you to move the sheet up and down or right and left You can display different parts of the drawing sheet by dragging the slider of a scroll bar to the approximate location For example the right center or left position in the hor 3 9 The Basics izontal scroll bar displays the right side middle or left side of the drawing respec tively You can also click the arrows at the end of the scroll bars to move the sheet one line at a time If you click in the scroll bar the sheet moves one window at a time Work Layer Indicator The work layer indicator in the lower left corner of the screen shows which layer is the current work layer New geometry goes on the work layer If you want your construction to go on a layer first make it the current layer To select a work layer position the pointer over the work X y layer indicator then press the mouse button All available Layert mere ea lay
26. Drawing a Line Tangent to or Perpendicular to a Curve 1 Construct an arc circle or ellipse Drawing Tools Description and Use 2 Choose the Single Line tool 3 Move the pointer to the arc until a Drafting Assistant on notation appears The Drafting Assistant notation must be on rather than endpoint quadrant or mid point 4 Drag in the appropriate direction straight for perpendicular or at an angle for tangent until the Drafting Assistant perpendicular or tangent notation appears 5 When the Drafting Assistant locks on to perpendicular or tangent you can then drag the line around the arc to the location you want and extend the line to the length you want Creating a Point You can create a point by creating a line and setting its length to zero Set the start ing point of the line with the mouse then type 0 in the Length entry field of the Sta tus Line and press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh The line point displays a to indicate its location You can also click the Single Line tool twice in the same spot Connected Lines Tool This tool in the second subpalette of the main tool palette draws lines in which the endpoint of one line segment is the beginning point of the next Using the Connected Lines Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Connected Lines Pick the beginning point 2 Click or drag to indicate the endpoints of the line segments If you click a point and the
27. GD amp T GD amp T stands for Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing a U S government standard This GD amp T capability is compliant with ANSI Y14 5 1985 DIN ISO and JIS standards Since this annotation may be new to you this section includes an overview of GD amp T standards and a brief explanation of the components of a GD amp T label using the true position of holes as an example The topics covered include e Background e Alignment Information e Bonus Tolerance e Basic Dimensions e GD amp T Feature Control Frame e Geometric Characteristics e The GD amp T Label Background Before World War II a single vendor did most military manufacturing However during the war it became a matter of national security to diversify weapons manu facturing so a single plant was not the only source of a vital part When more than one manufacturer interpreted specifications and blueprints difficulties arose 20 1 GD amp T 20 2 When several companies manufacture the same part each must drill holes within the same tolerance for the parts to be interchangeable Even though manufacturers thought they were following the tolerance specifications the parts were not inter changeable The problem arose from the order in which measurements were made Alignment Information 8 A part was usually laid on a flat surface A and 3 O T Surface A aligned first with one straight edge B then with a another C Side B If one manufa
28. It is advisable to use Save Preferences only before you start drawing Otherwise you may be saving data that you do not want in new files For example if you choose Save Preferences on a file with a detail view and multiple models all new files will contain a detail view window and multiple models Preferences The Basics The Drafting Assistant The patented Drafting Assistant is the feature that makes Graphite unique among design and drafting software products The Drafting Assistant thinks like a drafter it automatically knows where you typically want construction lines and displays them temporarily when you need them The Drafting Assistant also makes it easy to select existing points for construction by displaying information about the pointer s location in the drawing area If a Drafting Assistant notation displays when you click the construction snaps onto the geometry precisely without requiring finely tuned eye hand coordination or tedious selection of special modifiers modes or other specialized construction tools The following topics are covered in this chapter e Snapping onto Geometry e Drafting Assistant Construction Lines e Permanent Construction Lines Snapping onto Geometry When the pointer is in the drawing area it has a snap point function The snap point locks onto specific points on existing objects as you move the pointer near them The Drafting Assistant The Drafting Assistant tells you when the
29. Patterns 11 12 Smart walls 11 14 Crosshatch type DIN 11 13 11 16 ISO 11 13 11 16 Cut Command 10 19 Detail view 13 18 Cylindricity GD amp T 20 5 CYMK picker 5 7 D Dash handle 5 16 Dash pen style 5 2 5 18 DAssistant Command 4 5 Preference 5 29 Datum GD amp T 20 9 Decimals A 4 of places 3 9 Dimensions 12 24 Status Line 7 4 Default settings Preferences 5 30 Define Attributes 19 2 BOM layout 19 12 Color 5 4 Pen pattern 5 15 Plane 8 7 8 11 View 14 19 Delete Attributes 19 5 Command 10 21 Construction lines 4 14 Detail view 13 18 Item numbers 19 10 Layer 13 7 Layer group 13 12 Model 14 7 Plane 8 13 Sheet 14 4 View orientation 14 21 Deselection 9 7 Detail view 2 2 13 13 14 30 14 37 Active 13 16 Associative 13 15 14 14 Crosshatching 14 16 Delete 13 18 Dimensions 14 16 Fills 14 16 Menu 13 17 Non associative 13 15 Scale 13 19 Text 14 16 Tool 13 15 Window 13 17 Detail view camera 14 14 14 35 Detail view operation Copy 13 18 Cut 13 18 Pan 13 18 Rotating area 13 16 Zoom 13 20 Index Diagrams A 3 Dialog boxes using 3 13 Diameter GD amp T 20 7 Diametral Arrow Dimension tool In 12 17 Out 12 17 Dimension 15 24 Arrowhead 12 31 Associative 12 2 Circle center line 7 15 Detail view 14 16 Dual 12 24 GD amp T 20 3 Layer 12 6 12 31 Menu 3 11 Move 12 5 Objects 12 4 Palette 12 1 Parametrics 12 36 16 3 Tools 12 2 Work plane 12 3 Dimension appearance 12 22 Col
30. Use the Cut command in the view window menu to remove all the view win dows except the Front view Resize the remaining Front view window so that it fills the drawing format 7 _ Model 2 Drawing Format 7l z N Front view of Model 1 detail camera not illustrated Front ov Model 1_ i Sheet 1_ii Choose Views gt Sheets The Sheets dialog box displays Click New Sheet 2 displays in the Rename box Click Current Sheet 2 with the blank Model 3 displays in the drawing area Model 2 Drawing Format placed on Sheet 1 Front view of drawing format not visible etail camera is not illustrated Front Model 1 Model 2 Model 3_ Sheet T a Choose Views gt Models The Models dialog box displays The blank Model 3 is the current model automat ically created with Sheet 2 picked up by the sheet camera and displayed on Sheet 2 Click Model 1 and click Current Models 14 11 Advanced Viewing Techniques Model 1 is picked up by the sheet camera and displayed on the second sheet e Model space 3 lt a a p Model 2 Drawing Format r i POE eS placed on Sheet 1 l a Sx t 70 T ie a a A sla _ pa Front view of a Model 1 on Sheet 1 with drawing format not visible etail camera is not illustrated Fon w Model 2 Model 3
31. Using Parametrics The parametric mechanism is point driven It locates the points and then connects them with the appropriate geometry much like the childhood activity of connect the dots It is not unlike drawing with a compass triangle and T square To begin determine where the endpoints are and then draw lines to connect the points Or you might figure out where the center of an arc should be where the arc begins and ends and use a compass to connect the points Basic Rules 1 Define the geometry completely Each object must relate to another object Dimensions must define every aspect of the geometry The geometry may be over dimensioned according to standard drafting practice Do not include extraneous text as part of a dimension A single is acceptable Using Parametrics The parametric mechanism recognizes R to mean a radius measuring the real value of the geometry 2 Keep it simple If the part is complex construct small segments resolving as you go solving any parametric problem before proceeding 3 Return to the original part between tests Use the Undo command to revert to the original state of the parametric part between tests In this way you won t introduce an unwanted constraint 4 Consider the following assumptions made by the parametric mechanism e Horizontal and vertical lines maintain their orientation e Connected lines remain connected eLines tangent to arcs remain tangent if the
32. e Set the preferences you prefer such as the Pen Style Grid and selection modes For more information see Chapter 5 Basic Environment Setting e Display the Triad symbol using the Show Triad command This illustrates the work plane orientation that acts as a point of reference when drawing in 3D e Display the Trackball e In the view menu of the Trackball choose Trimetric The sheet rotates so that your construction is seen from the Trimetric view The Design Process e Create the 3D model using the tool palette and Graphite commands e To observe multiple view orientations while you are modeling choose Sheet fe Into View from the Views menu and then specify the Views Design 4 layout View windows displaying the Top Front and SS _ Ax_ f LL Right view orientations are displayed at quarter scale along the right side of the screen a For more information on Sheet into O Views see Chapter 14 Advanced View ing Techniques Drawing Formats When the model is complete or to be submitted for review you might want a drafting version incorporating several views on a drawing format with dimensions and annotation To create import a drawing format and make adjustments to the views as necessary or use a premade layout with format in Sheet Into View This example shows a premade layout with four vi
33. entity translation to and from AutoCAD and Tips for translation read the DXF_r12 doc file located in the folder where Graphite is installed This document is sorted by TYPE So if you have a problem with dimensions look for the Dimensions section in this list and see if your problem is listed Important Before you attempt to export always save your file in the most current version of Graphite If you are exporting a file created in an earlier version of the program open the file in the most current version save it close it then reopen in the most current version Dimensions Exporting Files 1 It is recommended that you use a Plotter font for your dimensions for the best possible translation into AutoCAD 2 Dimstyles with the following tolerance settings translate in the manner listed below It is recommended that you use one of the DIMSTYLES marked good for the best quality translation The test was done using a Plotter Font mapped to the standard TXT font in AutoCAD Appendix C DWG Notes C 2 DIMSTYLE RESULTS XXX good xxx tol good Xxx upper lower tolerance will be missing VVY XXX dimension text will be missing yyy XXX good xxx basic good _XXX_ good If you want text symbols i e degree or diameter symbols to export with your dimensions create the dimensions in Graphite using a Plotter font Importing Files 1 Dimensions in AutoCAD that contain multiple colors extensions lines arrow head
34. point at the same position of the line endpoint So when you select the endpoint of the line you also select the dimension control point ie ahs _ p A Ss pop endpoint Line Dimension control soe amine l Dimensions are associative relative to the points they measure If you change the length of a line using the Edit Objects dialog box the dimension will not update because the point was not changed To correct the dimension select the dimen sion s vertex point and drag it to the new endpoint of the line Using the Dimension Tools Graphite s dimensioning tools are on a separate palette which you can drag around the drawing area Show Palette This command in the Dimension menu displays the dimension palette on the screen The dimensioning tools can be used to measure either an object or the area between objects Once you have dimensioned an object or space the dimensions update when you make changes to the geometry OZDEN AALA Using the Dimension Tools Horizontal Vertical Oblique Perpendicular Radial Arrow Out Radial Arrow In Diametral Arrow Out Diametral Arrow In Angular Arc Length Balloon The first four tools on the dimension palette have subpalettes for base line chain and ordinate style dimensions g g 5 g O Some of the dimensioning tools such as the Horizontal and Vertical tools require that two points be selected others such as
35. sions to your drawing 6 Viewing Your Designs Contains information on viewing your geometry 7 Documents Contains information on opening saving import ing and exporting files 8 Parametrics and Symbols Contains information on using parametrics and placing symbols 9 Geometric Analysis Contains information on performing a 2D analysis on your geometry User Guide Documentation Appendices Operators and Units Special Characters Creating Wireframe Models DWG Notes Program Settings amp Files Other Glossary Task Index Index Graphics Describes all operators and units which are accepted by all Graphite data fields Lists all special characters not directly available from the keyboard and symbols that you can use in Graphite Provides rules that will assist the 3D user in creat ing wireframe geometry Provide notes to help the Windows user complete a successful dwg translation Contains all of the default settings for Graphite fol lowing installation It also includes a list of all the folders and files that come with the program Defines terminology used in Computer Aided Design and Drafting CADD and Graphite Groups various tasks according to their functions and the location in the manual Lists features tools and actions in Graphite and their associated page number location in the man ual Most of the graphics in the manuals apply to both platforms of Graphite In those instances
36. the Drafting Assistant snaps to the grid spacing In other words if the grid is set to 25 inch spac ing you can t construct an object closer than 25 inch to another object The coordinate symbol appears at the origin location X 0 Y 0 when the grid is visible Tech Note To change the Hit Radius choose Layout gt Prefer ences gt Snap 0 0 Origin Coordinate Symbol Changing the Grid Spacing and Subdivision 1 Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Grid The Grid dialog box displays cd SY 2 Enter the desired values for Grid Spacing and or of subdivisions Grid Spacing of subdivisions al 3 Click OK and the changes are saved Cancel Click Cancel if you don t want to save the changes 5 23 Drawing at Full Scale Whether you are designing or drafting a highly detailed blueprint you should cre ate the geometry at its actual size Graphite allows you to construct the part using full scale specifications and then set the visual scale of the drawing In this way the part dimensions to its true to life measurements Drawing at full scale has the fol lowing advantages e Scaling mistakes are eliminated e Dimensions are automatic you must dimension manually if you do not draw at full scale e Associative dimensions update when the object is edited manual dimensions do not e The size relationship of imported parts is compatible e Calculations for 2D analysis are accurate Once your
37. the Edit menu Copy Delete Pan 13 18 The Properties option allows you to name the detail view change the view scale entering 2 would zoom into the area by a factor of 2 and define the locations of its corners relative to the origin Top Bottom 6 013 Cancel ok The Cut option allows you to remove the Detail View from the sheet and place it on the Clipboard This is useful for placing the view on a different sheet Choose the Edit gt Paste to paste the cut view window This command does not cut the geometry To cut the geometry choose Edit gt Cut The Copy option allows you to place a copy of the view window on the Clipboard This is useful for pasting multiple identical views onto one or more sheets Choose the Edit gt Paste to paste a copy of the view window This command does not copy the geometry To copy the geometry choose Edit gt Copy This option deletes the active window and makes the sheet active It does not delete geometry This command allows you to move the geometry inside the view window A hand icon appears which you can use to drag the contents of the win dow Resize Changing the View Scale When you release the mouse button the Pan func tion ends m This Resize option allows you to drag a new view window This function differs from dragging the window borders With the Resize command you do not have to change each border individually si
38. 1 1 Chapter May Our sanaaa E cantons tate ans paces edges eres apne aaeeee 1 1 User Guide Chapter Breakdown sepana a EE dient 1 3 Graphite Overview ssccdsiceessecesssiconsssccosssvacenctaisevsdensuuceseusecsevedecscvsesstecbsdvedseestses 2 1 Wir frame Drafting rnern isna sauna EEEE OEE AE EEO EA 2 1 The Model sssrinin r r a ENEE EEE TE 2 2 The Drafting Assistant sateisena nan ena AEN aAA ASAE n VETA Ee N AREN 2 5 The Desion Proci is cass cesicesdvieayaionc eaten anita eainar ates ceslec daiaav adeno Ulster edatentaanenebs cesleeede 2 6 THE Basie isscccsscecesescsscascsccdeccsccssssvecactccstedesccdevesaavsvescesssscssas cescsssvesssrcadestedscess 3 1 Using a MOUSE esrin o oepa TEA EEE paves anu dose long ETRE EEA EEE EE AEE 3 1 Parts of the Graphite Window suisssevsisulsnswssasnansdinelsasendvone vests deeneavacnaatteneteneeuaneadte 3 3 MEDU BAN ur ee E E A a E E O 3 10 PreferenCes ceyatscrieeitenceient ak a unaien meee wana arian OA 3 15 The Drafting ASSistantt 2 ccccccsececezeccdecdesedecedscvaceesso0sittccece cesses cecsesacdeeceddsbeieeacaiie 4 1 SNAPPING onto GEOMELY Imoa ia aao a ueis AT E A oS 4 1 Drafting Assistant Construction LINES surmeesisusneiiua aoun Erea na 4 8 Permanent Construction LINES es cssseenss ressvisnie sees EE EN AAE EAE 4 10 Section 2 Setting the Environment Basic Environment Settings iis ccscscssccssessscccasscesescossvevevcesssessscoscsvesscosseeestecssss 5 1 Pern Styles eeacvcscdeansvecascestedsiniide oninia
39. 10 Selecting a tool 3 5 Selection Mask 9 4 9 8 Selection setting Blinking 9 2 Preferences 5 29 Selection tools Select by Line 9 6 Select by Polygon 9 6 Selection 9 3 Tracer 9 5 Send to Back command 13 22 Sheet 2 2 6 6 14 1 14 35 Command 14 3 Creating 14 3 Delete 14 4 Making current 14 4 Models Views 14 34 Renaming 14 3 Sheet into view 2 7 Index Using 14 2 View 13 13 14 38 Sheet camera Model 2 2 14 5 14 35 rotating 2 3 Sheet into view 2 7 5 26 14 16 Erroneous 14 18 Format 14 18 15 31 Layouts 14 18 Visual scale 15 27 Sheet view Command 13 14 Model 2 2 14 5 Rotate 6 8 Show Attributes 19 5 19 8 BOM palette 19 6 Dimension palette 12 3 Grid 5 23 Points 9 9 Trackball 6 8 8 2 TrackCube 6 8 Triad 6 10 8 2 Shrink objects 10 10 Simple Trim tool 10 5 Sine of angle A 2 Single Line tool 7 8 Perpendicular 7 8 Perpendicular lines 7 8 Point 7 9 Tangent 7 8 Size Dimension 12 29 Objects 10 16 Slide bar Color 5 8 Lightness 5 8 Slope splines 7 28 Smart 17 5 Pointer 3 6 7 2 Symbol 17 5 Wall 7 11 Smart wall Crosshatching 11 14 Layer 13 9 Smart Wall tool 7 11 Architecture 7 11 Chamfer 7 11 Fillet 7 11 Symbols 7 12 Snap command Point 4 7 Alignment Angles 4 6 Basic 4 5 Creation angles 4 7 Hit radius 4 6 Mode 4 7 Snap point Drafting Assistant 2 5 4 2 4 4 Preference 5 28 Solid fill 11 17 11 18 Spacing text 11 9 Special Characters B 1 Spell Check 11 4 Spline Creating a text file 15 1
40. 2 Hold down the SHIFT Windows or the CONTROL Macintosh key 3 Choose Arrange gt Zoom In Out Previous or Alb or Choose one of the Zoom tools in the tool palette The geometry inside the view is zoomed All commands from the Arrange menu work inside the view when you hold down the SHIFT Windows or the CONTROL Macintosh key while choosing from the menu The keyboard Zoom commands are not designed to work within a view window Views Menu The view control commands in the Views menu allow you to control the active view When you have overlapping views you can think of them as a stack where only the top view can be active If the Auto Front command is turned on and you click a view it comes to the top of the stack and you can work in it This may cause some problems when you click an object in the top view to select it but an under lying view activates instead To remedy this situation turn off the Auto Front command Select the view you want to work in and choose Views gt Bring To Front The objects in the view you brought to the front remain on top even when you click a different view visible in the top view s space Auto Front Command The Auto Front command in the Views menu overrides the Bring To Front or Send To Back settings When this setting is in effect you can simply click on a view to bring it to the front and make it active When this setting is not active you can t inadvertently bring a view to the fro
41. 32 Setting the visual scale with the Sheet Into View command 0 0665 15 22 Plotting t a TAS ise k a e re AREAN EEEE E 15 42 Selection DisPlayiNS POWs pera EE N E EE 9 9 Selecting all Oj Cts iiini n e E T EaR ERN O a 9 4 Selecting a single ODjECt a dcsshadveisesantedvcacesepsaibel acastneaieladsinniedanhaedand Ei 9 4 Selecting multiple objects using the Shift Key eerren 9 4 Selecting multiple objects by dragging eisenii iii Ea e 9 4 Showing and Hiding Points with Stroke 0 rrietan A Aa 9 10 SCLSCUNS PIOUS E E T A AA E A T 9 10 Using the Selection Mask sevasisinssiesdaadscndihen duunnonseatseandvlsnntdanadl iaa 9 8 Sheets Cheating A EW SNES sees tcecstiheresadcncaceasentensaceveadintewsatenneestusnsnecastdnnmtaresnatietadeated 14 3 Deleting a SHE Steins saces disor cesinctisinnsaalssaatislen uteaatlsa E A E eaa 14 4 Making a sheet the current sh etiesnciacriseiaian i a 14 4 Recovering from deleting a sheet displaying geometry 14 18 Renaming avShe Cte scciedecdecsdvadtesaaeistadstuadacssatesidanvantsdenastanderancdsdanistueduandetwenstnes 14 3 Placing geometry into a view using Sheet Into View 0 ccceeeeeceeteeeenees 14 17 Smart Walls Creating ar smart SVM esiisa sacra aelaee E mechani ete anes 17 5 Using the Smart Wall tO6 o isseas dscnccensencescsuuandacvanenoanaits A A Ea i 7 11 Wall SVM OIS seesinane inie iian E e O e a A n iA 7 12 Using symbols for smart windows and Ooms ss secsceniisriieriiiiiieire 17 5 Splines Crea
42. 7 6 Creating Additional Geometry with Status Fields 1 With the Single Line tool still selected from the previous example click 2 more points Type 4 Press the Tab key and type 25 Press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Another line is drawn Creating New Geometry with Status Fields 1 2 7 8 9 Choose the Selection tool so the Single Line status field clears Click the Single Line tool again The X status field is active showing that you can enter a value for the X coordi nate of the beginning point of the line Type 0 Note Do not press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh until you reach step 10 Press the Tab key The Y field highlights Type 0 Press the Tab key The dX field highlights The dX value is the delta X the numeric difference between the beginning and ending X coordinate Type 2 Press the Tab key The dY field highlights Type 2 10 Press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh The line is drawn Creating Geometry Offset from a Point If you want to create some geometry that is offset from an existing point you can use the Status Line to specify the offset I 2 3 Select the tool you want to use Move the pointer over the control point from which you want the offset Click once to lock onto that point The Message Line 4 Click in the appropriate X or Y field in the Status Line placing the text cursor at the end of the entry 5 Type the offset suc
43. ATEN N odes 8 10 Parametrics Changing the dimensions to actual Measurements eee eeeteeeeteeeeees 16 8 Creating a parametric dimension eee ceeteeeeeeeteeeeteeeeeetteeeeenteeeennneeeess 16 4 Creating GEOmeteo ina EEEE amen Wayerarna maim amnion 16 3 Using a text fil for Parametric Varia DSS uenee ari 16 7 Using conditional expressions in parametrics 0 0 cece ene enteey 16 4 Task Index Using parametrics and grouped QSCOMEUTY ec eee eeeteeeetttteeeetteeeennnees 16 26 Using parametrics for Wave Toim uerrini i in n na E N ane A 4 Using the Resolve command with parametriCS eesssescsenrsrerereneernes 16 6 Pen Styles Changing one characteristic of a pen Style wo ccc eeereeeeteeeestteteeentneeeees 5 19 Changing the pen characteristics Of an ODjeCt cc eeceeeeeeteeeentteeeeeneeeeeens 5 3 Redefining the specification of a pen Style ecceeeteeeettteeestteeeeeenteees 5 20 Specifying the color of the Current Pen 0 eeeeteeceeetteeeeteteeeeeteeeeennereeeenees 5 4 Specifying a new pattern for the current Pe eeeeteeeeteteeesenteeeenees 5 13 Specifying a new weight for the current Densitas raiaui kiayi 5 12 Planes Deleting a Plane seis swcssicisictintsiasisteicsaewlastda vsadace mca sade E EEANN EEA 8 13 REGS GA Planes EEEa PEE AEAEE 8 13 R naming a plane cccesissstesadtecaye n EAE E E AA 8 13 Setting a new Work Planes seicissicasascdsdavasarensavedsee dvasedelvonnaadatieasunvenssaud smaedtnes 8 10 Specifying a n
44. Arc tools P Circle tools Ellipse tools Polygon tools Fa Moke e0Q0 NOOO A0QO uo E Spline tools 7 1 Drawing Tools Drawing Techniques Most drawing tools allow two methods for creating an object clicking and dragging Clicking Dragging This method allows you to create objects by click ing points with the mouse The benefit of this tech nique is that you can perform unrelated activities such as zooming while you are creating the geom etry The drag method allows you to indicate two points by dragging from one to the other Press and hold down the mouse button to set the first point Next drag the mouse to the location for the next point and release the mouse button The benefit of this technique is that a rubberband image appears dur ing the construction to show you how the object will appear once you release the mouse button You can use either or both methods to construct most objects To make object creation easier Graphite s tools contain a feature we call Smart Pointers As you work with a tool the tool icons show you the points you must indicate to create an object with the tool SN Each dot on the icon the Single Line tool icon is shown here represents a point you must place either by clicking or by dragging The smart pointer indicates the order for designating points as you are drawing the geometry Creating a Line by Clicking 1 Select the Single Line tool from the tool
45. Attributes 19 5 Dimension 12 30 Edit command 5 12 Pen 5 11 Undoing pen edit 5 13 Window view 13 17 Windows graphite ini 5 27 Installing 1 5 MaxFont 5 27 On Line help 1 5 OS settings 5 27 Index I 19 prefs vlm 3 16 5 28 Print setup 15 26 Recent file list 5 27 Screen 5 27 Wireframe model 2 1 Witness lines 12 33 Work layer 13 8 Indicator 3 4 3 10 13 8 Work Plane 8 6 Work plane 8 6 3 Point plane 8 11 Define 8 11 Dimensions 12 3 Origin 8 9 Set to screen 8 14 Setting 8 7 8 10 Specifying position 8 8 World coordinate system 8 12 Z Zoom All 13 2 Commands 13 1 Detail view 13 20 In 13 2 Out 13 2 13 3 Previous 13 2 Stroke 13 3 Tools 13 2 Index 1 20
46. Center Point Circle tool urcireiinraninni a paaa 7 15 Using the Opposite Point Circle 166L wwii eaten EE 7 16 Using the Tangent Point Circle tool eccceecseeeeeereeeneteeseneseeesnteeeennnes 7 17 Colors Changing the Background Color for Visualization 6 11 Customizing the Color Palettes i scesasssesvoveictniciertodasgetasee vucemmnaseesea anaes 5 10 Defining COlOtsS issisisiatcdiseticseasssiananeds dias ssanakuentsantsbsnamaneassaad EA E n 5 4 Construction Lines and Geometry Creating Construction GEOMEILY spiedini io Ean A O EAEE 4 13 Displaying Dynamic Construction Lines while Constructing Geometry 4 9 Displaying Dynamic Construction Lines with Existing Geometry ece 4 9 Creating Multiple Construction LinESiseiciseniisriniiinaaai aia 4 12 Creating Parallel Construction Lines 0cccccccccccccceteeeteeeeeeeeensnseeeeeeeeeeenenaes 4 13 Specifying the Construction Line Angle with the Mouse cceeeeeeeeees 4 12 Specifying the Construction Line Offset with the MOuse cceeeeeeereees 4 12 Task Index Specifying x y coordinates with the MOUSE 2 ec eeeeceeeeeteeeeetteeeetttteeeenes 4 12 Using Stroke Construction Hnes secesie i a E ENE dec 4 11 Creating Geometry Using the Extrude command sisi civesicinted cecaseasdsctsceiinasseicutinswadantad aunnbanaadlancaeant 8 4 Creating a line DY CHOKING isseire sen n E O ANR 7 2 Creating a line by diaggin g oesneisi nna ni a A AA E E 7 3 Creatine a PONa nanne a a eA E VI E E
47. Fields CYMK Contains the color spectrum from which you choose a color Click or drag within the wheel to select the color The color values appear in the Hue and Saturation data fields Allows you to set the lightness for a particular color Place the cursor over the slide and drag to the desired lightness The lightness value appears in the data field Values can be entered into these fields to select a color There are three bars one each for Red Green and Blue Place the cursor over the slide and drag it to adjust the color value for each bar Values are entered in the data field Values can be entered into these fields to select a color Name Crayon The color name displays when you choose a crayon color Crayon Box Crayon Displays the colors available for selecting More Choices Fewer This toggles between the two options Choosing Choices button More Choices displays two icons for the HSL Picker HSV Picker CYMK Picker or Crayon Picker displays Choosing Few Choices turns off the icon display Original New Fields Original displays the current color setting for the color you are defining When you define a new color the swatch is gray New displays the new color you have selected Cancel and OK buttons Clicking Cancel closes the color display without saving the color selection Clicking OK closes the dialog box and saves the settings you have made Choose a color from the color display Click OK and the co
48. Folder 6 files Holes Folder 5 files Symbols Folder 6 folders Architct Assorted Fastenr Fastenrm Holes Template Architct Folder 2 folders Plandoor Planwin Plandoor Folder 7 files Planwin Folder 7 files Assorted Folder 11 files Fastenr Folder 4 folders Mchscrw Nuts Pins Washers Mchscrw Folder 14 files Nuts Folder 2 files D 4 Pins Folder 3 files Washers 6 files Fastenrm Folder 2 folders Mchscrwm Nutsm Mchscrwm Folder 14 files Nutsm Folder 2 files Holes Folder 14 files Template Folder 2 folders Fluidpwr P amp id Fluidpwr Folder 8 files P amp id Folder 3 files Macintosh Graphite Folder Files Graphite Graphite Prefs Graphite feb Graphite ini DXF IN 12 DXF OUT 12 VELDXF CFG DXFVEL CFG DXLATE IDEAS OUT IGES2IN IGES2OUT Graphite EPS Folders Fonts Folder 4 files DIN Folder 3 files Ansi Folder 12 files Layouts Folder 18 files Graphite View Top View Trimetric Views Design 4 Views Draft 4 Views Front amp Right Views Top amp Front aFormat A amp 4Views AFormat B amp 4 Views aFormat C amp 4Views aFormat D amp 4Views aFormat A amp View aFormat B amp View aFormat C amp View and aFormat D amp View Scripts Folder 5 files ambient vli parallel vli point vli spot vli and recent 1st SYMBOLS Folder 6 folders ASSORTED Folder 11 files ARCHITCT Folder 2 folders PLANDOOR PLANWIN PLANDOOR Folder 7 files PLANWIN Folder 7 files TEMPL
49. Masonry Brickwork Masonry Increased strength Crosshatching and Solid Fills 11 13 Adding Details Tech Note Crosshatching and Smart Walls If you want to cross hatch smart walls containing smart symbols you have to segment the walls first to cre ate hatch boundaries Since smart symbols cover only wall segments they can t be used as hatch boundaries 11 14 Masonry Light Brick Masonry Pumice Plaster Mortar 111 Concrete Reinforced Concrete Waterproof Glass Porcelain Firebrick Steel alloy Stell non alloy Heavy Metal Rubber Elastic materials Water Oil Specifying the Fill or Crosshatch Area Plaster Plate Plaster Mortar Concrete non reinforced Pumice concrete Fiber Ceramic Insulating material Sealing material Cast Iron Light Metal Durable plastic Thermoplastic Fuel The selected objects must completely enclose the area you want to crosshatch or fill For example to crosshatch or fill the object below you would select all of the lines making up the part including the holes The exterior lines define the boundary for the crosshatching or solid fill The two holes tell Graphite that those enclosed areas within the original area should not be crosshatched or filled Once you have selected the lines and holes in the Pen menu Crosshatching and Solid Fills you can choose the Hatch Fill Crosshatch or the Solid Fill command and specify Tip
50. Message Line reads 2 Point Center Ellipse Pick center of ellipse Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Indicate the center of the ellipse The Message Line has now changed telling you to pick corner of control rectan gle 3 Indicate the corner of the rectangle defining the ellipse If the two points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the center Drawing Tools Description and Use The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point and the length and angle of the semi major and semi minor axes of the ellipse ly L1 A1 L2 A2 90 Opposite Corner Ellipse Tool This tool in the fifth subpalette of the main tool palette draws an ellipse inscribed in the rectangle specified by the opposite corners you indicate Using the Opposite Corner Ellipse Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Opposite Corner Ellipse Pick first cor ner of rectangle Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Indicate one corner of the rectangle defining the ellipse The Message Line now reads Opposite Corner Ellipse Pick opposite corner of con trol rectangle 3 Indicate the opposite corner of the defining rectangle If the two points are o
51. Next Exam ine the groups shown to determine why the position of each group is not related to any other A group consisting of a single point is particularly telling This investiga tion can require some clever thought because the solution may not be obvious The Resolve command cannot resolve ellipses and splines unless the ellipse or spline is contained in a group See the section on Parametrics and Grouped Objects Specifying Parametric Variables in a Text File If you frequently use parametrics which contain many variables you can create a text file to specify the variables and avoid entering them in the Resolve dialog box each time you resolve the parametrics Height 12 Height R17 12 Diameter 5 R 17 Diameter 5 Height 12 R 17 Diameter 5 Create a text file which alternates the variables and the values using white space SPACEBAR TAB or ENTER Windows RETURN Macintosh between entries Graphite assumes the first entry is a variable and the second is the value for that variable Your text file might look like the examples shown here or any other arrangements Using a Text File for Parametric Variables 1 Create the text file using any word processor or spreadsheet and saving it as Text only 2 In Graphite select the geometry and parametric dimensions 3 Choose Edit gt Resolve The Resolve dialog box displays Resolve File Cancel 4 Click File to sp
52. Rectangle Now you have one Sheet with two view windows one displaying the rectangle Model 1 and one displaying the circle which became Model 2 The Sheet cam era moves to the new Model 3 and an empty model space is displayed on the sheet Combining Sheets Views and Models 9 Activate the sheet by clicking on it and select File gt Import 10 Select the file ellipse vc6 and click OK The ellipse imports onto the current sheet and is added to Model 3 which was active when you performed the Jmport command Model 3 Ellipse Model 2 Circle Model1 a Rectangle Model 1 Fj Model 2 2 Model 3 11 Arrange the two view windows around the ellipse and rearrange the rectangle and the circle with the Zoom commands in the Arrange menu like in the follow ing graphic Tech Note In order to select overlapping view windows Auto Front must be deactivated as described in Chapter 13 Viewing Geometry 14 41 Advanced Viewing Techniques 12 Activate the sheet and in the Views menu deactivate the Show View Boundaries command 14 42 Graphite Documents A document is a Graphite file Whenever you open Graphite or choose New from the File menu a new document appears in its window The sheets and layers features add a great deal of flexibility to your documents They allow you to see various parts of a document individually
53. SAAE E AA EAE 7 19 Creating additional geometry with status data fields 7 6 Creating geometry offset from a POterio 7 6 Drawing a line perpendicular to another Object eee ect neeeenees 7 8 Drawing a line tangent or perpendicular to a CUIVE wo eee eeeeete tees 7 8 Using the Status LINE saincssicscssaxnahoctadantenssinsvarensasldeaie kan ied Er Eda 7 4 Crosshatching Adding crosshatchin gy s siccsiaitassgediviea oiia A EE EEEE 11 17 Editing an existing crosshatch pattern cumessrmssrsssiiniiieiiinei iniinis 11 18 Specifying the Fill or Crosshatch Area ecccceeteeeeeeereeeeeteeeeeenteeeeennereeeee 11 15 Using DIN cr sshatehing pisirin ie pewtaicepasecues ace E EE peta 11 18 Using ISO Grosshatchinig de en N EA EER 11 17 Dimensions Adding tolerance and Mits ssininere eiin a EAE 12 6 Automatically placing dimensions on a separate layer cscccccccrccrcrene 12 6 Creating a GD amp T label sosisini ara a n a aiaa 19 12 Dimensioning objects and placement asseris 12 4 Editing a GDS T labelaren e N E 19 13 Moving the dimension concierne bea didn tine asin x 12 5 Scaling text and diMensiOMs iid isesdscdsicesnadsiunasvascnddannnndesehedteloneantedssocasansetnnnanas 15 30 Using an editing shortcut With GD amp T i eeceeereeeenereeeeeteteeeesntteeeeneatees 19 13 Using fixed dimensions y css isdeageindencsre auseindanedeamaneme alae 12 6 Using the dimension status data fields cssscccescceeriinennsiecerieernacens aise 12 5 Using the Automatic
54. Spline tool subpalette If necessary click the points you want to lock the points on either side of the point you will change Use the Selection tool to select the point you want to change Drag the point to the new location The dotted lines that appear tangent to the end portions of the spline are tangent control arms They allow you to adjust the curvature of the spline leading up to the endpoints without moving the endpoints themselves To do this select the endpoint of the tangent control arm and drag it to another location with the 4 way pointer that appears 7 27 Drawing Tools 7 28 Editing the End Slope of a Spline 1 Select the spline with the Selection tool 2 Choose Layout gt Show Points If the menu says Hide Points you don t need to choose it Click in the drawing area to deselect the spline If necessary select the Lock Spline Control Points tool from the Spline tool subpalette If necessary select the point you want to lock but not the endpoint 6 Use the Selection tool to select the point at the end of the tangent control arm you want to move 7 Drag the point to a new location You cannot move both endpoints of a spline at the same time You must select and move the endpoints individually 3D Drawing Tools The process of moving from 2D to 3D geometry creation is relatively seamless All of the tools you use to create 2D geometry in Graphite are also used to create 3D geometry Howeve
55. Tangent to object Macintosh Drawing Tools Description and Use 2 Click the first point on the circle Notice that the Message Line displays the next step for using the tool 3 Drag or click the second and third points Dragging displays the rubberband circle If you place any of the three points on an existing object the circle is drawn through that point If you click an object while holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key the circle is drawn tangent to the object rather than through the indicated point You may combine the placement of these points to cre ate a circle through a specific point of one object and tangent to another object or a circle tangent to three objects or any other combination If you drag the first two points a rubberband image guides your construction The Status Line indicates the X Y coordinates for each of the three points y1 x2 Y2 X3 Y3 Tangent Point Circle Tool Q This tool in the fourth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a circle tangent to the two objects you indicate Using the Tangent Circle Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Tangent Circle Enter diameter then pick first tangent object 2 You can enter a diameter for the circle in the status field DI 3 Click the objects to which the circle is to be tangent Ellipse Tools F F Jaa The Ellipse tools on
56. View 14 35 Advanced Viewing Techniques e Sheets are arranged behind each other so you can see only one at a time e You can create as many sheets as you want but with each sheet you automati cally create a blank model similar to the drafting board when you start with a clean sheet Independent of how many models exist you can delete all sheets but one the current sheet since Graphite needs at least one sheet to display the models even if they are blank e When you delete a sheet all Detail Views resting on that sheet are deleted You can display as many Detail Views as you want on one sheet but only one sheet Sheet View at a time When you change the current sheet the related model is always activated You can change this relation only by assigning another model to that sheet Models A model is a collection of geometry dimensions text fills and hatching Models are placed in an infinite three dimensional area A model can be blank then we call it Model space just as it is when you launch Graphite and look at a blank sheet Images of models are picked up by either the Sheet camera or by Detail View cameras and projected on the sheet The view of the Sheet camera is called a Sheet View and the views of the detail cameras are called Detail Views 14 36 Combining Sheets Views and Models e You can create and delete as many models as you want e When you change the cu
57. Weight Line weight converts to 1 point Line patterns Not supported all lines are converted into solid lines All geometry is exported as individual elements except in the following circum stances e Fill geometry e Grouped geometry Importing and Exporting Graphite BMI Sheets Current view and model on the sheet only Models Current model only Views Current view only Line LINE Circle Arc CIRC Spline SPLIN Ellipse ELPS Text textEd SUPT Hatch BEGA ENDA PLOG Fill BEGA ENDA PLOG Smart Walls LINE Linear Dimensions Radial Dimension Diametric Dimension Angular Dimension BEGI ENDI ISAC ISAR ISLN ISTX BEGI ENDI ISAC ISAR ISLN ISTX BEGI ENDI ISAC ISAR ISLN ISTX BEGI ENDI ISAC ISAR ISLN ISTX Arc Length BEGI ENDI ISAC ISAR ISLN ISTX Geometrical Tol General elements Balloon BALN AROW Group SETS ELNM General elements EPS Translator This translator enables you to share data between Graphite and other eps applica tions It was optimized for Adobe Illustrator 5 0 but will work with other applica tions that support the EPS file format This translator allows you to import a postscript file into Graphite text is not translated and export drawing data 15 19 Graphite Documents 15 20 Translator Notations In postscript s expression drawing data is described as a path 2D drawing data is expressed by the values you give for the path from the startpoint to th
58. a Drawing Format il 2 Start Graphite and display an Untitled document If necessary set the Units of measure you want to use by choosing Lay out gt Preferences gt Units Construct the geometry at full size saving the construction as you work Use the Zoom commands and tools to display the part at an appropriate magnifica tion so that you can see what you are doing Choose File gt Print Setup Windows or Page Set up Macintosh command to set the paper size you will use for plotting or printing Choose Layout gt Drawing Size to set the drafting scale for plotting or printing 5 25 Basic Environment Settings Tech Note If you add text and dimen sions before scaling the draw ing with the Drawing Size command you have to select all text and dimensions with the Selection Mask and set the text size again to the value you want to have it plotted on the paper See Scaling Text and Dimensions in Chapter 5 Graphite Documents 5 26 de 8 Specify the drafting scale you want to use for your drawing such as 1 120 or 1 10 for 1 inch to represent 10 feet If you are not concerned about scale and you only want the final geometry to fit on the selected paper size you can spec ify Fit to adjust the geometry automatically to the paper size Dimension the part and add text When you specify the visual scale for your drawing with the Drawing Size com mand Graphite scales text dimensions hatches and line pat
59. a new docu ment an empty work area displays This work area a sheet is an infinitely large drawing space where you can create a model of any size The newly opened sheet displays the Top view by default on the x y plane of the model space picked up by the sheet camera Since you are going to construct geometry in 3D you need to rotate the sheet camera to a 3D view You can also start drafting in 2D and then continue drafting in 3D simply by chang ing the view Graphite Untitled 1 D Q QO ia A iA E a 2 004 A 59 2 10 Once you have rotated the sheet camera it is as though the model rotates so that you can see all the x y and z directions while you are drawing y 3D Model 3D Top view The Sheet camera is rotated to the Trimetric view You have several options for this rotation e Manually rotate with the on screen Trackball 3D Viewing 6 7 Advanced Environment Settings Tip If you want to see the Triad at the origin 0 0 0 set the grid spacing to O in the Pref erences submenu in the Lay out menu 6 8 e Select a view from the pop up menu in the Trackball window e Choose a view from the Views submenu in the Views menu Show Hide TrackballlTrackCube This command toggles the display of the Trackball TrackCube window You can use the Trackball TrackCube to rotate the view orientation in the active detail view win dow or the sheet view as long as no view windows h
60. a single file Delete This button deletes the selected highlighted Layer Group This does not delete the layers in the group Set Group This button sets the currently selected high lighted group as the work group This changes the layer settings for the current model to those speci fied by the layer group Rename This button renames the currently selected high lighted group with the name in the Layer Group data field 13 11 Viewing Geometry 13 12 A check mark by a Layer Group indicates that the model s current layer settings match those of the indicated Layer Group Creating a Layer Group 1 Click New A new Layer Group appears in the group list and is selected It records the current layer settings and displays these settings in the Layers list The Layers list contains all the layers present in a file 2 Choose the layer settings Visible layers are indicated by the Eye Symbol and can be hidden by clicking on the symbol Hidden layers can be made visible by clicking the location where the Eye Symbol would be The work layer is indi cated by the check mark and can be set by double clicking on the desired layer 3 Close the dialog box and the settings are retained If you want more layer groups repeat steps 1 and 2 before closing the dialog box Renaming a Layer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the group list 2 Enter a new name in the Layer Group data field 3 Click Rename Deleting a L
61. an Axis of the Geometry To rotate you view around an axis of your geometry change the view to Top either from the z Trackball menu or choosing Views gt Views gt Top This os makes the screen axes the same as the axes of the block Rotate View around the X axis To rotate around the x axis place the cursor on the lt lt Trackball hold down the SHIFT key and drag the cur sor up or down Your geometry rotates around the x axis Holding down the SHIFT key locks both the y and z C axes Rotate View around the Y axis To rotate around the y axis place the cursor on the se Trackball hold down the CTRL key Windows or the OPTION key Macintosh and drag the cursor to the left or right Your geometry rotates around the y axis Holding down the CTRL key Windows or the OPTION L key Macintosh locks both the x and z axes Rotate View around the Z axis To rotate around the z axis place the cursor on the Trackball hold down the CTRL SHIFT keys Win dows or the key Macintosh and drag the cursor g in a circular motion Your geometry rotates around the Z axis Holding down the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or a the key Macintosh locks both the x and y axes Rotate View around the Screen Axis With the same block displayed in any view simply use the key combinations listed previously to rotate around th
62. and plots 5 13 Basic Environment Settings Setting a Standard Pattern 1 Choose Pen gt Pattern The submenu appears 2 Select a pattern The pen takes on the new pattern Setting a User defined Pattern 1 Choose Pen gt Pattern gt More The Line fonts dialog box appears Line fonts Ea x Solid a VUTTENL Dotted Center Dashed Hidden Phantom Dashdot Border Divide 2 Scroll down to the desired pattern and select it 3 Click Current The pen takes on the new pattern Defining and Editing Pen Patterns Graphite allows you to edit the standard patterns included with the program or cre ate and edit up to nineteen of your own patterns Define Pattern Command This command found by choosing Pen gt Pattern gt Define Pattern allows you to define up to nineteen line patterns Graphite considers each line segment and each space between line segments sepa rate dashes Each dash has a handle represented by a box attached to the vertical line extending from the end of each dash One complete element of the line pattern appears in the pattern window The default visible length is two inches If you want to create patterns with dashes or elements larger than two inches change the value in the Visible Length data field to an appropriate number the Pattern Window scales the pattern element accordingly Graphite automatically scales line patterns by the inverse of the scale factor set in Drawing Size di
63. and drag to the desired attribute As soon as you release the mouse button the selected attribute displays in the pop up menu When you mark this option the Edit button acti vates Clicking Edit displays a dialog box in which you can define the column width of the Bill of Materials table This pop up menu lets you select whether the Bill of Materials is drawn from the Top Down or from the Bottom Up In the User Widths dialog box you specify the width of the BOM columns individu ally When you check the option User Wodths in the Options dialog box the Edit button activates Clicking Edit displays the following dialog box Item 0 788783 Attribute 1 1 57757 Cancel In this dialog box all attributes of the actual layout appear For each attribute the respective column width displays The displayed values for the column widths are calculated by the word length of each attribute and the margin you indicate You can change the width for each column individually All values you specify are based on the units set in the Units dialog box Layout gt Preferences gt Units Attribute Order The order by which the attributes displays in the Bill of Materials is determined by the order the attributes were defined in the Define Attribute dialog box and cannot be changed in this box Creating A Bill of Materials A Bill of Materials will contain all the Item Numbers and their associated attributes The generated Bill of Materials
64. are saved in the list that follows the aRecentFileList line The first file in the list YF 22 in the example above is always the most recent file opened As new files are opened the file list gets shifted down The default number of files is four 4 The maximum number is eight 8 Saving Preferences All files save with the settings set for the file The characteristics used for new files the default settings appear in the preferences file Preferences Command This command in the Layout menu displays a submenu for setting various specifica tions Descriptions of the items in the submenu appear individually in this reference section You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file prefs vc6 Windows or Graphite prefs Macintosh Snap This box sets the alignment angles hit radius and other Drafting Assistant settings This is different from the Snap command explained in Chapter 4 Grid Units Selection Invert DAssistant AutoSave Save Preferences Save Palettes Saving Preferences This dialog box allows you to specify the spacing of the grid lines Choose Layout gt Show Hide Grid to turn the display of the grid on and off This dialog box specifies the units and precision for the current Graphite document Use this dialog box to set the color or blinking which shows that an object is selected Windows only This option allows you to invert your screen from white
65. attribute In the Attribute Name entry field the name Attribute 1 displays Rename the attribute by typing a name in the Attribute Name entry field like COST Specify a value for the attribute in the Default Value entry field The value you enter here can be changed in the Status Line during assignment like 2 50 If you use the sign the format must be Text not Number Select a format for the new attribute In the examples given above the format is Number Click the Format pop up menu and drag the mouse 1 pointer with the left mouse button pressed to the Text Text desired format As soon as you release the mouse Number button the selected format displays in the pop up Oty menu Click Redefine The new attribute name appears in the attributes list and the specified value and format is assigned to the attribute Close the Define Attributes dialog box by clicking the Close button Windows or the Close box Macintosh Show or Hide Attributes Only visible attributes indicated by a eye mark beside the attribute name can be seen during assignment The user cannot edit hidden attributes iE Select an attribute to show or hide from the list box The eye mark besides the attribute name appears for shown objects or disappears for hidden objects Locking and Unlocking Attributes Attributes and Objects 19 5 Bill of Materials 19 6 To lock or unlock an attribute simply click in front of the
66. because each program defines geometric objects differently Even though the DXF and IGES for mats standardize this exchange some objects do not transfer exactly For example crosshatching is no longer associative although it does appear in exported files The following table tells you what to expect when you export Graphite objects Graphite Crosshatching Detail views Diameter dimension GD amp T symbol Layers DXF Supported The view is lost but the dimensions and text are retained The leader style may change The feature control frame converts to non GD amp T symbol representation Layers are maintained Lines with arrows Locked geometry Line Weight Multiple sheets NURB splines Radial dimensions Smart Walls Solid Fills Symbols Tolerances Graphite Crosshatching Detail views Diameter dimension Fonts GD amp T symbol Grouped geometry Layers Locked geometry Multiple sheets Radial dimensions Smart Walls Text Importing and Exporting Lines with arrowheads at the start and or end are converted into lines and solids The geometry is retained but it is no longer locked AutoCad 2000 only Each sheet must be exported individually Convert to splines The leader style may change The double lines convert to symbol representation Convert into solids Convert into blocks The tolerance is lost but the dimension remains IGES Converts to symbol representation The view is l
67. can ungroup the imported geometry by Geometry Only Brings in only the geometry leaving any text choosing Arrange gt dimensions and crosshatching behind Ungroup Onto Work Layer The imported geometry is placed on the work layer rather than the layer on which it was origi nally created Unscaled When checked this option will use the drawing scale to resize your part G e a 12 line will become six inches with a 2 1 Drawing Scale Importing DXF Files When you import a DXF file the geometry is constructed according to the units set in Preferences when you choose the Import command Be sure to set the appropri ate units before you import DXF geometry 15 9 Graphite Documents 15 10 Importing ASCII Text from Another Document 1 Choose File gt Import The Import dialog box appears 2 Select the filename you want to import 3 If Text is not selected click the Text button 4 Click OK The text appears in a text box in the drawing Importing Splines When you import a text file that contains the coordinates of a spline Graphite cre ates the spline according to the imported coordinates 1 Select File gt Import Graphite displays the standard Open dialog box Select a text file that contains the coordinates for the spline The Import dialog box displays Specify the import option Spline Click OK Graphite begins creating the Spline Creating a Text File for Importing a Spline 1 2 Use a text
68. cannot execute the macro Macintosh users if you try to use a key combination already in use Graphite prompts you to assign a different key combination In Utilities If you mark this option the macro name will be included as a menu item in the Utilities menu to access the macro directly Creating a Macro 1 Choose Utilities gt Macro The Macro dialog box displays 2 Click New The name Macro1 displays in the Rename field 3 Overwrite the name if desired For Windows you can only use alpha numeric characters 4 Select menu commands in the order you want the new macro to execute The selected commands are automatically filled in the Commands list box If you do not desire a stroke command for your macro go to step 6 5 Define a Stroke command on the drawing area Depress the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh and drag a symbol on the drawing area you want to be associated with the new macro They can be letters or a figure like a circle You can not use Graphite s standard stroke commands like Zoom or Construction strokes since they would be exe cuted immediately A letter and number combination describing the executed Stroke displays in the Stroke list box automatically When you define a stroke you must repeat it several times to define all variations of the stroke so that all possible variations are covered and can be recognized by Graphite 6 Mark the In Utilities Menu option if you want the new m
69. displays indicators for multi step procedures Each smart pointer has a dot the hot spot showing the next point you should spec ify The dot changes position on the pointer during each step of the construction Hot Spot The smart pointer shows you where to click next For example the Opposite Point Circle pointer illustrated above shows that the first click of the mouse places a point on one edge of the circle you re creating After you click a location the hot spot moves to the other side of the pointer showing that the next click places a point on the opposite edge of the circle See the graphic below e lt Your first click aN The hot spot moves to the other side of the smart pointer to indicate the next step After you click the second location the circle appears The hot spot moves back lechi Note to its original position on the pointer so The number of decimal places displayed in the locator field is determined by the Pre cision setting in the Units dia log box choose Layout gt Preferences gt Units that you can create another circle The location indicator tracks Pointer Locator the pointer position of any tool other than the Selec The Pointer Locator is two numbers to the left of the horizontal scroll buttons at the tion tool bottom of the drawing area lt 4 x L53 Yo zo dx L87 dYL87 dz 0 a22 Layeri W 2 4 1 87 0 This loca
70. distinguished from the Snap command chosen through the Layout gt Preferences menu that allows you to set basic speci fications of the Drafting Assistant The Drafting Assistant 4 8 Choosing this item displays the following dialog box All snap modes are activated by default When you want to deactivate a snap mode you click the related check box I l fe n IH E calle lf E I F yc Drafting Assistant Construction Lines In addition to snapping onto geometry the Drafting Assistant also displays dynamic construction lines The three types of construction lines you use most frequently vertical horizontal and 45 angle lines display automatically during construction These construction lines appear temporarily to help you align geometry Once you ve set a point the Drafting Assistant construction line disappears your draw ing is not cluttered with extraneous lines Dynamic construction lines extend automatically from the last point you created You may want to activate other points so the Drafting Assistant displays construc tion lines relative to them Simply move the pointer over the geometry to activate or wake up its control points then move away horizontally or vertically Of course you also have the option of creating permanent construction lines and other shapes as described later in this chapter Using the Drafting Assistant s Construction Lines After you have indicated the first endpoint of a
71. drawing from a particular camera angle and displays it at a scale you specify A detail view can be Referral created in Graphite in two different ways with the Detail View tool or the Sheet See the next section for infor mation on associativity 13 13 Viewing Geometry 13 14 Into View command in the Views menu The Sheet Into View command is an auto mated way of creating arrangements of detail views in specific layouts The detail views in each case behave in the same way Detail Views are always placed in a view window and are associative so that when you modify geometry in any view all views of that geometry reflect the change There are three deliberate exceptions to this associativity in line with standard drafting practice dimensions crosshatching and text appear only in the view in which they were created Graphite allows you to create detail views of your drawing in which some part of the geometry is scaled and placed in a view window In the illustration here the detail view shows a 2 1 enlargement of the side notch R258 3 134 You will probably use more than one view window with different view orientations to show the various faces of your geometry Detail view windows are useful for observing the geometry as you work They are also essential for creating finished drawings The following graphic displays another model in four different detail views
72. editing a pen weight with the Undo command To return a pen back to Graphite s default you must enter the original value in the Edit Pen Weight dialog box following the steps described above The default weights are as follows Pen 1 002 Pen 2 005 Pen 3 010 Pen 4 016 Pen 5 020 Pen 6 032 Pen 7 040 Pen 8 050 Edited pen weights affect only the pen weights in the current file To save the edited pen weights so that they are available in all future files choose Lay out gt Preferences gt Save Preferences Pattern Graphite provides you with eleven standard line patterns and the ability to create nineteen additional line patterns Using the Pattern command you can set the pattern of the current pen and any selected lines without changing any other pen characteristics You can also define new patterns and edit all line patterns cur rently available Specifying a New Pattern for the Current Pen You can choose a standard line pattern or a user defined pattern When you select a pattern regardless of whether an object is selected the pattern becomes the cur rent pen If you had previously chosen a particular pen style you will notice that style is no longer checked in the pen style submenu Pen Characteristics Tech Note Remember that pen weights thinner than 015 appear on the screen as one pixel thick However you should be able to see the difference in pen weights on your prints
73. geometry visually to fit the paper you specify in Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh 15 35 Graphite Documents Print Command CTRL P Windows P Macintosh This command in the File menu prints or plots the current document as specified in Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh Print i 1x Printer Properties Status Default printer User intervention 0 documents waiting Type HP LaserJet SMP Where Chris tech Name HP LaserJet SMP Comment J Print to file r Print range Copies C al Number of copies ft Pages from ft tof Selection GH oes The area printed or plotted is the portion that fits on the page size specified in Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh when the origin 0 0 is placed in the center of the page Choose Layout gt Drawing Size to scale your drawing to the appropriate size and reposition the print plot region You can specify tiling printing on several pages to be pasted together through the Drawing Size command If you have more than one sheet or have specified tiling you may specify which page s to print plot Pages are numbered sequentially for tiling then for additional sheets Plotting to a File You can plot to a file rather than to a plotter or printer In that way you don t have to have a plotter attached to your computer You can have someone else plot the drawing without having a copy of Graphite on th
74. greater than or equal to 2 3 ifelse A gt B A B Evaluate three times the maximum of the variables A and B returning 3 A if A is larger than B and 3 B if B is larger than A The range function is a more general form of conditional expression RNG T V1 NI V2 N2 V3 N3 Vi Ni Vi 1 In this function the first argument T is tested against every N value in the other arguments and returns the value V that lies between the two N values that bracket T Each of the test N values must be greater than the preceding N For example the expression RNG A 1 10 0 20 1 returns 1 if A is less than 10 0 if 10 lt A lt 201 1 if A gt 20 Units of Measure You can use different units of measure such as inches feet inches and feet x y millimeters mm centimeters cm and meters m You can also mix the units in the mathematical expression as long as you label the units properly for example 10 25 4 cm Nanoseconds Graphite is well suited for computer hardware design such as diagrams of timing devices For example you can draw in nanoseconds a billionth of a second Designs which include nanoseconds typically consist of wave forms made of hori zontal and vertical lines which mimic the functions of a timing device The concept for using nanoseconds is to relate time with distance 1 Specify millimeters as the unit of measure by choosing Layout gt Prefer ences gt Units 2 Choose Layou
75. grid display can be turned on or off and the spacing can be specified through the Layout menu To specify several entities as one unit that will be treated as a single object A line pattern or pen style used to draw lines that would not be visible in a solid part Drafters tradi tionally use hidden lines for geometry that is behind other geometry The distance in pixels that is detectable by the Drafting Assistant between the object and the pointer An acronym for Initial Graphics Exchange Specifi cation The U S Department of Commerce National Bureau of Standards issues IGES which is intended to be the industry standard among CAD Import Inscribed Intersection Isometric Knot Points Layer Line Tool Linear Duplicate Lock Mask Math Operator Message Line META CAM systems for data exchange in a neutral file format Ashlar Graphite supports IGES Version 4 0 To load a non Graphite file Within a circle For polygons all vertices touch the imaginary circle The position where two lines or curves meet The curves may actually touch or only intersect when they are extended The Drafting Assistant indicates only actual intersections A top front and right view in which the X axis is at 30 from the screen horizontal the Y axis is 30 from the screen horizontal and the Z axis is verti cal The points defining a spline indicated as vertex points by the Drafting Assistant An
76. have to make this specifi cation before you begin dimensioning or annotating Scaling Text and Dimensions Manually 1 Choose Text gt Size gt Other The dialog box displays the measurement of the text FontSize Font Size Cancel OK The Font Size is set to 156 inch 2 Click after the entry in the data field The text cursor blinks in the data field 3 Enter 100 and click OK FontSize ss Font Size 156 100 Cancel OK Subsequent text and dimensions will be one hundred times the original size or 15 6 inches When you add dimensions the text size will be appropriate for the part Drawing Scale and Paper Size When you are ready to detail your design with line patterns and dimensions or when you want to print or plot your design you may need to scale the view of the drawing to fit the paper you will use Tech Note If you are scaling smaller mul tiply the text size by the scale factor If you are scaling larger divide the text size by the scale factor Tech Note The relationship between the object and the text should appear normal when you zoom If it looks right it is right 15 25 Graphite Documents For that you have to specify a printer or plotter the paper format and orientation and then the drawing size for the specified format Print Setup Windows Page Setup Macintosh This command in the File menu Print Setup 71x allows you to set the page siz
77. i i i i i i i i i i i Point placed here Point placed here Point placed here Using the Vector Spline Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Vector Spline Pick control point Dou ble click last point 2 Click the points for the vectors of the spline 3 Double click the last point Graphite uses these vectors to calculate the control points two fewer than the num ber of vertices you specify The spline is tangent to the first and last vectors and passes through the calculated control points The Status Line shows the X Y and Z coordinates of each point as you go along Y Iz Add Spline Control Point Tool N 7 25 Drawing Tools Tech Note The Lock command in the Arrange menu is used to pre vent changes to objects and doesn t affect spline control points 7 26 This tool in the seventh subpalette of the main tool palette allows you to add another control point to an existing spline Using the Add Spline Control Point Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Add Spline Control Point Pick location on spline 2 Click on the spline at the desired location s for the new control point s Note To see the new control point s as well as the existing control points you must first select the spline and then choose Layout gt Show Points or use the Edit Objects dialog box to specify display points If you intend to move a point be sure to lock th
78. in the Edit menu allow you to change objects without changing the physical geometry You can copy or move objects within the same document on the same sheet or to other sheets You can also copy or move objects to other doc uments even to other applications The Cut Copy and Paste commands do not alter the object s attributes the layer and pen style color weight and pattern If you want to change the attributes of an object choose Edit gt Edit Objects Cut CTRL X Windows X Macintosh This command in the Edit menu removes the selected objects and places them on the Clipboard Each selection you cut or copy to the Clipboard replaces the previ ous Clipboard contents Cutting Objects 1 Select the object to be cut 2 Choose Edit gt Cut Once you cut a selection you can paste it You can use Cut and Paste to move geometry or text around the document from one sheet to another or from one doc ument to another You can even paste the cut selection onto a document in a differ ent application Moving Geometry with the Cut Command 1 Select the objects you want to move 2 Choose Edit gt Cut 3 Display the location where you want the selection to appear in the drawing area scrolling if necessary 4 Choose Edit gt Paste The object appears in the center of the drawing area on the original layer on which it was created or onto the work layer if it s from a different application The object is selected so you c
79. is not selected Graphite will open a blank drawing window per form the conversion close the blank window and repeat the process for each file in the folder For large drawings or large quantities of drawings turning off Draw each file speeds up the operation Click OK The Open file dialog box displays Open the folder FilesIn that contains the files to convert Select a single file and click Open The selected file must be of the same type as was selected for Input File format or Graphite will generate an error message 10 Select a destination folder FilesOut for the translated files or create a new one Specify a new extension to identify the converted files Cit is reasonable to use the standard file type extension like dxf for DXF files or igs for IGES files This is not necessary for the Macintosh but may help in file organization Graphite will convert every file from the Input folder that is of the same type If you select a Graphite file in the Input folder and requested convert to DXF Graphite will convert every Graphite file in that folder to DXF and place those DXF files in the Output folder you selected If the folder also contains IGES files they will not be translated If you specify DXF as the Output file format Graphite asks once if you want thick lines to be converted to Polylines Whatever you specify will be valid for all DXF Files in that folder Drawing at Full Scale Whether you are designing
80. label elf you want a label connected with an Arrow Line or Witness Line click on the geometry you wish to label and then click on the drawing area to indicate the position for the upper left corner of the label Editing a GD amp T Label Once you have created a GD amp T label you may wish to make changes iL 2 Select the GD amp T label you wish to edit Choose Dimension gt GD amp T The GD amp T dialog box appears displaying the current GD amp T information Make the changes you want in the GD amp T dialog box Click Edit The GD amp T label changes Using an Editing Shortcut with GD amp T When you are editing a GD amp T label or creating a second label you may want to remove every entry in Line 1 or Line 2 i 2 Press the first field to display the Geometric Characteristic menu Drag to the X symbol All entries in the line disappear 20 13 GD amp T 20 14 Appendix A Operators and Units This appendix describes mathematical and conditional operators Mathematical Operators Entry boxes that accept numbers also accept mathematical trigonometric and expo nential operators in the form Operator Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Square Root Parenthetical Scientific Notation Exponentiation funcName arg1 arg2 argN Example Operator Example 3 450 Arctangent atan 1 1 3 500 Log Base 10 log 7 25 3 725 Natural Log In 8 5 Base e 3 5 25 Remove tru
81. label you must select the dimensions and change the font size or choose the plotter font 20 11 GD amp T The GD amp T dialog box resembles a GD amp T label For 3D geometry GD amp T labels are created parallel to the work plane Geometric Characteristics Dimension Label Material Condition Datum Text Diameter Symbol Tolerance Value Material Condition Datum Text Material Condition Material Condition Datum Text Datum Tolerance Projection Zone The square boxes are pop up menus from which you can select symbols You can use a single entry a line or a combination of lines as needed to specify the GD amp T dimensions for your part Creating a GD amp T Label 1 Choose Dimension gt GD amp T The GD amp T dialog box appears Pop up Menu Boxes Entry Boxes 20 12 The GD amp T Label Click a button Stand Alone Arrow Line or Witness Line to indicate the way you want the GD amp T symbol connected to the geometry you re labeling Enter the appropriate data to create the GD amp T label You can make two types of entries in this dialog box a Select symbols from pop up menus that appear when you press the square buttons b Enter text in the rectangular fields by clicking to place a text cursor and then typing the entry Indicate the location of the label The Message Line displays the instructions you need elf you want a Stand Alone label click the location for the upper left corner of the GD amp T
82. layers on the right Visible layers for the selected highlighted Layer Group are Layers indicated in the Layer list by the Eye Symbol just as they are in the Layers dialog box Visibility can be toggled by clicking the Eye Symbol or at the location where the Eye Symbol should be for hidden layers The work layer of the selected group is set by double clicking on the desired layer from the Layer list Layers that are cre ated after a Layer Group has been defined are included in the group but are not vis ible The current set of visible layers and the work layer need not correspond to any layer group thus it is not necessary that a Layer Group be designated as the work group Setting a work group simply changes the model s current layer settings to those of the specified Layer Group Also if a Layer Group is designated the work group and layer attributes are subsequently modified either by the Layer dialog box or by changing the work layer in the Layer Indicator pull down list the Layer Group loses its work status A Layer Groups Sj There must be at least one Layer Group created before you can use any of the buttons other than __Detet New or change any settings for Set Group any layers aaa Rename New This button creates a new Layer Group called Group1 Group2 Group3 etc by default Use the Rename button to rename the Layer Group with an appropriate name You can have up to 255 Layer Groups in
83. near the circle or arc you want to dimension If you click outside the cir cle the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside depending on the circle size and the font size The dimension appears outside the object When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location You can change the position of the arrow by dragging a selection fence around the control point at the tip of the arrow and then dragging the arrow to a new location For 3D geometry diametral dimensions are created in the plane of the circle Diametral Arrow In Dimension Tool E This tool measures the diameter of a cir cle 838 838 Using the Diameter Arrow In Dimension Tool 1 Select the Diametral Arrow In Dimension tool The Message Line reads Diametral Arrow In Select arc circle 2 Click near the circle or arc you want to dimension If you click outside the cir cle the dimension appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside depending on the circle size and the font size The dimension appears inside the object depending on the circle and font size When the dimension leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new location 12 17 Dimensions 12 18 For 3D geometry diametral dimensions are created in the plane of the circle
84. number either stamped etched embossed or silk screened onto the part The manufacturer also needs to document the design and track the characteristics of each part like material cost of manufacturing and out side vendor code during the product development process The following topics are covered e Introduction e Attributes e Item Numbers e Bill of Materials Table 19 1 Bill of Materials Introduction Graphite s Bill of Materials Extraction utility gives you the ability to attach characteristics attributes to the parts being designed From these attributes you can extract a Bill of Materials table This Bill of Materials table can be printed separately or with the drawing In addition you can export the Bill of Materials to other applications The Bill of Materials Extraction utility is completely integrated in Graphite and combines powerful functionality with an easy to use interface CE See a oe ia Cae a ces IE ier Pen Nara E e e ence Generating a Bill of Materials is a two step process e defining and assigning attributes to object geometry in drawings and e extracting user defined and predefined attributes in the form of lists or ASCI files for export purposes Tip When using the Bill of Materials Extraction utility for the first time you should start by interviewing all the groups within your organization or company to determine which charact
85. of Red Green and Blue by entering your own values The of black can be adjusted by moving the cursor over the arrow in the scroll bar to the right of the color palette and drag up or down to the desired location All the values in the Luminance Red Green and Blue data fields change as well Hue and Saturation do not change Once you have chosen the color click OK the Color display closes and you are returned to the Edit Colors dialog box The colors that you rename remain at the end of the color list in the Edit Colors window in the order that you placed them They are not alphabetized Pen Characteristics 9 To make the added colors appear in the palette when you choose Pen gt Color gt Palette click Use An icon of an eye appears The color is now visible in the palette You can also place the cursor to the left of the color name and click to display the eye icon 10 Close the dialog box 11 Repeat this process to define up to 170 colors 12 You can save these colors as default color settings for all new files by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences Macintosh 1 To define a new color choose Pen gt Color gt Define 2 The Edit Colors dialog box appears 3 Inthe dialog box window scroll down and select one of the undefined color numbers like lt User65 gt the first definable color available 4 Enter the color name limited to 15 characters in the Color Name data field and click
86. of the arc and the angle of the tangent line Y A AX AY Circle Tools aalala The Circle tools on the tool palette construct circles by any of four methods e Center Point Tech Note e Opposite Point A Circle Center Line tool is available for creating axis e 3 Point dimensions For more infor mation see Chapter 2 e Tangent Center Point uses the center and diameter of the circle Opposite Point uses the diameter 3 Point uses three points and can be tangent to existing objects Tangent Point draws a circle tangent to two objects using the diameter specified by the user The circle is drawn with the current pen specifications for Color Weight and Pattern Center Point Circle Tool This tool in the fourth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a circle specified by the center point and diameter Using the Center Point Circle Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Center Point Circle Pick center Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Click two locations the first click places the center and the second determines the radius or Drag pressing at the center and releasing at a position indicating the radius If you drag the points a rubberband image guides your con Drawing Tools 7 16 struction You can create a copy of the last circle by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and clicking once where
87. offset inside by a half inch according to the ANSI standard e When you use these plotter formats for your laser printer device you have to adjust them to the printing area of your printer that could differ from printer to printer e Design layouts contain in addition to the drawing format one or more detail views that may display with the Sheet Into View command the content of a draw ing at different view angles and scale factor Placing Drawing Formats 15 30 Drawing Formats In Graphite you can place Standard Drawing Formats using two different com mands e the Import command in the File menu or e the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Using the Import Command If your part is placed in a detail view and it is visually scaled into a view you can import a standard drawing format either one of those supplied by Ashlar or one you created in preparation for printing or plotting Since you want the format to be full scale it must be imported onto the sheet outside the view because the detail view is scaled and the sheet is not 1 Choose Layout gt Drawing Size to scale the drawing The Drawing Size dialog box displays 2 Mark the Always Display Page bounds option that allows you to compare the true size of the drawing with the displayed printing area of the drawing format 3 Choose the File gt Import The Import dialog box displays 4 Mark the wnscaled option 5 Select in the Layout folder of the Graph
88. or drafting a highly detailed blueprint you should cre ate the geometry at its actual size Graphite allows you to construct the part using full scale specifications and then set the visual scale of the drawing In this way the part dimensions to its true to life measurements Drawing at full scale has the fol lowing advantages e Scaling mistakes are eliminated e Dimensions are automatic you must dimension manually if you do not draw at full scale e Associative dimensions update when the object is edited manual dimensions do not e The size relationship of imported parts is compatible e Calculations for 2D analysis are accurate See Chapter 18 for more information Once your project is drawn you can dimension it scale it visually and size it to fit into a standard drawing format if you wish The actual size of the geometry remains constant unless you edit it Drawing at Full Scale 15 23 Graphite Documents Tech Note Zoom All magnifies or reduces all objects on your drawing to fill the screen regardless of how big or small the objects are 15 24 When you open a new Graphite document the drawing area is a sheet that is infi nitely large so that you can design anything at full size For a simplistic example here s how to draw and view a line 83 feet long 1 Draw a line specifying 83 for the length The line extends off the screen 2 Choose Arrange gt Zoom All The entire 83 foot line is visible on
89. or gray lines that you use for exact alignment The Drafting Assistant cre ates dynamic temporary construction lines or you can create permanent construction lines which can be used in the geometry or used for alignment and then deleted The endpoint or midpoint of an object or knot point defining a spline The Drafting Assistant indi cates these positions when the pointer is moved near them Positions on axes that specify the locations of a point Two dimensional graphics have x y coordi nates three dimensional graphics have x y z coor dinates Glossary G 4 Copy Corner Tool Crosshatching Cursor Curve Cut Custom Colors Dash Default Delete Delta Detail View Tool Dialog Box The command that places a duplicate of the selected geometry on the Clipboard See the descriptions for the Polar Duplicate and Linear Duplicate commands and Transformation tools for additional copying methods An editing tool that trims lines extending past their intersection or extends lines to form a corner The filling of closed geometry with a line pattern The I beam position indicator in the text tool and boxes which use text Elsewhere the position indi cator is called a pointer A circle arc ellipse or spline The command to delete selected entities The selection is placed on the Clipboard and can be pasted into the same or different documents or into documents created by other applications
90. overlap the view windows on the sheet as shown in the upper graphic You could create a new sheet with the Sheets dialog Views 14 31 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 32 box in the View menu and Cut and Paste the view window from Sheet 1 onto Sheet 2 to get a clear view on the view windows Model space 2 automatically aoe rs created with Sheet 2 Ss N a Model 1 active detail Sr ai x view camera 1 Trimetric__ w lodel 1 Ta T Right and Trimetric view window on Sheet 2 Model space 2 is empty Sheet 1 is not visible Something similar but more elegant is done by the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu Sheet Into View puts Model 1 into one or more views and puts Model 2 on the current sheet Method 2 With this method you choose a view layout with the Sheet Into View command The views provide a vantage point of the model It places all geometry into one of the view layouts You can even customize the view layouts Views Sheet into View puts Model 1 into one or more views as specified by your choice from the dialog box and creates Model 2 and projects it onto the current sheet empty Model space 2 Model 1 Trimetric we PA Ce Model 2 J Layout with views Front and Trimetric loaded with Sheet Into View 14 33 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 34 e If you choose one of the layouts that c
91. pattern Click Rename Click Current if you want to set the pen to the new pattern Pen Characteristics 9 Click the Close button in the title bar to close the dialog box Edit Pattern Command This command found by choosing Pen gt Pattern gt Edit Pattern allows you to edit all line patterns but Solid and Dotted If you edit a pattern already used in geometry within your drawing the geometry automatically updates to the revised pattern For example if you edit the Phantom line pattern every line in the existing document drawn in the Phantom line pattern changes to reflect the revision Edited line patterns also scale by the inverse of the viewing and drawing scales but editing the pattern lets you control how the patterns appear on the screen and on paper Editing a Pen Pattern 1 Choose Pen gt Pattern gt Edit Pattern The Edit Pattern dialog box appears 2 Select the line pattern you want to change Edi i it Pattern Center from the Edit Pattern list 3 Modify the line pattern by changing the Dagh Langh lengths of existing dashes or by adding or removing dashes to or from the element emove 4 When the pattern element is properly defined click OK and the dialog box _Revert closes All existing lines drawn in the line Visible Length 2 pattern you edited change to reflect the new pattern element as will all future lines drawn in the line pattern Click Cancel to ignores all the changes made
92. planes For example if you want to work on an angled face you can reorient the work plane If you want to work de on this face you have to click on points 1 2 3 lt 3 point plane SO Origin V Work Plane You can define a new plane with two commands on the 3D menu 3 Point Plane and Define Plane Defining a new work plane is accomplished by simply specifying the origin and indicating the horizontal and vertical directions You can use 3 Point Plane to set the work plane and then use Define Plane to name and save the plane 3 Point Plane Command This command in the 3D menu sets a temporary work plane from the three points you specify Follow the directions in the Message Line 1 Choose 3D gt 3 Point Plane 2 Click in the drawing area to indicate the point you want for the origin of the new work plane Click a point to define the positive x axis Click a point to define the positive y axis A temporary work plane is created and named TempPlane The work plane moves but the view does not change You can rename this plane by going to the 3D menu and choosing Define Plane There is an option to Rename in the dialog box See a later section for more infor mation If you do not rename the new plane it will be replaced by the next 3 Point Plane you specify and will be removed from the list when you exit from Graphite Define Plane Command This command in the 3D menu allows you to define a new work p
93. project is drawn you can dimension it scale it visually and size it to fit into a standard drawing format if you wish The actual size of the geometry remains constant unless you edit it When you open a new Graphite document the drawing area is a sheet that is infi nitely large so that you can design anything at full size For a simplistic example here s how to draw and view a line 83 feet long 1 Draw a line specifying 83 for the length The line extends off the screen 2 Choose Arrange gt Zoom All The entire 83 foot line is visible on the screen Using the draw to scale Zoom All method you can create accurate full scale draw ings which are displayed at the magnification you choose The actual size of an object is not affected by zoom magnification or reduction Zoom All magnifies or reduces all objects on your drawing to fill the screen regardless of the size of the objects The Drafting Process The Drafting Process The drafting process may or may not include using a standard drawing format Vellum Since you create the geometry at full scale the basic difference in the two drafting processes is how the visual scale of the geometry is set so that it fits on the paper or in a drawing format Most steps are discussed in the following two drafting proce dures They are also discussed in greater detail in later chapters Drafting without
94. regular basis See the next chapter for more detailed information The following topics cover the parametrics feature e Introduction to Parametrics e Using Parametrics e Parametric Drafting e Parametric Problems e Complex Parametric Drafting e Parametrics and Grouped Objects 16 1 Parametrics Tip The Graphite folder contains a folder of symbols that use parametrics You might retrieve a few of the symbols by going to the File menu to the Symbols submenu and choosing the Insert com mand to become familiar with how parametrics works See the next chapter for more information on sym bols 16 2 Introduction to Parametrics In its simplest form parametrics allows you to create a shape and then specify the exact measurements Take for example the basic activity of constructing triangles Creating parametric geometry 1 Create the geometry 2 Dimension the geometry using variables constant values and expressions You may use as many as 253 parametric dimensions 3 Resolve the parametric geometry A DAN at ii N oS o Of course parametrics can a 20 Resolves to 15 be much more complex when you use variables as you will see later in this chapter While creating geome try is straightforward when a part becomes complex parametric dimensioning requires some skill and comprehension of how Graphite treats geometry Using this method you can quickly draw a triangle to exact specifications
95. relationships between them 16 21 Parametrics 16 22 The coin chute example below describes the parametric drafting of three views You can dimension these views according to standard drafting practice as shown ae OL D OL BC 2 a BC T OL SW 2 j i 10 A W 2 DIA 7 ANG J lt Section 1 Construct and resolve one section at a time Solve any problems with this bracket before moving on Complex Parametric Drafting 2 Add a centerline between the holes to maintain alignment 3 Adda line connecting the lower edges o o of the flanges to keep the lines colin car The section below would resolve without problems so you could go on to the next section ja OL OL BC 2 ails BC OL Sw 2 i Tx Once this view resolves properly you can add the side view Since the side view determines height you can delete the height CH dimension and the lower thickness T dimension after you added the side view Section 2 1 Add constraint lines to connect the geometry between sections 2 Adda dimension to specify the distance between the sections See the two boxes problem earlier in this section 2 i 2 50 ele T O O 3 7 1 16 23 Parametrics 16 24 3 Add extra thickness T dimensions since all geometry must be defined e OL D OL BC 2 BC 2 50 T OL SW 2 a i Eso H DIA Section 3 1 Di
96. section at the end of this chapter Although style characteristics can be changed style names cannot Keep this in mind if you change the pen pattern Otherwise the style name may not reflect the pattern and cause confusion if the changes are saved as a preference Setting Units Graphite is set to measure geometry in inches When you open a new drawing you should set the precision units and fractional or decimal specifications to suit your needs Units Command Setting Units This command is found by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Units A dialog box dis plays Precision Inches feet mm cm meters Leading 0 s units Precision 0 001 e inches Omm O feet Ocm Ofeet inches meters Leading 0 S J Trailing 0 s Cancel OK Sets the number of decimal places in all data fields within Graphite Gin Edit Objects the Status Line and all dialog boxes The default is 0 001 When you choose a fractional precision measure ments appear as fractions rather than decimals You can set the format for fractions by choosing Dimension gt Linear When Graphite rounds off values it stores the number accurate to 16 decimal places therefore you can change the precision displayed at any time and maintain the desired accuracy Altering the decimal or fractional precision does not affect any dimensions The precision of dimen sions is selected by going to the Dimension menu and choo
97. text in the text area Text Spacing The Text menu has commands for single spacing double spacing or using a space and a half between the lines of your text The check W in the Text menu indi cates the current line spacing You can change the default setting by saving changes in the Preferences file Single Space This command in the Text menu sets the spacing of selected and future lines of text Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the right margins with both margins or centered between the margins Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the right margins with both margins or centered between the margins Text spacing is controlled from the Text menu Text can be single spaced as in the first paragraph or double spaced like in this paragraph Text can also be spaced at one and a half spaces as in this paragraph so each line occupies one space in the text area 1 1 2 Space This command in the Text menu changes the spacing of selected and future text so each line occupies one and a half spaces in the text area Double Space This command in the Text menu sets the spacing of selected and future text so each line occupies two spaces in the text area Indenting Text If you wish to indent the text on the right or left side of the text box or if you wish to have the first line indented choos
98. that you show all your layers before you export from Graphite or any other CAD package so that you know what objects are exporting I Graphite was designed to export only the current model If you have Detail Views in your file flatten them with the Flatten View command found in the Views menu If you have dimensions already in the detail view and the view scale is set to 1 you can group the dimensions and geometry together before you flatten the view This will bring the dimensions across to the current model for Export Graphite supports 256 layers If you have a DXF file that contains more than 256 layers the geometry that is on the additional layers will automatically be placed on the current work layer in Graphite If you don t want this to happen reduce the number of layers to a maximum of 256 in the application you will be creating the DXF file in Attributes in an AutoCAD file do not come into Graphite as text because Graph ite does not support that entity type If you want your attributes to come into Graphite via DXF you need to convert those attributes to Text before you Export from AutoCAD If when translating to AutoCAD the line patterns do not seem to come across or are distorted too big or too small change the AutoCAD variable LTSCALE to a smaller number to display the line patterns at an appropriate scale With some angular dimensions the arrow may be displayed in AutoCAD in the wrong direction pointing towards
99. the NUM LOCK key and then hold down the ALT key and enter the numeric code for the character you want The character appears in the current font Gncluding Graphite s Plotter fonts The following list includes common symbols which are available in all fonts Accent Key Combination e ALT 0176 Tech Note ALT 0216 Numeric values must be entered with an enhanced ALT 0177 10I keyboard using the sepa rate number pad Macintosh To see the characters associated with a particular font choose Key Caps from the Apple menu and select the font from the Font menu When you press the OPTION SHIFT or CONTROL key or a combination of these keys the keyboard graphic changes to show which characters are available Appendix B Special Characters B 2 In addition to those characters you see in KEY CAPS you can use the OPTION key to generate international accents in the current font including Graphite s Plotter fonts Accent e Key Combination OPTION e then letter to be accented OPTION then letter to be accented OPTION n then letter to be accented OPTION u then letter to be accented The following list includes common symbols which are available in all fonts Accent o I Key Combination OPTION SHIFT 8 OPTION O letter or number OPTION SHIFT Appendix C DWG Notes The DWG DXF Translator utilizes the same CFG files as the previous DXF transla tor For more information about the CFG files
100. the folder in which to save it If you have named and saved the document before a brief message appears when you choose Save and the program pauses while it updates the information You should save frequently Even though your drawing appears on the screen it is not stored on the disk until you save it Hours of work can be lost because of a power failure It is also important to save before performing any intricate multistep maneuver In that way if the result is not exactly what you had hoped you can abandon the file by closing it without saving Save As Command This command in the File menu saves the current document A dialog box appears so you can name the current document give it a different name or save it to a dif ferent directory Saving in the Current Directory 1 Choose File gt Save As The sav Drawing ssudilog box appears e mdm 2 If necessary display a different rai folder amp Desktoy 3 Type the name you want to PN use in the File name data field E 4 Either press ENTER Win My Computer dows RETURN Macintosh or eG Cem click OK Moneok P A TTE Se Ze For Windows the filename extension vc6 automatically appends to the filename You can use the Save As command to make a backup of a document Memory Exhaustion Warning Mac only If the size or complexity or your geometry uses all memory allo Out of memory cated to Graphite the program O will crash The following dialog
101. the length of the diameter xia dps Bfe When you click the last point of the circle the diameter D data field highlights in the Status Line to indicate that it is active It shows the diameter of the circle you just created If you type a new number and press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key the diameter of the circle updates reflecting the change You can change any or all entries in the Status Line but when you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh you can t make any more changes in the Status Line Parts of the Graphite Window The number of decimal places displayed in the status data fields is determined by the Precision setting in the Units dialog box choose Layout gt Preferences gt Units Moving Between Status Data Fields Use the TAB key to move to the right highlighting the next field When you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh the construction redraws according to the new specifications in the Status Line You can also use your mouse to activate a Status Line data field You can use the Status Line arrows to scroll if any of the status data fields are off screen Drawing Area You use the drawing area for all construction editing and annotation of geometry Think of the drawing area as a sheet of paper of unlimited size that you use to con struct full size unscaled drawings You use the scroll bars to move the sheet so the portion you want to work on is visible in the window
102. the text rather than towards the extension lines If this happens execute the DIM command in AutoCAD select the affected dimensions and use the UPDATE command to display the arrow cor rectly Convert Command This command in the File menu starts the Convert batch translator which allows you to import and export multiple files in an unattended mode It imports all files of the same type from one folder and saves these files in the selected format into a destination folder Converting Multiple Files i Create two folders 15 21 Graphite Documents 15 22 One folder will be used to store the original files the FilesIn folder the other folder will store the converted files the FilesOut folder Copy all files you want to convert into the FilesIn folder Select the File gt Convert The Multiple File Translation dialog box appears Multiple File Translation Input File Format Output File Format Graphite Graphite C Vellum C Vellum Draft 3D 99 C Text C Vellum 2 7 C Spline C MetaFiles C MetaFiles C Bitmaps C Bitmaps C DWG R14 C DWG C DXF R14 C DXF C DWG 2000 C EPS C DXF 2000 C IGES C EPS C IGES T Draw each file Cancel Select the file type you are translating from the Input File Format column Select the file type you are translating from the Output File Format column Mark the Draw each file option if desired If you mark this option you will see each file during the conversion process If this option
103. the views on the current i ee a cal sheet In the following graphic ee you see a Top view of the model HE picked up by the sheet camera r a l and projected onto the current da e aD planar sheet In the Top view the sheet camera is aligned parallel to the sheet When you open a document you are looking down on top of the x y plane and you cannot see anything in the z direction which is coming toward you away from the screen 3D Top view The Model SS Graphite 3D Models You must rotate the image to see what you are drawing in the z direction N The on screen Trackball lets you rotate the sheet camera around the 3D model this changes your orientation it does not rotate the model The three dimensional object geometry the model stays fixed even if you get the opposite impression on 2 3 Graphite Overview the screen In the following graphic the sheet camera is rotated to the Trimetric view Y4 3D Model infinite 2D planar EE Trimetric w The Sheet camera is rotated to the Trimetric view When you rotate the image with the on screen Track ball it is as though the movement of the pointer on the Trackball corresponds to a fulcrum the location where you press the mouse button becomes the ful crum and the movement of the mouse rotates the model around that fulcrum point What you see on the screen responds to the view of the she
104. then saving the file See Chapter 5 Basic Environment Settings for more informa tion Once your new preferences are saved the previous default settings are no longer available The following are the default settings that came with the program accord ing to the pull down menus Edit menu Selection Mask All Selected Selectable Points On Layout menu Preferences Submenu Units Precision 0 001 Appendix D Program Settings amp Files D 2 Inches All others off Selection Invert DA Autosave Layers Arrange menu Divide of pieces Show Points Pen menu Style Color Weight Pattern Arrowheads Arrow at Start Arrow at End Text menu Font Size Style Align Left Single Space Dimension menu Linear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol Text Font Color Red White On Off 15 min Construction Dimension Layerl Constraint Outline Black 0 010 Solid Standard Off Off Plotter Windows Geneva Macintosh 12 pt Normal On On XXX XXX XXX xXx xx Windows Whole Degrees Macintosh XXX xx xx Windows xx x Macintosh Horizontal Plotter Size Style Color Weight Layer Arrowhead Arrow Size Dot Size Length Height Side Angle Witness Lines Views menu Sheets Models Views View the Plane Draw View Boundaries Show Trackball Windows 3D menu Planes Show Triad Utilities menu Macros Navigator Program Files and Folders The foll
105. to close this dialog box double click the Control pull down menu in the upper left corner of the dialog box lt The character format you specify stays in effect until you choose another character format Rotating Text Text including Postscript and TrueType fonts can be rotated with the Rotate tool like any other object in your drawing Text that is neither horizontal nor vertical may appear jagged on the screen but it should print out at your system s highest quality Font Sizes and ANSI Standards A typical system font specified for 156 inches may produce a character that is only 125 inches The variation depends on the proportional spacing of the font If you want a font set to exact specifications use a Plotter font which conforms to ANSI standards Size Text This command in the Text menu sets the font size for the selected text or for future text entries in the current document This can be specified as either points 12 pt or units 156 inches as defined in the Units dialog box within Layout gt Prefer ences gt Units If no unit is specified Graphite picks the default unit Specifying a Non standard Text Size Choosing Other from the Size submenu brings up a dialog box allowing you to specify the exact text size you desire in whatever units you ve set for your drawing You can specify point size by entering pt after the value in the entry box for example if
106. to black This is a toggle switch for turning the Drafting Assistant on or off A check mark in front marks the on status This dialog box allows the user to set a time inter val for the program to save files If you have set the characteristics you like such as units pen style and dimension format you can make those settings the default settings Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences You cannot save geometry in this way you would have to open the preferences file create the geometry and save the file This allows you to save the status visible hidden and the location of the Dimension Symbol and Function palettes Saving Preferences Information and Characteristics The preferences filename is prefs vco Windows or Graphite prefs Macintosh The file must be stored in the same folder as the Graphite application If you want to use different settings for your work you can change the default set tings and then every new document opens with the settings you have selected The following specifications can be set in the preferences file e Pen styles e Text characteristics 5 29 Basic Environment Settings 5 30 e Preferences settings snap grid units selection color indicator and Visualization settings e Grid display e Layer and sheet specifications e Work layer e Dimension and tolerance formats e Arrowhead type and display e Drawing size and scale e Zoom scale e Fillet radius e Cham
107. to create a new model by default model 2 I GN NBS Click Current to make the new model the current model in the new view The geometry in the view disappears View Displays Tip You may also create the view window rectangle by clicking to place the diagonally oppo site corners Referral You will find more about Models and Views in the Chapter 4 Advanced View ing Techniques 13 15 Viewing Geometry Tech Note When you click the detail view the view becomes active and the view window with a title bar appears 13 16 8 Choose Edit gt Paste The geometry is pasted into the new detail view but it is no longer associative since it is part of a different model Rotating the Viewing Area and Detail Views You can change the exist you can Detail view camera r Va n 3D Model m only change the view orientation within a view window The sheet view is picked up by the sheet camera and is rigidly fixed to the PE sheet itself and aligned parallel to tgidiy fred and parallel the sheet in the Top view LEK 1 Model with 1 additional active Trimetric view window Active View The detail view window displays a title bar only when it is the current or active perce view Click inside the detail view window when the view is inactive as in the left graphic above The detail view window becomes active displayi
108. you have several views displaying the same model they have to be associa tive because no matter which view is active the Sheet View or any Detail View you are always editing the same model Activating Views To make a view active you have to click on it When you click on the sheet the Sheet View becomes active When you click in a view window the Detail View becomes active Identifying Models If you do not know which view displays which model open the Models dialog box When you click on the drawing area the check mark moves to the model displayed on the sheet If you click in a view window the check mark moves to the model displayed in the detail view Views Tip To move a view window to another Sheet you cut the view window with the Cut command in the View Win dows s control menu make the other sheet active and place the view window with the Paste command in the Edit menu on the current Sheet Tip This procedure is very useful if you have to identify models and sheets for renaming 14 15 Advanced Viewing Techniques Tip You can also change the scale of a detail view with the Prop erties command in the View window menu Tip Documents are more man ageable if you delete all exist ing view windows before you use the Sheet Into View com mand 14 16 Scaling Views Zooming affects the Sheet View and the Detail View differently Zooming in a Detail View with the SHIFT Windows or t
109. you want the center for the new circle The Status Line shows the X Y coordinates of the center and the diameter of the cir cle Diameter is the selected status field xy Opposite Point Circle Tool O This tool in the fourth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a circle specified by the diameter Using the Opposite Point Circle Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Opposite Point Circle Pick first point on circle Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Click two locations to indicate the diameter or Drag pressing the mouse button at the beginning and releasing it at a position that indicates the diameter If you click the points after the first point is chosen the Message Line will read Pick opposite point on circle If you drag the points a rubberband image guides your construction Create a copy of the last circle drawn by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking once to place first point of the new circle The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates representing the end points of the diameter Blo vo xf_Jova 3 Point Circle Tool O This tool in the fourth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a circle through the points you select Using the 3 Point Circle Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads 3 Point Circle Pick first point Ctrl Tangent to object Windows or Option
110. you want to change the orientation of your draw ing you can change these specifications For example you could set these angles to 30 90 and 150 for an isometric drawing The defaults are 4 6 Additional Creation Angles Point Snap Mode Command Snapping onto Geometry 0 horizontal and 90 vertical Use a semicolon to separate the values To display a temporary construction line through a point move the pointer to the point to activate it a diamond appears construction lines automat ically display through the active point You can have as many as eight active points When you activate the ninth point the first one in the series deactivates These lines are used by the Drafting Assistant only when you are creating geometry and they are not part of the list of lines generated from the eight active points The defaults are 45 and 45 Use a semicolon to separate the values The divisions of a line for Drafting Assistant nota tions If you want to divide the line into quarters use a 25 specification The default is 50 which shows the midpoint of lines For example entering 25 instructs the Drafting Assistant to tell you when the pointer is 25 of the distance along a line as shown below point This Snap command is automatically available when you first start Graphite This command allows you to activate and deactivate the different snaps modes of the Drafting Assistant This command should be
111. 0 Import 15 9 15 10 Spline tools 7 23 3D 8 3 Add Spline Control Point 7 25 Control point 7 26 Lock Spline Control Point 7 26 NURBS 7 23 Slope 7 28 Through Points 7 24 Unlocking 7 27 Vector 7 25 Vertex 7 25 Square root A 1 Standard views 6 11 Status Line 3 4 3 8 7 4 Altering geometry 7 5 Creating additional geometry 7 6 Creating new geometry 7 6 Index Drawing tools 7 5 Fields 7 4 I beam 7 4 Moving between fields 3 9 Precision 7 4 Units 5 22 Using 7 4 Straightness GD amp T 20 4 Stretch tool 10 11 Stroke construction lines 4 10 Stroke zoom 13 3 Style Change 5 3 Dimension 12 29 Edit command 5 2 Edit pen 5 19 Modifying pen 5 19 Pen 5 1 5 18 Text 11 8 Style Conventions documentation 1 2 Submenu 1 1 3 13 Subtraction A 1 Sweep angle 8 6 Symbol 17 1 17 5 BOM Attributes tool 19 7 Browse directory 17 4 Command 17 2 Display symbols in a directory 17 2 GD amp T 20 10 Insertion point 17 2 insertion point 17 3 Orientation 17 2 orientation 17 3 Origin 17 2 Parameterized 17 2 preview 17 4 Smart wall 7 12 Symbol Panel 17 2 Symbol operation Creating 17 2 Edit 17 5 Import 17 5 1 16 Insert 17 3 Marking object for attributes 19 7 Placing 17 2 Symbol Panel Browse directory 17 4 Load new directory 17 5 New 17 5 Preview pane 17 4 Symbol list 17 4 Symmetry GD amp T 20 6 T Tangent lines 7 8 Tangent Drafting Assistant 4 3 Tangent Point tools Arc 7 14 Circle 7 17 Tech note 1 2 Temp plane 8 7 Tex
112. 2 Click Show A visible mark appears next to the layer s name in the list Making a Layer the Work Layer in the Layers Dialog Box 1 Select the name from the list 2 Click Set Layer The layer must be visible before you can make it the work layer Changing the Work Layer with the Work Layer Indicator Box You can use the Work Layer Indicator pop up box at the lower left of the drawing area to specify a different layer as the work layer 1 Press the mouse button on the box and the menu dis plays x53 Y ae Construction dimension Layer1 2 Drag to the layer you want to make the work layer and release the mouse button The layer you selected is now the work layer Determining How Many Objects are on a Layer 1 Choose Edit gt Selection Mask 2 Select the desired layer from those listed in the center box 3 Choose Edit gt Select All 4 Choose Edit gt Edit Objects The number of objects is listed at the top of the Edit Objects dialog box 5 Close the Selection Mask and Edit Objects dialog boxes Layers Layer Examples Layers are like transparent sheets that you can turn on and off This feature is par ticularly useful for designs with several variations of a component or to reveal as much or as little detail as needed for the design Here are two such uses Floor Plans A common use of layers is for different floor plumbing and wiring plans for a building The following examples show simp
113. 3 Scale 15 24 Standard pen 5 14 Undoing pen edit 5 17 User defined pen 5 14 Visible pen length 5 15 Pen Arrowheads 11 19 Characteristics 5 3 Color 5 3 Menu 3 11 Pattern 5 13 Style 5 18 5 19 Styles 5 1 Weight 5 11 Percentage point DA 4 7 Perimeter 18 3 19 5 Permanent construction lines 4 10 Perpendicular Dimension tools Base Line 12 14 Chain 12 14 Ordinate 12 15 Perpendicular 12 13 Perpendicular lines 7 8 Perpendicular Drafting Assistant 4 3 Perpendicularity GD amp T 20 5 Phantom pen style 5 2 5 19 Pict Export 15 16 Import 15 9 Index Plane Define 8 7 8 11 Delete 8 13 Redefine 8 13 Rename 8 13 Set to screen 8 14 Standard 8 7 Temp 8 7 View 14 23 Work 8 6 Plot Drawing 15 28 Scale 15 27 Plotter fonts 11 10 15 37 Point Control 7 26 9 2 Creating 7 9 Hide 9 10 Selectable point command 9 10 Selecting 9 9 9 10 Show 9 9 Pointer 3 2 3 3 Locator 3 7 Smart 3 6 7 2 Pointer Locator 3 3 3 7 Polar duplicate 10 25 Polygon tools 7 21 Circumscribed 7 22 Inscribed 7 22 Rectangle 7 21 PostScript 15 36 Precision Setting 3 9 5 21 Status Line 7 4 pref vim 5 29 Preferences 2 6 3 15 AutoSave 5 29 Command 5 28 DAssistant 5 29 Default 5 30 Default setting 3 16 Grid 5 29 Invert 5 29 Save 5 29 Saving 3 16 5 28 Selection 5 29 Snap 5 28 Units 5 29 Visualization 5 29 prefs vlm 3 16 Preview layout 15 29 Print 15 28 Command 15 36 Drawing 15 35 Tiled 15 29 Print scale 15 27 Prin
114. 3 Text 3 11 11 5 Trackball view menu 6 8 Utilities 3 11 Views 3 11 Menu Bar 3 3 Menu using Choosing a command 1 1 3 11 Displaying 3 11 Toggling commands 3 15 Message Line 3 3 3 8 7 7 MetaFiles Export 15 16 Import 15 9 Meters 5 21 A 3 Midpoint Drafting Assistant 4 3 Millimeters 5 21 A 3 Mirror tool 10 10 Model 14 4 14 36 3D construction 2 6 Command 14 7 Model space 2 2 14 36 Multiple 14 5 Sheets 14 6 14 8 Sheets Views 14 34 Model operation Creating 14 7 Delete 14 7 Identifying 14 15 Make current 14 8 New 14 5 Renaming 14 7 Index Models 2 2 Modules menu 3 11 Moment of inertia 18 4 Mouse Arrow pointer 3 2 Clicking 3 2 7 2 Double click 3 2 Dragging 3 2 7 2 Pointer 3 2 Selection arrow 3 2 Smart pointer 3 6 Using 3 1 Versus keyboard 3 11 Move Dimension 12 5 Objects 10 12 Objects to layer 10 15 10 31 Text 11 4 Move tool 10 7 Multiplication A 1 N Nanoseconds A 3 Natural log Base e A 1 Navigator Palette View 13 23 Negative value A 1 Nudge Tool 10 8 NURBS 7 23 Oo Object Rotation command 10 9 Objects on layer 13 8 Changing characteristics 10 29 Copy 10 15 10 20 Cut 10 19 Deselecting 9 7 Dimension 12 4 Duplicating 10 22 Edit 10 1 10 29 Expand Shrink 10 10 Group 10 32 Lock 10 33 Mirroring 10 11 Move 10 7 10 12 Relimit 10 5 Rotating 10 9 Segment 10 6 Selecting 9 1 9 4 Size 10 16 Stretch 10 11 Trimming 10 5 Ungroup 10 33 Unlock 10 33 Oblique Dimension t
115. 6 19 9 Command 19 2 Defining 19 2 Deleting 19 5 Editing 19 4 19 8 Hide 19 5 Lock Unlock 19 4 Removing 19 8 Save 19 5 Show 19 5 19 8 Attribute tools Selection 19 6 Symbol Attributes 19 7 Attribute type Predefined 19 2 19 5 User defined 19 2 Vellum attributes 19 5 Attributes Active 19 2 Order 19 14 Auto Front command 13 21 Automatic Dimensioning tool 12 21 AutoSave Command 15 5 Preference 5 29 Backup 15 5 Balloon Dimension tool 12 20 Item number 19 10 Pen style 5 2 5 19 Base Line dimension Horizontal 12 7 Oblique 12 12 Perpendicular 12 14 Vertical 12 9 Bill of Materials 19 1 Attributes 19 1 19 2 Introduction 19 1 Layout options 19 13 Layouts 19 11 Palette 19 6 User format 19 14 Bill of Materials operation Creating 19 14 Defining layout 19 12 Editing 19 15 Exporting 19 15 Bitmap Export 15 16 Import 15 9 Blinking selection 9 2 BMI Export 15 16 15 20 Export effects 15 19 Import 15 9 15 20 BOM tools 19 5 Attribute Selection 19 6 BOM 19 14 Item Number 19 9 Symbol Attributes 19 7 Bring to Front command 13 21 Index Cc Calculation 2D analysis 18 1 18 4 Camera Detail view 14 35 Sheet view 2 2 14 35 View Sheet 14 38 Center pen style 5 2 5 18 Center Drafting Assistant 4 2 Center Point tools Arc 7 13 Circle 7 15 Centimeters 5 21 A 3 Centroid 18 3 Attributes 19 5 Displaying 18 4 Chain dimension Horizontal 12 8 Oblique 12 12 Perpendicular 12 14 Vertical 12 10 Chain object 9 9 Chamfer
116. 6 Y Macintosh This command in the Arrange menu combines selected objects to function as a sin gle object 1 Select the objects to be grouped 2 Select Arrange gt Group Once you group geometry you can t edit the individual objects within the group unless you ungroup them If you move the group all components move together If you change the size of a group the individual objects change proportionally You can also combine groups For hierarchical groupings Graphite ungroups each group in the order in which they were combined To create temporary groups which is useful when moving multiple objects you can drag a selection fence around several objects to treat them as a single unit while they are selected Changing the Members of a Group without Adding a Hierarchical Level When you want to add new geometry to an existing group and you select the group and the new geometry and choose the Group command you end up with a group within a group If you want to make a single group follow these directions 1 Select the group 2 Choose Arrange gt Ungroup The geometry ungroups with the individual objects selected 3 Hold down the SHIFT key and select the geometry you want to add to the group Arranging Geometry 4 Choose Arrange gt Group You can follow a similar procedure to remove members of a group Ungroup Command This command in the Arrange menu separates selected grouped objects into their individua
117. ANG ASHLAR VELLUM Software that works the way you think PRECISION User Guide Graphite v7 GRAPHITE March 2003 Ashlar Graphite and the slogans Software that Thinks and Software that Works the way You Think are registered trademarks of Ashlar Graphite Incorporated Other brand and product names are trademarks and registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright 2003 Ashlar Vellum Incorporated All rights reserved No part of this document may be reproduced photocopied or transmitted in any form without the expressed permission of Ashlar Vellum Incor porated The software described in this document is provided under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Limit of Liability Disclaimer of Warranty The information provided in the document is distributed as is without warranty While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this document Ashlar Vellum Incorporated Ashlar Vellum employ ees and the software developers shall have no liability to any person or entity with respect to liability loss or damage caused directly or indirectly by the instructions contained in this document or by the software described herein Ashlar Vellum Incorporated 1 800 877 2745 www ashlar Vellum com Table of Contents Section l Overview User Guide Documentation i isccd ci icc co csccdteenrcescsnsseceseccccssevevootesbeseseeecccsesies
118. ATE Folder 2 folders FLUIDPWR P amp ID FLUIDPWR Folder 8 files P amp ID Folder 3 files FASTENRM Folder 2 folders MCHSCRWM NUTSM MCHSCRWM Folder 14 files Appendix D Program Settings amp Files NUTSM Folder 2 files FASTENR Folder 4 folders MCHSCW NUTS PINS WASHERS MCHSCW Folder 14 files NUTS Folder 2 files PINS Folder 3 files WASHERS Folder 6 files HOLES Folder 14 files SYMBOL3D Folder 2 folders FASTENER FEATURES FASTENER Folder 2 folders FASTENR FASTENRM FASTENR Folder 4 folders MSSCRW3D WASHER3D PINS3DO NUTS3DO MCSCRW3D Folder 7 files WASHER3D Folder 3 files PINS3DO Folder 2 files NUTS3DO Folder 1 file FASTENRM folder 2 folders MCHSCRWM NUTSMO MCHSCRWM Folder 7 files NUTSMO Folder 1 files FEATURES Folder 2 folders ASSORTED HOLES ASSORTED Folder 6 files HOLES Folder 5 files Samples Folder 1 folder SAMPLES2D Folder 18 files D 6 Glossary Accelerators Annotation Apple HSL Display Apple RGB Display Alignment Alignment Angle Arc Tool Keyboard Equivalents that invoke commands rather than using the mouse to choose from menus Text on drawings including notes crosshatching and dimensions This is a standard color wheel for the Macintosh with the option to specify Hue Saturation and Lightness This is a standard color display for the Macintosh with the option to specify Red Green and Blue percentages 1 The justification of text with eithe
119. Arranging Geometry Editing Tools These tools allow you to change an object W Fillet and Chamfer tools physically either altering the geometry AIA IANS Transformation tools ie Trim tools changing the size changing the location or 10 1 Editing Objects 10 2 orientation of the selected object Three subpalettes on the tool palette provide these editing capabilities Fillet and Chamfer The Fillet and Chamfer tools round the corners of non parallel lines or cut them at straight angles respectively Trim The Trim tools cut off or extend a line to the boundary limit you specify You can also segment a line at an intersection or create corners from intersecting lines Transformation The Transformation tools move rotate expand or shrink and mirror objects Fillet and Chamfer Tools GOCE These tools on the tool palette construct fillets and chamfers from corners formed by nonparallel lines or curves The fillets and chamfers are automatically trimmed If you do not want them trimmed hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while you are selecting the objects to fillet or chamfer 2 Entity Fillet Tool This tool in the ninth subpalette of the main tool palette constructs an arc tangent to the two objects you click Fillets use the smallest arc between the selected geom etry Using the 2 Entity Fillet Tool 1 Cl
120. Assistant locks onto a perpendicular Tangent Perpendicular tangent perpendicular The Drafting Assistant Tech Note Another way to create geom etry from an exact location relative to another object is to reduce the Hit Radius of the Drafting Assistant with a ower number of pixels or to zoom in on the drawing to separate the construction points visually If you continue holding down the mouse button the line remains tangent or per pendicular while you drag the ending point around the object This is a useful feature if for exam tangent ple you want to create a line from and tangent to an existing circle to the tangent point of another circle Once a line is tangent to the circle it can be tangent dragged to the tangent point on the other circle with the tangency maintained at both ends The Drafting Assistant locks onto a tangent or perpendicular only when the Drafting Assistant starts from the on notation You cannot begin from a specific point such as endpoint quadrant or vertex Keyboard Snap Points You can direct the Drafting Assistant to snap onto an object For example you may want to start a new line from the exact center of a circle If you hold down the mouse button and press the c key on your keyboard the Drafting Assistant finds the center of the circle when you move the pointer near the center Using the Drafting Assistant for Snapping onto Geometry The following table li
121. CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key pressed click in the drawing area to indicate where you want to place the Bill of Materials A Bill of Materials containing the selected objects will be created and placed at the location you indicated with the last mouse click Editing Bill of Materials 1 Select the Bill of Materials with the Selection tool Bill of Materials 2 Choose Arrange gt Ungroup The Bill of Material ungroups into text and line objects that can be edited Exporting Bill of Materials Attributes assigned to objects in a drawing can be exported into an ASCII file to be used in other programs like text editors or spread sheets To export a Bill of Materials select the File gt Export The displayed Export dialog box contains the export option Attributes Export I Only Selected Graphite C DWG 2000 C Yellum Draft 3D 99 C DXF 2000 Accuracy To C Vellum 2 7 C EPS Digits C Text C IGES 4 0 C Bill of Materials C MetaFiles C Bitmaps G DWG R14 DXF R14 A Exporting Bill of Materials 1 Select File gt Export The Export dialog box displays 2 Mark the Attributes option 3 Select the option only selected if you want to export attributes only from selected objects and not from the entire drawing 4 Click OK and provide a file name and location The Item Numbers and attributes of the entire drawing or of the selected objects only export into an ASCII file 19 21 Bill of Materials 19 22
122. Construction 4 10 Dimension 12 6 12 31 Sheet Models 13 13 Smart wall 13 9 Work 13 8 Layer groups Command 13 10 Creating 13 12 Delete 13 12 Renaming 13 12 Layer operation Counting objects 13 8 Creating 13 7 Delete 13 7 Displaying 13 8 Group 13 10 Hide 13 7 Move objects 10 15 10 31 Renaming 13 7 Layout Bill of Materials 19 11 BOM edit 19 12 BOM Layouts command 19 12 BOM options 19 13 Custom view 14 29 Defining BOM layout 19 12 Menu 3 10 Preview 15 29 See also Formats Sheet into view 14 18 View 14 25 Leading Os 5 21 Lightness Data field 5 8 Slide bar 5 8 Limits dimension 12 6 Line creation Index Click 7 2 Drag 7 3 Line tools 7 7 3D 8 2 Connected 7 9 Parallel 7 10 Single 7 8 Smart Wall 7 11 Linear dimension settings 12 23 Linear duplicate 10 22 Linear tolerance 12 25 Location Indicator 3 7 Lock Command 10 33 Splines 7 26 Trackball 6 8 Lock Spline Control Point tool 7 26 Log Base 10 A 1 Luminance 5 6 M Macintosh Fonts 5 28 graphite prefs 3 16 5 28 Installing 1 5 OS settings 5 28 Page setup 15 26 Recent file list 5 28 Macros 6 2 Command 6 2 Creating 6 4 Editing 6 5 Limitations 6 6 Removing 6 5 Running 6 5 Magnifying glass tool 13 2 Margin notes Referral 1 2 Tech note 1 2 Tip 1 2 Material condition GD amp T 20 7 Math operators A 2 Megahertz A 3 Memory exhaustion 15 5 Menu Arrange 3 10 Dimension 3 11 Edit 3 10 File 3 10 Layout 3 10 Modules 3 11 Pen 3 11 Submenus 3 1
123. Definition 1 Choose Views gt Define View 2 Select the view you want to redefine 3 Click Redefine The Redefine View dialog box displays the settings as they appear on the screen with Normal line of sight selected 4 In the active view window drag the Normal line of sight The Up data field becomes selected 5 Drag the direction for up When you drag the normal vector with the mouse know that the vector from the beginning point points directly at you not away from you So when this new view is made current the normal vector points out of the screen not into it 6 Click OK The Redefine View dialog box closes 7 Dismiss the Define View dialog box if you have no other need for it Renaming a View Orientation 1 Click the view orientation to be renamed 14 21 Advanced Viewing Techniques 2 Type a new name 3 Click Rename Renaming a Standard View Orientation 1 Click the standard view name in the list box 2 Click the Locked box to toggle it off 3 Type a new name 4 Click Rename Unfold View Command The command in the Views menu allows you to create a view orientation from the active view window by specifying a line about which to unfold the new view orien tation Unfolding this view along this line creates this view window and view orientation 14 22 Views By specifying a line you define a 90 plane along that line which is coming towards you a
124. Dimensioning TOO eeceeeeeceeeeteteeeeettteeeentetees 12 21 Using the Cirel Genter Line TOO visitssedseacasnassieh saesanchsessaseacadbdied anced encatuinenees 12 21 Display Displaying the giid socericnini eni heessan cass pease E hanadgs E eaten de 5 23 TI 2 Redrawitig the Sereni in nan E pies nealiaidchead aes NEE EEE E TE 10 34 Stopping a screen Teles Diss sssistvvesacssans seane ninii eni E ARER 10 34 Documents File Organizators ia E A E eiee 15 6 IMPortinS DXT Meara o E ETE 15 10 Importing ASCII text from another documMmentessscrsneisuernssreernire 15 10 Opening a AOCUMENE cosanta oes AAA aed snancuna N EEE EEREN 15 3 Makino a BACKUP koprom NEE mavens 15 5 Saving in the current directory assii ieseni ra o aes Gees RE EE 15 4 Drafting Assistant Setting new Drafting Assistant construction angles ereenn 4 10 Using the Drafting Assistant for snapping Onto geoMeEtTy ccerccrrrrrene 4 4 Using tangents and perpendiculars 00 ecccccecseecesenneeeeseneeeeeseneeeeeenneeeesenaeees 4 3 Using the Snap Mode Command ccccecccseeeeeetteeeenteeesntteeessnsteeeesntteeensnteees 4 7 Editing Using a fillet tool ney a na AE EN 10 2 Wsing A cha nilct tool rannis a ei aiea 10 3 Copying objects with tOOMS ss iiccesscssacdsdsuncsnuncnvantipavusiessntnsamdsaaedspands eeii an 10 14 Usine the Comer Trini tOOl ersecuamvserisaemsneend eae ees 10 7 Grea titi oa IMA CLO ss terest cease dedaseiarsscas sa aeeaeucseais ates asset ae nea se e
125. Fillet choosing Undo reverts to the beginning of the process Some other activities can be stopped by pressing the ESC key Redo Command CTRL SHIFT Z Windows No Key Command Macintosh This command in the Edit menu reinstates the last action reversed by Undo You can Undo and Redo an unlimited number depending upon what you specified in your Preferences 10 21 Editing Objects 10 22 Remove Dots Command Antidot The Remove Dots command is automatically available to you in Graphite If it is not you must add it to the program using Add Command in the Utilities menu See Chapter 6 for more information This command removes all lines with zero length a k a points from the entire drawing To use the command choose Utilities gt Remove Dots The geometry does not have to be selected to use this command Duplicating Objects Graphite allows you to create multiple copies of an object and arrange them in an array along a straight line or in a circular pattern If you begin a duplication and discover that it is not what you want you can stop the process by pressing the ESC key and then choosing Undo to remove the copies from your document Linear Duplicate Command This command in the Edit menu allows you to create an array of copies along a straight line When you select the command the dia log box appears Number Per Row 2 X Length 0 Total Leng
126. H E 10 Optional Delete Model 3 since it is no longer needed Model 3 was automati 14 12 cally created with Sheet 2 or Another possibility would be to leave Model 3 active and paste the views of Model 1 which were removed with the Cut command at the beginning of this exercise on Sheet 2 Models 11 Choose Views gt Sheet Into View and select the appropriate format and views P ps a ga Model 4 Drawing Format K Model 2 Drawing Format placed on Sheet 1 3 views of Model 1 on Sheet 2 De tail cameras are not illu strated Front view of Model 1 on Sheet 1 with drawing format not visible Detail camera is not illustrated Front w Model 2 Model 1 i Model 3 H SheetT f With the Sheet Into View command you place views from the current Model 1 on the current Sheet 2 The sheet camera moves to Model 3 automatically created with Sheet Into View and displays the appropriate drawing format on Sheet 2 Sheet 1 with the front view of Model 1 lies behind Sheet 2 and is not visible Note The sheet camera would be moved to Model 4 if Model 3 were not deleted in Step 10 If you make Sheet 1 current Sheet 1 moves forward and the sheet camera moves to Model 2 drawing format and displays the Front view of Model 1 within the drawing format because Model 2 drawing format rests on Sheet 2 14 13 Advanced Viewing Techniques Tech
127. ION Macintosh key while using this tool causes it to change to and behave like the Zoom In tool Stroke Zoom You can use stroke commands to zoom magnify or reduce your drawing Stroke commands are useful because they don t require you to get out of the tool you re using in order to zoom Hold down the SHIFT CTRL keys Windows or the key Macintosh and drag the pointer that appears diagonally across the screen as described below The pointer takes on the shape when you hold down the SHIFT CTRL Windows or the key Macintosh keys 13 3 Viewing Geometry Using Stroke Zoom Drag the pointer diagonally og Drag Diagonally Result Upper left to lower right Zoom in enlargement centered over the stroked area Lower right to upper left Reverses Zoom In stroke to the previous magnifi cation Upper right to lower left Zoom out reduction the current screen reduces to the size of the area defined by the stroke Lower left to upper right Reverses Zoom Out stroke to previous magnifica tion Note For Zoom In and Zoom Out the size and location of the stroke rectangle is important for determining the result of the Zoom operation For Zoom Previous the size and location of the stroke rectangle is irrelevant All cases just give the previous magnification Orbit and Pan tools ao The Orbit tool is used to rotate the sheet camera around the 3D model The 3D objects is fixed even if you have the opposite impression The P
128. Line at Start v Line at End not affected by the settings made in the Witness Lines command Dimension Standards The Dimension Preferences dialog box can be opened by choosing Dimen sion gt Standards This dialog box lets you pick the standard your dimensions should follow as well as gives you the ability to define the characteristics for your own standard Most changes made in the Dimensions Standards dialog box affect currently selected dimensions and newly created ones changes made to the First Offset and the Next Offset affect only newly created dimensions Dimension Appearance Tip Witness Lines for existing lin ear dimensions can also be toggled on or off in Edit Objects 12 33 Dimensions 12 34 Changing the standard will also change the Dimension menu settings Setting dimension standards saves the values in the Dimension Standards dialog box as well as the settings in the Dimension menu except for the Witness Lines command Standard Text Offset Dimension Standards ANSI oa 375 375 This pull down lets you pick the standard your dimensions should follow Graphite is supplied with settings for ANSI DIN ISO and JIS standards There is an additional setting in the pull down list Other where you can specify your own settings or you can change the settings for one of the supplied standards The Set button maps the current settings to the standard that appears in the pu
129. Note Regardless of the method you use to create a View Window they all behave the same way They all have a border which can be turned on and off in the Views menu with the Show Hide View Boundaries command The active view is displayed in a view window which has a title bar 14 14 12 Arrange the views as you like on the sheet Or i In the previous chapter the concepts of Sheet Views and Detail Views were dis cussed These two different views are easy to identify on the screen e Each item displayed inside a view window is a Detail View e The area outside and underneath all detail view windows is the Sheet View This section goes into greater detail on views and models including Sheet into View More about Associative Detail Views When you create a detail view with the Detail View tool on the tool palette or the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu you see the same model through a second camera the Detail View Camera The Detail View Camera behaves like the Sheet Camera except it displays its view of the model in a View window on the sheet ae Detail View camera Detail View projector Model with 1 additional Detail View camera projecting its view in its active View window All Views displaying the same model are associative For example when you change the geometry on the sheet the geometry in the view window changes and vice versa When
130. Rename The name entered replaces User lt 65 gt in the col ors list as displayed above 5 Click Define If you click a definable color one of four color displays appears HSL Picker HSV Picker CYMK Picker or the Crayon Picker HSL Picker Weight gt Palette gt Pattern Black Arrowheads gt Red Arrow at Start Yellow Arrow at End Green Cyan Crosshatch Blue Hatch Ctrl H Magenta Solid Fill More Fill Ctrl B 3 Violet Blue a lt 3 VioletRed paee g iie F lt 3 Yellow Green lt i Yellow Orange lt 3 Wild Strawberry lt 3 Vivid Tangerine User lt 65 gt User lt 66 gt v Color Name User lt 65 gt Tech Note Mac Users with Operating Systems previous to 8 0 have two color display options HSV Picker rather than four 5 7 Basic Environment Settings 5 8 ie Pe Original Ey E Sj Pixa cotor pem n re Co Pekar Hue angie 370 ial Hae Angle ow M Saturation 100 pao Saturation 92 Lightness 54 a Value c CYMK Picker Crayon Picker Pick a Color Pick a Color co M a i Ip p ddd l The HSL Picker HSV Picker CYMK Picker and Crayon Picker contain the follow ing elements Color Wheel HSL Lightness Slide Bar HSL Hue Angle Saturation Lightness Data Fields HSL Color Slide Bar CYMK Red Green and Blue Data
131. Shrink Transformation tool e Number or type of objects as well as the Edit Objects command to edit the mea surements of existing objects This dialog box is a fast easy way to make several changes e Current color at once e Lock status e Current layer e Current pattern e Current weight e Absolute coordinates for the starting point and ending point of the object 10 30 The measurements reflect the settings of the Units option in the Preferences sub menu If you want to prevent changes to an object you can specify ocked in this dialog box or you can select the object and choose Lock from the Arrange menu If you are doing a lot of editing you may want to leave the Edit Objects dialog box displayed In that way you can select the object make the changes in the dialog box click Apply and then go on to the next object If more than one object is selected when you choose Edit Objects only the common information is displayed Entries are blank when the information isn t common For example if you select two concentric circles the center will be displayed in the Edit Objects box but the diameter box will be blank If you select several objects and then choose Edit Objects all of the objects will reflect the changes you make in the dialog box For example if you select all dimensions and change the text entry in the Edit Objects dialog box to 2 all the dimensions will display a 2 Moving a Object to a Different Layer
132. Specifying the Construction Line Angle with the Mouse 1 Click the Angle data field 2 Drag a vector in the drawing area The angle of the vector line appears in the Angle data field Specifying the Construction Line Offset with the Mouse 1 Click the Offset data field 90 2 Drag the offset distance in the draw lt gt 45 EO ee ing area The distance you drag appears in the Off set data field Be aware that the offset is WH cece o determined by the angle of the construc tion line as shown i Specifying X Y Coordinates with the Mouse The coordinates of the last point you specified appear in the X and Y data fields but you can change them by doing the following 1 Click the X data field 2 Enter new coordinates or In the drawing area click the location of the point through which the construction line should pass The coordinates are entered automatically for both the X and Y data fields Permanent Construction Lines Creating Multiple Construction Lines You can create multiple construction lines through the same point by entering the angles you want separated by semicolons Creating Parallel Construction Lines You can create parallel construction lines by specifying a single angle value with different offsets separated by semicolons You can also create parallel lines by creat ing one construction line using this data field then creating new lines with the Par allel Lines tool Creating Constr
133. This feature allows you to use one symbol in countless variations The following topics are covered in this chapter e Using Symbols e Placing Symbols e Smart Symbols 17 1 Symbols 17 2 e Symbol Libraries e Creating Symbol Libraries Using Symbols The installation procedure copied the parameterized symbols in the Symbols folder of the Graphite folder You may want to look at some of those symbols to get an idea of the type of symbols you can create with Graphite When you bring a symbol into a drawing not only can you specify the location of a symbol to be added to your drawing but you can also indicate its orientation In order for this to work properly a control point must be at the Origin 0 0 in the original symbol file As a special feature for use with parametrics lines in the Construction pen style do not appear with the symbol when it comes into a document You can use this fea ture to define your own smart windows and smart doors as well as other symbols Creating a Symbol Document 1 Construct the geometry using the Construction pen style for any lines you do not want to appear in the symbol when it comes into a drawing Be sure to place one control point at 0 0 if you want to specify the location of the sym bol when you bring it into a drawing 2 Dimension all aspects of the part by entering a variable in the text data field in the status line of each dimension Choose Edit gt Resolve to check the
134. VSImagesCust J Ysl zl wih 3 Repeat step 2 for all of the directories you want specified 4 Click Apply to save the settings and close the dialog box Importing and Exporting There are various reasons to use these features You might want to bring a docu ment in from another application to work on in Graphite You might need to save a document in a format other than the Graphite format for use with another applica tion You also might need to import or export text to or from a Graphite document Importing and Exporting 15 7 Graphite Documents Tip When importing into Graph ite you may have to choose Arrange gt Zoom All to see the imported geometry 15 8 that s an ASCII text file Graphite offers you a wide variety of options to accomplish this Import Command This command in the File menu imports a document and places it in the current model The names of documents in a format Graphite can read are displayed in a dialog box that works like the Open dialog box 1 Choose File gt Import A dialog box appears similar to the 2x NNN z Open dialog box lookin Quits s ck mt 2 Windows Select the file type you want to import from the Files of Type list box The list box shows all files of the selected type available in that folder Flea f E Macintosh Skip to the next step F roloes erame tiete o F reni 3 Double click the File name you want to import The Import dialog
135. a Screen Refresh Windows You can press the ESC or BREAK key to stop the redrawing of the screen For interrupting long operations such as redraw or linear or polar duplicate it is recommended that you use the BREAK key If the operation was initiated by a con trol key command such as CRTL R for redraw the ESC key is read by MS Win dows and it brings up a task list at the end of the operation Macintosh You can press ESC or the Command 3 key to stop the redrawing of the screen Adding Details Once you have created your basic geometry you may want to include notations or highlight certain portions of your geometry This chapter discusses a few ways to do so The topics covered include e Text e Autotext Text Blocks and Forms title blocks e Crosshatching and Solid Fills e Arrows Text When you want to annotate your drawing use the Text tool to create a text box for entering characters from the keyboard You can create import and edit text on screen You can use the Text menu to set the characteristics such as font text size style alignment line spacing and indent You have nine text vertex midpoint vertex handles for each text 1 The specifications list is included object These will help midpoint on a separate a midpoint eee 2 Tolerances are specified as noted your text as you want iad see attached sheet vertex midpoint Text Tool A Adding Details Tech Note An ASCII te
136. a is moved to the selected sheet and automatically displays it at the view scale which was current when the sheet was last changed 14 38 Once your create a detail view the sheet camera remains stationary in the origi nal x y world orientation You then will not be able to change the view of the sheet Sheet View There is only one sheet view for each sheet The sheet view is an infinite view picked up by the Sheet camera and displays everything on the sheet outside of all view windows The sheet view cannot be deleted and needs at least one sheet to display its view Since the sheet view like the detail view can display only one model at a time you have to use detail views to show more than one model on a sheet To activate a detail view you have to click in the view window to activate the sheet view you have to click on the sheet outside of all detail views If the Mod els dialog box is displayed the related model is highlighted The view orientation of a sheet becomes fixed when a detail view is created The sheet camera remains stationary in the original x y world orientation You will not be able to change the view of the sheet Cameras and Projectors There are two type of cameras one Sheet camera and as many Detail View cam eras as you create detail views The Sheet camera is permanently installed as default and displays its view via the sheet projector on the sheet To move the Sheet camera you have t
137. a o O E E a aed 8 3 Work TII seese nin ET E E O 8 6 Section 4 Editing Selecting OPJECtS 2 5 6esccectesshdece steictate Aetewedetste ec cchensedsdecdessesezseceusatelioceticatass 9 1 ODjJEGIS paninda a aA SO NE EET N 9 1 indicatina Sele Ct On 5 dpsetdasanctxisytees iaieiiea Aee aie ENa 9 2 Selection Process ssssunneniessucincddaind nut anchabad ymbidseawendendustocassdocsensudbdeadsatbeaenadnenaenennad 9 3 Editing Opje ts sccsecssiecedi cect sceeeccediesbiteeletees esttetcedeassshacedcesesteexseueesaassbescegeseate 10 1 Editing Tools asiano aE ond pce shee dane a e aao rA ER 10 1 Moving Objects with Tools siscciisecsiedsdnencdssetsaneaseieatesnstsnedspied dpenctsaeadsavaess 10 12 Copying Objects with Tools c cect eneenteesnesnieenteeneee 10 15 Sizing Objects with Tools eiiax csi cis eeassneeniac ever neavneguunegeand caurdea EAEE 10 16 Editing Commands siae ee aN E AOE EEE EEE aes 10 19 Duplicating ODJECE cursina reen ENEE EEEE AREETA EEEE E 10 22 Changing the Characteristics Of ODjectS meiiisirisviusiriiiiiiriroyiasvieidiis inis 10 29 ATTANSING GEOMEWY siim nn A K AE EEA EN ene janes 10 31 Section 5 Document Detailing AOGING Detail E E T T A E E EEE 11 1 WGKA A E E E ba ddawtieansnealce 11 1 Crosshatching and Solid Fills ccc eeeceeeeeeteeeeseteeeesneeeeeesneteesesneeesennenees 11 12 AtrOWNEAS cciss scsascities vases dasha aE E E E sia wek otha ease eng ceeded 11 19 DiMG NS1O0S ssee5 ges ces osck estes ceessiccectesceseeecd
138. accuracy of the parametric dimensions Choose File gt Save As 5 Name the document as you would with the Save command Placing Symbols It is a very easy process to place symbols into your drawing Using the File gt Sym bol you place either symbols you created or those that came with the program Symbol Commands When you select Symbol in the File menu an open file dialog box appears Using the dialog box you will navigate to and select a symbol directory All the symbols in that directory are then loaded into the Symbol Panel and their file names display along the left side of the Symbol Panel Placing Symbols Insert Choose File gt Symbol and a standard open file dialog box displays Once you select a symbol the Symbol Panel appears a Symbol Radius2 RROWHD vc6 FINMRKT vc6 gimble vc6 POCKET vc6 SLOTCURY vc6 Tech Note Click the small resize box in the lower right corner of the Symbol Panel to drag and The dialog box displays a preview of the symbol and lists the file names of all other resize it Shift click to mini symbols stored in that directory The Symbol Panel is resizeable mize the panel for use on nonparametric symbols such For parametric symbols entry fields for all variables defining the symbol are dis as nuts bolts valves etc played To place the symbol in your drawing click or drag a vector on the drawing area If you click the symbol inserts at the click location in its or
139. acing or angle Hatch Command CTRL H Windows H Macintosh This command located in the Pen menu crosshatches the selected objects using the current crosshatch pattern If you want to change the crosshatch pattern choose Crosshatch and make your selection from the dialog box The best way to select a hatch boundary is with the Tracer tool Crosshatching with the Current Pattern 1 Select the object you want to crosshatch 2 Choose Pen gt Hatch The selected area is crosshatched with the current pattern Solid Fill Command This command in the Pen menu fills the selection with the current pen color A solid filled object will cover its background only if it was the last entity drawn If you want a solid filled object to cover its background you have to select it again before printing or saving to bring it on top 11 17 Adding Details 11 18 Creating a Solid Fill 1 Select the objects which represent a closed boundary The closed boundary may include cutout areas like a hole Select both the outside boundary and the hole 2 Choose Pen gt Solid Fill The Fill dialog box appears 3 Enter a Tolerance for the fill The tolerance controls how smooth the linearization is Tolerance isd for fills in circles arcs ellipses and closed splines Increasing the value of Tolerance makes the fill smoother The default value is 0 01 A value of 0 001 A produces smoother edges than 01 This is also affected by Drawing Scal
140. acro included in the Utilities menu 7 Enter a Key short cut in the Key entry field 6 4 Click in the Key data field and enter the key combination or type it directly in the Key data field 8 Close the Macro dialog box by double clicking the Control menu Windows or the Close box Macintosh in the upper left corner of the dialog box Editing a Macro 1 Display the Macro dialog box 2 Select a Macro in the Names list box 3 Rename the Macro in the Rename data field and click the Rename button 4 Redefine the Macro by executing menu items and assigning a new stroke equiv alent to the macro 5 Alter the Macro key combination in the Key data field 6 Close the Macro dialog box by double clicking the Control menu Windows or the Close box Macintosh in the upper left corner of the dialog box Removing a Macro 1 Display the Macro dialog box 2 Select a Macro in the Names list box 3 Click Remove Running a Macro Each Macro has a unique name and can be run in one of four ways 1 It can be invoked with a key combination Subsequent typing of that key com bination will cause the associated macro to run 2 A macro can be invoked by a family of stroke commands you defined in the Macro dialog box 3 You can select the macro in the Utilities menu if you marked the option Jn Util ities Menu in the Macro dialog box 4 You can display the Macro dialog box select a macro in the Names list box and click Run
141. aic expression in the text data field The dimension reflects the value or variable you entered regardless of the actual value of the geometry you just dimensioned Continue dimensioning as needed to define the part completely Use the parametric feature as described in Chapter 16 Converting Parametric Dimensions to Associative Dimensions When you bring in a parameterized part with the Jmport command the geometry is drawn as you specify but the dimensions display the variables and expressions which defined them as symbols You can change the dimensions to be associative so that they reflect the actual measurements of the geometry even if you change the geometry 1 Select the dimensions 2 Choose Edit gt Edit Objects Dimension Appearance 3 Enter a in the text data field 4 Click Apply and close the dialog box The parametric variable changes to reflect the geometry s actual measurement 12 37 Dimensions 12 38 Viewing Geometry This chapter describes several Graphite features that allow you to view the geome try in your drawing in different ways The following topics are covered e Zooming e Layers e View Displays and Detail Views e Light Settings e Perspective e Views Menu Zooming Graphite gives you several ways to change the magnification of your drawing by zooming in and out using commands zoom tools and strokes Zoom Commands Zoom In Zoom Out or Zoom All from the Arrange menu ch
142. al Dimension Tools These tools measure vertical space or the distance between vertical objects Vertical Dimension Tool 7 of 4 000 This tool dimensions an object or space vertically Click the top point t first then click the bottom Using the Vertical Dimension Tool 1 Select the Vertical Dimension tool The Message Line reads Vertical Pick first dimension point 2 Click the top point of the geometry first The Message Line now reads Vertical Pick second dimension point 3 Click the bottom point The dimension appears You can drag it to a new location Dimension and exten sion lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Vertical Base Line Dimension Tool 424 This tool dimensions objects or space vertically from a at 146 base point 1 688 Using the Vertical Base Line Dimension Tool 1 Select the Vertical Base Line Dimension tool The Message Line reads Vertical Base Line Pick first dimension point T 12 9 Dimensions 12 10 2 Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Vertical Base Line Pick second dimension point Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears to the right of the first measured from the base point Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new
143. al work station you could place recond page paride ji the view on one page showing the chair work tray x ray and drill arms Then on subsequent pages you can add the detail views of the x ray arm and drill setup In addition to this your first sheet would use a particular format and the following sheets would use a different less detailed drawing format Using Multiple Sheets The key to using more than one sheet of paper is to use Graphite s model and sheet functions In the example below you will start with the front view of a model Model 1 on a drawing format Model 2 on Sheet 1 Then you open Sheet 2 and display all four views of Model 1 on it Models 1 Create the part Model 1 contains the part and its Top view is picked up by the sheet camera and displayed on Sheet 1 2 In the Views menu use the Sheet Into View command to set up four views in the appropriate sized drawing format The sheet camera aligns parallel to the current sheet and displays the Top view of Model 2 the drawing format on Sheet 1 Four detail view cameras display 4 14 9 Advanced Viewing Techniques Ds 14 10 views of Model 1 on Sheet 1 within the drawing format 7 Model 2 Drawing Format pas as gt 4 detail views of Model 1 detail cameras not illustrated Trimetric_ w Model 1_ il Model 2
144. ale and Top Front and Right views at 1 4 scale The design layout is primarily for viewing the model as you design it If you choose this layout you may want to change the scale and rearrange the smaller views to prepare for plotting Draft vc6 Windows Views Draft 4 Macintosh This layout creates four full scale views Top Front Right and Trimetric 14 27 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 28 Trimtric vc 6 Windows View Trimetric Macintosh This layout is a single Trimetric view at full scale Frntrit vc Windows Views Front and Right Macintosh This layout displays 2 full scale views the Front and Right e Views Frnttop vc6 Windows Views Top and Front Macintosh This layout displays 2 full scale views the Top and Front Creating Custom View Layouts The specifications for the view layouts available from the Sheet into View dialog box are in individual Graphite drawing files stored in the Layouts folder in the Graphite folder If you want to create your own layout or a customized drawing for mat simply edit one of the existing drawings in the Layouts folder or create a new drawing and save it in the Layouts folder The filename will then appear in the pull down menu in the Shee
145. alloon update accordingly Item Number text size can be changed dynamically by selecting the Item Number balloon and changing the size in the Dimension menu Deleting Item Numbers J 2 Select the desired Item Number balloon Select Edit gt Delete or press the BACKSPACE Windows or DELETE Macintosh key The selected Item Number will be deleted Renumber Existing Item Numbers i In the BOM tool palette select the Item Number tool 2 The entry fields Item Width and Size display in the Status Line Enter in the Item field the new starting number for the Item Number press the Enter or Return key Press the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and keep it pressed Click the Item Number balloons in the desired order The Item Number balloon will split The upper half of the symbol shows the old Item Number and the lower half of the symbol the new Item Number Release the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key All Item Numbers renumber Item Numbers and Object Copies The Item Number tool automatically recognizes if an object is a copy of an object to which an Item Number is already assigned as long as the original object has an attribute of the type Quantity The Item Number tool automatically assigns the identical Item Number of the original object to the object copy Bill of Materials After you have assigned attributes to objects you create a Bill of Materials The Bill of Materials w
146. alog box or Sheet Into View dialog box so that the pattern spacing is appropriate for the viewing and drawing scale of the geometry Sometimes you might want to set the pattern spacing independently of the viewing or drawing scale or change the pattern altogether The Edit Pattern dialog box lets you control the pattern spacing for nine of Graphite s eleven different line patterns Solid and Dotted patterns cannot be edited These patterns can be saved as default patterns by choosing Layout gt Prefer ences gt Save Preferences If you want these patterns to be saved with the file only and not as default patterns just save the file Defining a Pen Pattern 1 Choose Pen gt Pat e Define patterns tern gt Define Pattern The x Define patterns dialog box y Solid New appears Dotted Center Delete 2 Click New Dashed The User1 default name is Hidden Current added to the bottom of the Phantom patterns window and appears Dashdot Edit in the Pattern Name field Border Divide Rename Pattern Name ess Pen Characteristics Basic Environment Settings Click Edit The Edit Pattern dialog box appears with the default name User1 in the Edit Pattern Center z Edit Pattern field Dash Length Cancel By default there are two dashes a solid line segment Add and a blank segment Remove Create you own pattern by modifying the length of these segments and or add ing dashes adi Visible Len
147. alogous to transparent media used in conven tional manual drafting Parts can be constructed on several layers which you can make visible or invis ible The tool that enables you to draw single con nected parallel lines or smart walls The command that copies an object in a line or in an array of multiple lines The command to render a selection unchangeable To select entities as a group masking out all oth ers The mathematical trigonometric or exponential expression used to indicate values All value entry boxes in Graphite accept the math operators listed in Appendix A The top line of the drawing area It names the cur rent tool and provides instructions for using it The file format used by the Windows Clipboard Glossary Mnemonics Model Non planar NURB Object Object Rotation Origin Orthogonal Palette Parametrics The key sequence which invokes a command from a menu The geometry that is incorporated into a view The model is the geometry that a view sees Surfaces or points that do not lie in a two dimen sional plane Non Uniform Rational B splines the type of splines Graphite creates NURB splines are a super set of Bezier curves NURB splines provide design ers with two interrelated functions First curvature continuity remains intact even when the curve is changed so kinks won t develop as the spline is altered Second localized control of a complex curve is p
148. an choose from nine different pen styles in the Pen menu The characteristics are listed below Pen Outline Visible Hidden Dash Center Pen Phantom Dimension Balloon Construction Pattern Solid Solid Hidden Dashed Center Pattern Phantom Solid Solid Dotted Weight 0 010 0 020 0 016 0 016 0 010 Weight 0 010 0 002 0 005 0 002 Color Black Black Red Yellow Green Color Cyan Blue Green Magenta When you want to change pens you have three options choose a different pen style from the Style submenu in the Pen menu choose different characteristics for the current pen from the pen characteristics listed in the Pen menu Color Weight and Pattern or use the Edit Style command in the Style submenu to permanently alter the characteristic of the pen The current pen style is checked in the Style sub menu Changing the Pen Characteristics of an Object 1 Select the object 2 Choose Pen gt Style and select the pen style you want to change the characteris tics of the selected object If you only want to change one characteristic rather than the entire pen style choose the characteristic from the pen characteristics listed in the Pen menu When you make this change the current pen also changes thus affecting future constructions If you want to change the pen characteristics of an object without changing the cur rent pen select the object then choose Edit gt Edit Objects and change the cha
149. an invisible Smart Wall piece that cuts the Smart Walls on the drawing Parametrics works with Smart Wall configurations but it can be tricky If you use parametrics turn on the point display Layout gt Show Points and hook dimension objects right to the displayed points rather than to the lines Keep in mind that dou ble walls obscure the fact that smart walls are actually single lines For more information on parametrics see Chapter 16 Arc Tools You can use the Arc tools to create an arc by any of three methods e Center Point e 3 Point e Tangent Point Drawing Tools Description and Use As you create each arc the Status Line displays entries such as coordinate locations radius angle from horizontal and delta angle The arc is drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern Center Point Arc Tool D This tool in the third subpalette of the main tool palette draws an arc from three points the center point arc beginning point and arc endpoint Using the Center Point Arc Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Center Point Arc Pick center Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Click the center point of the arc The Message Line now tells you the next step in using the tool Click the radius and beginning of the arc 4 Drag the extent of the arc pressing at the beginning point of the arc and releas ing at the endpoint You can simply
150. an move it if you want Copy CTRL C Windows C Macintosh This command in the Edit menu places a copy of the selection onto the Clipboard without deleting the original selection You can paste the copy elsewhere in the Editing Commands Tech Note The difference between the Cut and Copy commands is that cutting a selection removes it from the drawing area while a copied selection remains in the drawing area Tip If you want to move an object from one layer to another choose the Edit gt Edit Objects Tip You can also create a copy of an object or text box with the Selection tool First select the object then hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and drag a copy of the object o a new location You can copy an object using any of the Transformation ools by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while using the tool 10 19 Editing Objects 10 20 current document or into a different document You can even paste the copied selection into a document created with a different application Copying Objects 1 Select the objects to be copied 2 Choose Edit gt Copy The selection goes on the Clipboard and it remains in the current document Paste CTRL V Windows 36 V Macintosh This command in the Edit menu pastes a copy of the Clipboard contents onto the center of the drawing area The Clipboard contents are not changed when you use the Paste c
151. an only see one model at a time on each sheet without using detail views Creating a New Model Click New to create another model You can name the model by typing the name in the Rename data field and clicking Rename Renaming a Model 1 Select the name of the model from the list box 2 Type the new name 3 Click Rename Deleting a Model 1 Select the name of the model from the list box 2 Click Delete When you delete a model you delete all of the geometry making up that model Tip Models You can also type a name and then click New 14 7 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 8 Note You cannot delete the current model A model which is still associated to a sheet cannot be deleted As long it is related to a sheet the Delete button in the Models dialog box is not available Making a Model the Current Model 1 Activate the view you want sheet view or detail view by clicking on it 2 Select the name from the list in the Models dialog box 3 Click Current A check mark shows the current model for the current view Multiple Sheets and Models Generally you create a model on a single sheet When it is time to create drafting views of the model however you may need several sheets because your model is so large or so detailed that it requires more than one sheet of paper for the fin ished drawing First page Sheet 1 particular format For example if you are designing a dent
152. an tool is used to move the sheet camera in the x and y directions Panning passed the document edges will automatically scroll the view in that direction Layers Layers are like pages some transparent and some invisible You can use layers to show and hide various components of your drawing They are particularly useful in 13 4 helping you view and plot complex drawings For example when you dimension a part the dimensions can be placed on a separate layer which you can display or not as your needs require Layers allow you to plot different versions of the same document for quick and easy specialized blueprints You can hide the dimension layer to exhibit the idea of a design to a planning team and show the dimensions when presenting the drawing to engineers You can hide some drawing components when you print or plot For example you can hide the construction layer so that construction lines and geometry don t print or plot but they remain in the drawing ready for use when you want to alter them You can think of visible layers as transparent pages and hidden layers as invisible pages Although you cannot see objects on hidden layers they do exist The layer must be visible for you to select objects on the layer Nor can those objects be deleted using Select All unless the layer is visible You can construct different layouts using one layer as the basis For example you can use a floor plan and then construct the electrical an
153. and angle of the sides of the parallelogram Y L1 A1 L2 A2 90 3 Corner Ellipse Tool a This tool in the fifth subpalette of the main tool palette draws an ellipse inscribed in the parallelogram calculated from the three corners you specify Using the 3 Corner Ellipse Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads 3 Corner Ellipse Pick first corner of control parallelogram Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previ ous Macintosh The Message Line will guide you through each successive step 2 Indicate one corner of the parallelogram defining the ellipse 3 Indicate another corner of the defining parallelogram 4 Indicate the final corner of the defining parallelogram If the three points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the lower left corner of the parallelogram The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of a corner and the length and angle of the sides of the parallelogram Y L1 Ail IL2 A2 90 Drawing Tools Description and Use Polygon Tools r Fa F mke e These tools on the tool palette draw rectangles inscribed polygons or circum scribed polygons They create lines which are individual objects Dragging to indi cate the points of the polygon creates a rubberband image
154. and that does not snap to one of the Drafting Assistant s constraints like endpoint or mid point and if you are using a tool that requires only two points for creation such as the Center Point Circle Rectangle or 2 Point Ellipse you need to use a work plane to place the geometry properly Also tools which use three points for specifi cation can be drawn non parallel to the work plane Planes This command in the 3D menu displays the Planes submenu so that you can set the current work plane The standard work planes Front Right Top and World are always displayed as well as any temporary plane TempPlane you have gener ated and any planes you have created with the Define Plane command See margin notes Setting the Work Plane 1 Choose 3D gt Planes Work Plane Tech Note If a work plane is named Temp Plane it was created with the 3 Point Plane com mand and will exist only for the duration of the current Graphite session You can rename the TempPlane work plane with the Define Plane command to make it a per manent plane for that file Also there can only be one plane called Temp Plane in a document If you create another plane using the 3 Point Plane command with out changing the name of the first the new Temp Plane replaces the old one 8 7 3D Drawing Tools The Planes submenu displays xtruge evolye 2 Drag down the submenu until the plane you want highlights 3 Release the
155. anges the view magnifi cation of your geometry depending upon your selection The Zoom Previous com mand takes you to the last magnification If you want to zoom a particular area use the Stroke feature or the Zoom In tool for zooming Strokes are described later in this chapter 13 1 Viewing Geometry Tip Use the Zoom tools or Stroke zoom to zoom at a particular location 13 2 Zoom All CTRL F Windows F Macintosh This command in the Arrange menu zooms in or out to make all objects on your drawing fill the screen regardless of how big or small the objects are Zoom In CTRL Windows Macintosh This command in the Arrange menu zooms in on the center of the screen by a fac tor of two You cannot specify a particular area for enlargement Zoom Out CTRL Windows Macintosh This command in the Arrange menu zooms out from the center of the screen by a factor of two You cannot specify the area of reduction Zoom Previous This command in the Arrange menu zooms to the previous magnification as many as five times Zoom Tools Select the appropriate zoom tool from the View Control tool palette RRI Using a Magnifying Glass Tool With the Zoom tools you drag a box around an area on the screen so only that area magnifies on the screen 1 Select a Zoom tool from the tool palette 2 With the mouse button pressed drag a box around an area on the screen you want to magnify or reduce 3 R
156. any other menu item This feature allows a macro to call another macro which in turn could call the original macro Such Infinite Loops are checked when an attempt is made to include a macro and if detected an alert box is posted resulting in the macro not being included In this list box all names of the macros defined are displayed alphabetically When one of the items is selected with the cursor the Strokes and the Com mands list boxes as well as the Key and Jn Utilities Menu fields are automatically filled in with the rel evant data that defines the selected macro The Strokes list box shows a group of stroke com mands if any that can run the selected macro The names in this list box relate to the encoding of the shape of the stroke and you need not be con cerned about them It is optional to associate a stroke to define a macro The Commands list box shows the set of menu commands that define this macro They are shown in this form MenuName EntryName You can assign your own key combinations for a macro by clicking in the Key edit box and entering the key combination or typing it directly in the Key Advanced Environment Settings entry field For example enter CTRL SHIFT by pressing the CTRL key first keeping it depressed and pressing the SHIFT key and then the key P The Key edit box displays CTRL SHIFT P Windows users if you try to create a CTRL key combination and the key combination is already in use you
157. ars measured from the base point 4 Click the next point for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the base point Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned If you want to display a dimension at the base point click the base point after you have dimensioned all other points You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Reminder To display the dimension number of the base point you have to click it twice at the first and the last dimension points Oblique Dimension Tools Sir These tools measure space or objects obliquely or point to point Oblique Dimension Tool This tool dimensions an object or space from point to point 1 lt or obliquely Using the Oblique Dimension Tool 1 Select the Oblique Dimension tool The Message Line reads Oblique Pick first dimension point 12 11 Dimensions 12 12 2 Click the left point first The Message Line now reads Oblique Pick second dimension point 3 Click the right point The dimension appears You can drag it to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order to display the dimension below the objects Oblique Base Line Dimension Tool B This tool dimensions objects and spaces point to 4 243 point or obliquely from a base point The results shown reflect colinear dimension points Using the Oblique Base Line Dimensio
158. ary of the face View Ports Not supported EPS Graphite Line Line all shapes and attributes are maintained Curve Splines curves convert into splines All shapes and attributes are maintained Fill Fill all shapes and attributes are maintained Fill line Fill all shapes and attributes are maintained Non fill Non line Not supported 15 11 Graphite Documents 15 12 Text Weight Color white black Process color Custom color Pattern Layer BMI File start File end Model Text Plot Data Definition Attribute Table Def Grid Beginning of Diagram End of Diagram Beginning of View End of View Ditto End of Ditto Sets Definition Attrib Elements Sets Color Table Definition Not supported Converts to the current weight Converts to the approximate color 7 colors as defined by Graphite 2 7 Convert to the approximate color 7 colors as defined by Graphite 2 7 Converts to the approximate color 7 colors as defined by Graphite 2 7 Converts to black fill Layer layer name and elements are retained Lay ers that contain no elements are not retained Graphite FLST Not supported FLEN Not supported MTXT Not supported PLOT Not supported ATRB Not supported GRID Grid BEGD View Model ENDD View Model BEGV View Model ENDV View Model DITO View Model DITE View Model SETS Group ELNM Group additional information CLOR Color you can define the
159. at you are most likely to change is selected the field is highlighted For example when you draw a line with the Single Line tool the Length data field is highlighted so you can enter a value for the length Just type a value When you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh the line is redrawn at the new length You can set the number of decimal places for the Status data field entries or frac tional round off by going to Layout gt Preferences gt Units In the Units dialog box you set the precision Using the Status Line Fields If you want to make an entry in a different status field you can use one of four selection methods e Press the Tab key to cycle the selection highlight through the status fields from left to right e Click inside the status field and the pointer becomes an beam text cursor The Status Line e Double click inside the status field to select the entire contents of the field e Click the field label to select the entire contents of the field Using the Status Line with Drawing Tools Once you have drawn an object you can adjust the specifications the length angle and location in the Status Line You must make these changes immediately before you construct another object select a different tool or choose a command You can make only one series of changes in the Status Line Gin as many fields as necessary after you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Graphite redraws the object to y
160. attributes This table will be interpreted when the object is placed as a symbol When you insert this object with the Symbol command all attributes contained in this table will be listed in the Symbol dialog box Values of unlocked attributes can 19 9 Bill of Materials 19 10 be edited before the symbol is placed without the attributes table in the drawing area Symbol Attributes do not attach to the objects in the symbol file like object attributes Instead Symbol Attributes attach to the symbol when the symbol is inserted into a drawing If you open a marked symbol by choosing File gt Open the attributes table appears in the drawing area with the symbol 1 In the BOM tool palette choose the Symbol Attributes tool The Message Line reads BOM Symbol Attribute Tool Select Insertion Point 2 Enter the values for the attributes in the Status Line 3 Click to place the Symbol Attributes table in an empty spot in the drawing area A table with all assigned attributes appears with the values entered in the Status Line 4 Save the object with the Symbol Attributes table The attributes in this table attach to the symbol when placed using the Symbol command and the assigned values can be changed in the Symbol dialog box There should be only one symbol table per file If you place a symbol holding object attributes but no Symbol Attributes table in a drawing the object attributes do not display in the Symbol dialog and
161. ave been created You can drag the Trackball window around the screen Fore more information on detail views and sheet views see Chapter 13 Viewing Geometry To rotate between the TrackBall and the TrackCube click on the box in the lower left corner Rotating the Sheet View or Active View 1 Choose Views gt Show Trackball 2 Drag the pointer on the Trackball to rotate the view The model rotates as you drag The model rotates around the center of the active view or sheet Using the Trackball View Menu The Trackball TrackCube has a pull down menu for specifying the view of the current view window or the sheet view if there are no view windows 1 Move the pointer to the current view name displayed at the bottom of the Trackball TrackCube window 2 Press the mouse button The Views menu displays 3 Choose the view orientation you want to display in the cur rent window The view orientation changes to your specification in the view window Trimetric Isometric Right Front Top Y Trimetric Trackball Locking This feature enables you to lock the trackball TrackCube along two screen axes so you can rotate the view of your geometry around the third screen axis The screen axes are different from the axes of your geometry unless you set your view to top 3D Viewing Example You can rotate the view of this block around the x y or z axes of the geometry or the screen Rotate View around
162. axis is vertical the X axis is at 30 from the screen hor izontal and the Y axis is at 15 from the screen horizontal The command that reverses the last editing or creation action You can Undo and Redo the last eight actions To open a model 90 along an axis Measures used for construction U S or metric The point at which the sides of an angle intersect or a knot point of a spline Geometry that appears only in the view in which it was created Crosshatching text GD amp T symbols and dimensions in a detail view are view depen dent A pen style A 3 dimensional representation showing boundary lines edges and intersections but not surfaces The work plane used at the beginning of the con struction of a model Also know as the world coor dinate system Work plane Zoom The x y plane used for 2D objects which has an origin of 0 0 0 for all data input Sometimes referred to as the user or work coordinate system The tool or command that allows you to magnify or reduce an image Glossary Task Index Arcs Using th 3 POint Ate tOOl iasisssadessacdseansdtanaibiruannaed mandunendmbanndsanadotecanuaeancendueaes 7 13 Using the Center Point Arc TOO suspisie uorrtesruieisina in aineta eias 7 13 Using the Tangent Point Arc tool oie eecceceeeeceeceetneeeeseneeeeeeeneesesenneeseneaees 7 14 Circles Using the 3 Point Circle tOOl s sssshecnsccensaned eneabendeeeauneontants e A aiia aaa 7 17 Using the
163. ayer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the group list 2 Click Delete Deleting the work group which is indicated by a check mark deletes the group from the list but the layer settings remain in effect until they are changed Making a Layer Group the Work Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the group list 2 Click Set Group This changes the layer settings for the current model to those specified by the layer group These settings are shown in the layers list A check mark by a Layer Group indicates that the model s current layer settings match those of the indicated Layer Group Changing the Layer Setting of a Layer Group 1 Select the desired Layer Group from the group list 2 Change the layer settings as desired Visible layers are indicated by the Eye Symbol and can be hidden by clicking on the symbol Hidden layers can be dis played in the layer group by clicking in the location where the Eye Symbol View Displays should be The work layer is indicated by the check mark and can be set by double clicking on the desired layer The new settings automatically replace the old settings Layers Sheets and Models All Models and Sheets share the same set of layers in a file For more information about Models and Sheets see Chapter 14 View Displays This section explains various ways to enlarge or reduce all or part of the geometry for both viewing and printing This visual change of the view does no
164. before all dimen sions that are less than 1 Selecting Trailing 0 s places O s after the decimal point This option is affected by the precision set in Layout gt Preferences gt Units Example If your precision is set at 001 a measurement of three inches will be displayed as 3 000 These options do not apply to dimensions dis played in fractions 12 35 Dimensions 12 36 Solid Leader These radio buttons allow you to determine whether the leader lines that appear outside of the witness lines should be connected with another line The default value does not place this line Tolerance Text Size This entry data field lets you specify the size of the tolerance text as a percentage of the nominal value The default value is 100 the same size as the nominal value Clicking OK accepts the changes made in the Dimension Standards dialog box Clicking Apply accepts any changes made in the Dimension Standards dialog box to any currently selected dimensions without closing the dialog box Clicking Cancel ignores any changes and closes the Dimension Standards dialog box Parametric Dimensions You must dimension objects to use the parametrics feature you must specify values variables or expressions for each dimension Parametrics is discussed in detail in Chapter 16 Creating a Parametric Dimension 1 Create the dimension as usual The Status Line displays a symbol in the text data field 2 Enter a value variable or algebr
165. ble clicking or choosing another tool You must completely enclose the object or objects you want to select Objects not completely within the selection polygon will not be selected The graphic below shows the selected objects in gray Deselecting To deselect an object click anywhere in the drawing area where there is no object or click any of the creation tools in the tool palette You can deselect an object that was selected in a multiple selection operation While the objects are still selected hold down the SHIFT key and click the objects you want deselected Selection Commands Graphite provides you with various selection commands for selecting objects Select All CTRL A Windows A Macintosh This command in the Edit menu selects all objects except those on a hidden layer or excluded by the Selection Mask You can also double click the Selection tool to select all objects If you choose Select All while using the Text tool all characters in the current text area are selected 9 7 Selecting Objects Tip The Selection Mask is useful when you have created a complex drawing and want to change particular groups of objects You can use this feature to export some but not all geometry You can also use the Selection Mask to change all dimensions from parametric variables to real values as described in the Chapter 6 Parametrics 9 8 Selection Mask This command in the Edit menu allows yo
166. box appears mort SCKTHD VC6 Graphite DWG T Grouped Vellum DXF l Geometry Only Text EPS Spline J Onto Work Layer C MetaFiles I Unscale Bitmaps Cancel 4 Specify any import options you want 5 Click OK The file appears in the drawing area If you want to save the file in its original for mat after editing you must choose the File gt Export The file formats Graphite can import are listed below Graphite Ashlar Vellum s native file format Text ASCII text file Importing and Exporting DXF AutoCAD s Data eXchange Format R14 and ACAD2000 files can be imported DWG AutoCAD s native file format R14 and ACAD2000 files can be imported IGES IGES version 4 0 Initial Graphics Exchange Specifi cation The translator also supports IGES entity 128 and 144 NURB surfaces and importing an unlim ited number of entities EPS Encapsulated PostScript format for printing to a postscript printer Spline Text file which Graphite converts to a spline MetaFiles Windows only Windows Metafile Format Bitmaps Windows only Windows BitMaP Format Pict Macintosh only Macintosh native file format When you use the Import command Graphite detects the format of the document and displays a dialog box showing you the format and allowing you to choose how to bring the geometry into Graphite Grouped Brings the geometry into Graphite grouped so it is Tip a single unit in the Graphite document You
167. box will appear notifying you Co Before shutting down Graphite will display a Save as dialog box allowing you to save the file first Making a Backup You should make a backup of your work in case you make many changes and want to go back to the original version You can choose File gt Save As and save the file with another name It s possible that your company makes periodic backups of your directories and you can go back to a previous version that way AutoSave Command This command is found under Layout gt Preferences and directs Graphite to save a backup copy of your work periodically If your computer hangs up for any reason the work you did up to the last AutoSave will be recoverable In the AutoSave dialog box you AutoSave lt Untitled 1 gt As can turn AutoSave on or off and Savei SEE specify the time interval in min awm e utes between AutoSaves At the specified interval Graphite creates Desktop an AutoSave file with the base of a the original file name and a SAV ED extension in the same folder asthe Enn Aa original file AutoSave prompts GE Fiename z My Network Pii you for a file name before creating an AutoSave file for untitled docu ments created by using the New command from the File menu If you supply a file name this file name will be associated with the document and the AutoSave file If you Cancel AutoSave will skip that document but the prompt will appear again at the nex
168. bute Selection Tool Symbol Attributes Tool Item Number Tool BOM Tool Attribute Tools With the attribute tools you assign attributes to object geometry or mark an object as a symbol When you select one of these tools all attributes of the current BOM layout display in the Status Line Hidden attributes do not dis play in the Status Line A Name Material Quantity The attribute values shown in the Status Line can be entered or modified if they are not locked If they are locked the attribute s value is greyed out Attribute Selection Tool With this tool you assign attributes of the current layout to a selected object Assigning Attributes 1 Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Layouts The Define Layouts dialog box displays For more information about the Define Layouts dialog box see the Bill of Materials Layouts section later in this chapter 2 Select a BOM Layout 3 Close the Define Layouts dialog box by clicking the Close button Windows or the Close box Macintosh 4 Select Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Attributes The Define Attribute dialog box displays 5 Hide all attributes which you don t want to assign to object geometry in the cur Assigning Attributes rent drawing by deselecting the eye next to that attribute 6 Close the Define Attributes dialog box by clicking the Close button Windows or Close box Macintosh 7 In the BOM tool palette select the Attr
169. celerator When available it is denoted by the key sequence listed on the menu While keyboard functionality is always available this manual generally describes making choices with the mouse Submenus Commands followed by an arrow symbol have submenus which dis play when the command is high La yout lighted Preferences 1 Pull down the menu 2 Click on a command followed by an arrow symbol The submenu displays Click on the submenu Click the desired command Dialog Boxes When you choose a command followed by an ellipsis such as Edit Objects in the Edit menu a dialog box appears Dialog boxes allow you to qualify the command you chose by adding information For example in the Edit Objects dialog box above you can change the specifications of the selected object If a dialog box obscures your view of the draw ing area you can move it to a new location by dragging it with the pointer on the Title bar Edit Objects preced B Black A Sod ooo Menu Bar 3 13 The Basics Tip Windows You can also hold down the ALT key and type a letter to select the first item that begins with that letter then use the arrow keys to move to the selection you want Once your choice is highlighted press ENTER 3 14 Option Buttons Option buttons indicate mutually exclusive choices you can select only one option at a time Click the option you want and the button turns black as s
170. cent File List Another way to access files that have been opened recently is through the Recent File List that appears in the File menu after the Exit command This list contains the names and paths of the most recent files that have been opened by Graphite To open a file from the Recent File List simply select the file from the File menu If the file has been moved since it was last used and the path is no longer accurate Graphite will ask you to locate the file by providing the standard Open dialog box Saving a Drawing You can save a drawing by choosing File gt Save or Save As The file is stored on your computer in the folder you specify Using Documents Tech Note The number of files con tained in this list can be set in the Graphite ini file Win dows or the recent Ist file in the Scripts folder Macin tosh For more information consult Chapter 5 Basic Environment Settings 15 3 Graphite Documents Tip Use AutoSave so that Graph tte automatically saves your work Choose Layout gt Pref erences gt AutoSave 15 4 Save Command CTRL S Windows S Macintosh This command in the File menu saves the current Graphite document to its original folder If you want to save it to a different folder or with a different name choose Save As If you choose Save and the document has not been saved previously the Save As tool dialog box appears automatically allowing you to name the document and specify
171. ch contains related tools Viewing and selecting from a subpalette are similar to choosing a command from a menu Selecting a Tool from a Subpalette 1 Position the arrow pointer on the tool 2 Press the mouse button The subpalette appears to the right of the tool 3 Drag the pointer to highlight the desired tool 4 Release the mouse button The selected tool replaces the previous tool in the tool palette The highlighted icon in the tool palette shows that your selection from the subpalette is the active or current tool The new tool is visible in the tool palette until you select another tool from the same subpalette The tools in the subpalette remain in the same order only the tool displayed on the tool palette changes Once you select a tool additional information appears to help with your construc tion The Pointer Pointer Locator Message Line and Status Line all provide feed back about the active tool If you want to select a tool that is already displayed in the tool palette you only need to click it you don t need to select it from the subpalette Smart Pointer When you select a tool and move the pointer into the drawing area the pointer shape represents the selected tool Some of the pointers like the single line pointer are simple cross hairs Others such as the Opposite Point Circle pointer resemble the tool itself Parts of the Graphite Window The pointer called a smart pointer
172. ching 1 Click the ISO radio button to display the ISO patterns The dialog box displays 2 Select the pattern you want from the menu The pattern you select appears in the Pattern display area as it will appear on the drawing 3 Change the spacing and angle if desired As you make changes to the angle or spacing the pattern box shows the revised pattern exactly as it will be when the specified object is crosshatched Click Apply Using DIN Crosshatching 1 Select the pattern you want from the menu Those patterns that have an ellipsis C following their name have their own submenu Double click on one of those names to display the submenu To return to the main menu double click on the ellipsis at the top of the sub menu 11 16 Crosshatching and Solid Fills The pattern you select appears in the Pattern display area as it will appear on the drawing 2 Change the spacing and angle if desired As you make changes to the angle or spacing the pattern box shows the revised pattern exactly as it will be when the specified object is crosshatched 3 Click Apply Editing an Existing Crosshatch Pattern 1 Select the existing crosshatching by clicking it with the Selection tool 2 Choose Pen gt Crosshatch 3 Make the changes you want in the Crosshatch dialog box 4 Click Apply The crosshatching changes as you specified Note You cannot edit the line style of any specific crosshatch pattern only adjust the sp
173. ckball for free rotation Editing a View Without Editing the Model The geometry within view windows is associative When you make a change in one window the change affects the model and therefore the geometry in all views In the drafting phase of the design process you may want to edit the geometry in one view window without making the same changes to the model For example you may want to clarify the view by removing a line or adding an arc visually but you do not want to make the actual change in the model You can accomplish this by using the Flatten View command on the Views menu When you flatten a view the geometry is taken out of the view and placed back on the sheet where it is no longer associated with the model In this way you can make changes to the geometry without changing the model or other views A typical situation for flattening a view is when a view should display fillets but you don t want the fillets to dis play in the model Trimming such intersecting fillets in 3D is a difficult prob lem that was addressed in a tutorial of the Getting Started section of this manual but you will find Graphite makes this problem very easy to solve Flatten View Command This command in the Views menu places a projection of the visible geometry in the active view window onto the sheet at full scale When the view is flattened all overlapping lines of equal length and all lines parallel to the line of sight are removed The
174. ckness T of the wall 3 Click or drag to indicate the ends of the wall segment Tip If you want to use the Smart Wall feature for single lines you have to create the lines with the Smart Wall tool and enter 0 for the thickness of the wall Drawing Tools 7 12 You can press the SHIFT key to flip the wall to the opposite side 4 Continue specifying both endpoints for wall segments as needed If you delete a merged segment the remaining walls redraw The Status Line allows you to specify thickness of the wall the X Y coordinates of the beginning point the wall length and the angle from horizontal Once the wall segment is created wall Length is the selected status field T X Y A Wall Symbols Parametric symbols like door and window symbols can be constructed in a way that automatically cuts an opening in the Smart Wall they get placed on Examples of this are included with Graphite in the Architect library within the Symbols folder When you move the symbol along the wall to another position the wall automati cally closes at the old position and the opening appears at the new position 1 The symbol must contain a Smart Wall piece that is thicker than the wall seg ment it will be placed on 2 Set the pen pattern of the smart wall piece to dotted Any geometry in a sym bol that is of the dotted pen pattern will be placed on the drawing but will be invisible This results in
175. cle on a non parallel plane you must use three point specification tools such as the 3 Point Cir cle tool or Tangent Point Circle tool 3 Point Circle tool 3 Rectangle tool Point definition 2 point definition can draw can draw in any plane eo only parallel to the work plane Le Opposite Point Circle tool 2 point definition can draw only parallel to the work plane When a tool creates geometry from two points the geometry lies on a plane parallel to the work plane If the tool uses three points to define the geometry the geome try will lie on the plane defined by the three points If your geometry does not allow you to specify three points or two entities in the plane you want to use you must move the work plane Reminders To see geometry in 3D you have two choices e In the Views menu choose Views and select a view The default views are Iso metric Right Front Top and Trimetric e Inthe Views menu choose Show Trackball When the Trackball appears you can select a view from its own menu As you create or view 3D geometry displaying the Triad will show you the orienta tion of the work plane on which you are drawing The Show Triad command is located in the 3D menu See Chapter 6 Advanced Environment Settings for more information on the Trackball and the Triad Construction Rules for Tools Used in 3D Lines Single connected and parallel lines have no 3D restrictions Tangent lines pu
176. click all three points but the rubberhand arc won t appear with this method To construct an arc greater than 180 drag rather than click the endpoint The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center of the arc the length of the radius the starting angle from horizontal and the delta angle from the start Radius is the selected status field XL YL LALA 3 Point Arc Tool iB This tool in the third subpalette of the main tool palette draws an arc through the points you select Using the 3 Point Arc Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads 3 Point Arc Pick first point Ctrl Tan gent to object Windows or Option Tangent to object Macintosh 2 Click the first endpoint of the arc Notice that the Message Line tells you the next step for using the tool 7 13 Drawing Tools 7 14 3 Drag or click the second and third positions Dragging displays the rubberband arc The arc is drawn from the first position that you indicate through the second position and ends at the third position If you click on a separate object while holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key the arc is drawn tangent to the specified object rather than through the exact click point For each of the three clicks that define the arc if the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key is held down and the cursor is placed on some other object Graphite will define the arc to be tangent to
177. color table with the VelBmi ini file Importing and Exporting Appendix APND Drawing elements additional informa tion Txt Parm Symb w text SYMP Symbol character character height only width is determined by height Super Text Option Parm TXTP Character elements character height only width is determined by height Point PONT Not supported Line LINE Line Circle Arc CIRC Circle Arc Ellipse ELPS Ellipse Polygonal Line MLTL Line Spline Offset Spline LSPL Spline Linear Spline LSPL Line Beginning of Areafill BEGA Fill hatch End of Areafill ENDA Fill hatch Areafill Polygon PLOG Fill hatch Areafill Elements STRK Hatch you can define the hatching pattern table with the VelBmi ini file SuperText SUPT Text Vertical horizontal parallel and normal dimensions are identified as Dimensions Others are identified in case of expansion The next nine items fall within this cate gory ANSI Dimension DIMA Dimension or general elements ISO Dimension DIMD Dimension or general elements End Dimension expan DIME Dimension or general elements Beginning ASO Dim GEBD Dimension or general elements End ISO Dim ENDI Dimension or general elements Arc Dim Line 34 35 SACD Dimension or general elements Witness Polyg Dim Line 34 35 ASAR Dimension or general elements 15 13 Graphite Documents 15 14 Line Dimension Line Text Dimension Line Balloon Arrow with Text De
178. created at a 1 1 Drawing Scale will be 24 pt on a page printed at a 2 1 scale The size of the text will not change relative to the other geometry in the file If you want to keep the text size specified before scaling choose the Keep Text Size and Keep Dimension Text Size options in the Drawing Size dialog box This will change the size of the text relative to other geometry in the file For example 12 pt text that was created at a 1 1 Drawing Scale will still be 12 pt on a page printed at Drawing Scale and Paper Size a 2 1 scale The size of the text will be half as small as before changing the Drawing Scale relative to other geometry Another method of controlling text size and dimensions while scaling is to calculate the needed text size manually as shown in the following example When calculating the text size for scaling manually the rule is set the text size to the inverse of the scaling factor The text size affects both text and dimensions In that way the text elements of the drawing are proportional with the size of the geometry For example if an assembly is 83 feet wide you may want to scale that assembly 1 100 a scale factor of 01 to place it in a drawing format This requires using text that is equally large so that you can read it visually when you scale the drawing If you want the final text to be 156 inch in height you must specify 100 x 156 for the text size in the drawing With the manual calculation you
179. ct all objects by double clicking on the Selection tool Tracer Tool This Tracer tool in the first subpalette of the main tool palette selects boundaries and uses coincident endpoints and line intersections to trace the perimeter of the geometry 1 In the Selection tool subpalette select the Tracer tool The Message Line reads Tracer Pick curve to start trace Shift Extend 2 Click on a boundary line The Tracer moves from one line to another making its selection If you have two overlapping objects as shown below the Tracer tool selects the perimeter of the objects depending on where you click If you click on the outside of the perimeter line the Tracer tool selects the outer most perimeter The crosshatching of the figures below shows the boundaries selected when you click the Tracer tool at the cursor loca tions shown If you click on the inside of the line the tracer selects the inner most perimeter The Tracer tool does not select actual geometry but rather creates temporary geometry that Graphite uses for operations like Fills Crosshatching and 2D Analysis The Tracer tool does not work on a 3D model Selection Process Tip The Tracer tool is most use ful for selecting boundaries for Crosshatching Fills and for 2D Analysis because it elimi nates the need to segment geometry 9 5 Selecting Objects 9 6 L Select by Line Tool This tool in the first subpalet
180. ctangle 7 21 The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the first point as well as the width and height of the rectangle Width is the selected status field x Y H Inscribed Polygon Tool This tool in the sixth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a regular polygon where the radius of the circumscribing circle determines the location of the poly gon s vertices The default polygon is a hexagon but you can specify the number of sides in the Status Line The Status Line shows a diameter for the circle the standard way of describing a polygon inscribed in a circle Using the Inscribed Polygon Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Inscribed Polygon Pick center of poly gon Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Two options Click the center of the polygon The Message Line reads Inscribed Polygon Pick vertex of polygon Then pick a point on the circumfer ence of the circumscribing circle or Drag from the center of the polygon to a point on the circumference of the cir cumscribing circle You can create a copy of the last inscribed polygon by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the center The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center the diame ter of the circle defining the polygon and the number of sides Diameter is the default Status Line selection and
181. cted Move versus Move Tool You can move objects either with the Selection tool or with the Move tool Moving with the Selection Tool Moving Objects with Tools 10 13 Editing Objects Tip The Move tool can be used to move a circle or an arc by its center point The Selec tion tool cannot do this 10 14 The move function of the Selection tool allows free movement of the selected object To move a circle from one location to another as shown above use the Selection tool and the Drafting Assistant to align the 90 quadrant with the corner of the rect angle The circles do not need to touch the rectangle to be aligned with it To move a circle or an arc from its center point you must use the Move tool rather than the Selection tool Moving with the Nudge Tool This tool is accessed through the right mouse button To set the nudge distance go to Layout gt Preferences gt Nudge When you have selected to object to move use the arrow keys and the object will move the distance you specified Moving with the Move Tool The Move tool on the Transformation subpalette allows you to move the selection with reference to other geometry Move a 1 inch square 2 inches in the X direction and 1 inch in the Y direction See the following graphic endpoint 1 Select the square to be moved i 2 Select the Move tool bn eae 3 Click one corner of the square when the endpoint notation displa
182. cturer aligned with edge B then edge C but another aligned with edge C then edge B the resulting measurements would probably be different The GD amp T standards tell a manufacturer the order of alignment Bonus Tolerance In addition to the alignment information a manufacturer gets a bonus from GD amp T tolerances In conventional drafting the tolerance for hole drilling results in a square target area For example examine the plate on the left below The positional tolerance for the hole is 001 The target area magnified and shown on the right is from 001 left of the perfect center to 001 right of the perfect center and 001 above the perfect center to 001 below the perfect center GD amp T provides a circular target area for the hole First measure from the center in one direction by the distance of the tolerance 1 7 then measure the same distance perpendicular to that point 001 001 Basic Dimension You can then use the distance from the endpoint of the second line to the perfect center as the radius of a circle to create a circular target the bonus tolerance R 001414 NN In that way the target area for the hole s center is the area circumscribing the square of standard dimensions The standard information basic dimensions about the target area appears in a box with a GD amp T feature control frame 300 002 WIA B C Basic Dimension Since
183. d sized as you specified The symbol geometry is selected so you can move it to a new location Add regular dimensions if desired If you want to see an enlargement of any part of the symbol within the viewing window move the pointer to the area of interest and press the mouse button The enlargement reduces when you release the mouse button Browsing a Directory of Symbols 1 Choose File gt Symbol The Open dialog box appears Select a symbol file from the directory you want to browse and click Open The Symbol dialog box appears displaying a preview of the currently selected symbol All symbol files in that directory appear in the symbols list on the left side of the Symbol Panel To change the selected symbol click on a file name from the list along the left side of the Symbol Panel The preview pane updates to display the currently selected symbol Smart Symbols 3 Click New to load a different directory of symbols Importing a Symbol You can also use the Import to bring in the geometry and dimensions of a symbol When you import a symbol it comes into the current drawing at the size it was drawn you can specify measurements by choosing Edit gt Edit Objects or choose Edit gt Select All and then choose Edit gt Resolve to change the size Editing Parametric Symbols Using the Edit Objects command you can edit parametric symbols placed in a draw ing After having selected the symbol choose Edit gt Edit Objects th
184. d by a plane perpen dicular to that axis O 4e All points of a surface of revolution equidistant from a common axis A 3D element projected to a plane ae AL An axis or planar surface at a specified angle from another axis or datum plane ZESA hme at ye un An axis or planar surface at a right angle to a datum axis or datum plane 20 5 GD amp T 20 6 Parallelism 4 True Position Concentricity Symmetry A Circular Runout An axis or planar surface equidistant along its length to a datum axis or datum plane A zone of tolerance for a center axis or center plane 2 L gy tL Froopsj The axes of all elements in a cross section share a common datum axis Zz We The location of a feature relative to a center plane 0 04 Q Ts Circular elements of a surface of revolution associ ated with a datum axis Geometric Characteristics Mefebene ZA Total Runout All elements of a surface of revolution associated with a datum axis Tip If the diameter symbol is Diameter appropriate for the geome try you should display it It is The second section of the feature control frame specifies whether the tolerance usually not used with flatness applies to a circular zone If it does you should specify the diameter symbol roundness cylindricity pro from the pop up menu file of line or surface angular ity circular or t
185. d plumbing plans on different layers In that way you can turn off one layer the electrical plan for instance and print the other the plumbing plan with the floor plan Graphite allows you to have up to 255 visible or hidden layers in your drawing Using Colors with Layers Many CAD drawings show different components in different colors When you specify a different color for a layer the layer remembers the color so that if you add geometry to a layer later the new geometry appears in the same color as the last geometry constructed on that layer In this way you can use the Visible pen in red on one layer green on another layer and so on ile 2 ont nM RD Choose Layout gt Layers Create a new layer and rename it Outline green indicating you always want to use the pen style Outline with a green color on this layer Make the layer Outline green current Select Pen gt Style gt Outline Change the pen color from Black to Green by selecting Pen gt Color gt Green Draw a circle The circle is created with the green color Select the Single Line tool Make Layer 1 current Layers Tip Layers facilitate color specific wiring diagrams or electrical and plumbing blueprints 13 5 Viewing Geometry 9 Draw a line The line is created in black the default color for the Outline pen style 10 Select the Rectangle tool 11 Make the layer Outline green current and draw a rectangle The rectangle is created i
186. deonaad dbacnatieaaetand dnedant 7 2 Creating a line by dragging ee cceneeeeeeneeeeeseneeeetseneeeeseneeeeseeeeeteeeeeenes 7 3 Creating additional geometry with status data fields 00 eeeeteeetereeeees 7 6 Drawing a line perpendicular to another line or spline eee 7 8 Drawing a line tangent to or perpendicular to a CUIVE Lo eects 7 8 Using the Single Line tO eiiiicsiscismadicnssticdisinenasaecdiaandiweanattosandakenddeenemeandvanecers 7 8 Usine the Connected Lines to leuse E 7 9 Using th Parallel Lines tOOl says Qivccsaesiea dea neces E EEE T 7 10 Usine the Smati Wall tol iasdidssnsccinnedssanntdncbseytansnndusinadsepondebbannead enkannetemecedions 7 11 Locking Preventing accidental changes to one or more Objects ccerccccrerree 10 33 Preventing changes to an entire d CUMENt nersssepedina i 10 33 Unlock Command airiran ao a aia a ndbdecaeees 10 33 Models Creating a new Model with the Sheets command seeecessrererrrresrreerrr 14 5 Creating a new m delrss sinian ident acim REE OAR 14 7 Del ting a Modelism eanit oani Aar ACEi CETE EA ENEA NENE 14 7 Nay O E E E E E A T T 14 15 Making a model the current model erssneirra siiiu e aani 14 8 Renaming a model syiir onen e EA N ET A 14 7 Offset Brae A E E esse bene tence aey 10 28 Using the Ofsetdialog BOX renerion ni EN E see ctis teesayweedabavns 10 27 Origin Moving the origin with respect to the work plane sesesrsaciiisraineiiiisris 8 9 Seting the OL GIN serpin en Ea TE EREE ET
187. der If you have not specified a printing plotting size the default size is used To Tech Note You can only pan when the Drawing Size dialog box is open Once you close the box you can no longer adjust the boundaries through pan ning 15 29 Graphite Documents remove the page border display select the command again or simply select a tool from the tool palette O 327 pe 2 174 z 2 174 If the drawing does not fit the paper size choose Layout gt Drawing Size Drawing Formats When your part is complete and you want to place it in a formatted border Graph ite provides you with many options You cannot only modify all drawing formats in the Layout folder of the Graphite folder but create your own drawing formats and design layouts as well Graphite distinguishes between Drawing Formats and Design Layouts Drawing for mats contain the border line of the drawing the cutting line and a Title block for entries such as name and scale of the drawing Design layouts contain a border and detail views e Drawing formats have to be created for each paper format such as A B C or D and for both paper orientations Portrait and Landscape e All drawing formats you find in the Layout folder of the Graphite folder are designed for Plotter devices where the cutting lines correspond exactly with the dimensions of the selected paper format for example 30 x 40 inch for the D For mat and the Border line is
188. dimension layer the work layer 2 Dimension as usual Subsequent dimensions automatically go on the Dimension layer rather than the work layer Adding Tolerance and Limits 1 From the Dimension menu choose the desired style either Linear or Angular 2 Create the dimension 3 Enter the values in the Status Line for upper and lower tolerance limits and press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Using Fixed Dimensions If you delete the symbol in the text data field on the Status Line for a newly cre ated dimension or in the Edit Objects dialog box and replace it with other text the entry in the text data field is fixed it does not update if you change the units or the size of the geometry Horizontal Dimension Tools eh These tools measure horizontal spaces or the distance between linear objects x l Horizontal Dimension Tool im 797 This tool dimensions an object or space horizontally Using the Horizontal Dimension Tool 1 Select the Horizontal Dimension tool The Message Line reads Horizontal Pick first dimension point 2 Using the Dimension Tools Click the left point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Horizontal Pick second dimension point Click the right point The dimension appears You can drag it to a new location Dimension and exten sion lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display be
189. dix A for a list of functions and conditional operators However you choose to specify the dimensions they must define all geometry and any relationships that exist between different parts of the geometry Creating Parametric Dimensions 1 Construct the geometry 2 Display the dimension palette and choose the appropriate dimensioning tool The Status Line displays a symbol in the text data field to show that the dimen sions are entered as actual measurements 3 Click the geometry to dimension as usual The Text data field in the Status Line highlights 4 Type whatever expression variable or constant you want to use for the dimen sion and press the ENTER Windows or the RETURN Macintosh key If you want the actual value to be used do not change the symbol in the text data field Variables are case sensitive D is not the same as d The expression you type replaces the symbol E e xamples of Parametric Dimensions METER and Conditional Expressions ii You can use the conditional operators as parametric dimensions Create the dimension as usual and enter WwW the conditional expression as text in the Status Line R 250 Using Parametrics The example here shows a conditional ifelse A ay ie expression ea be ifelse L1 gt L2 L1 L2 H 4 When the above ifelse statement resolves the rectangle with the larger value L1 or L2 touches the L3 rectangle L3 ia L H 4 Lo
190. do command e You can select the object s then choose Edit gt Cut You can retrieve what you cut by using the Paste command as long as you have not cut or copied anything else Delete Command This command in the Edit menu deletes a selection without placing it onto the Clip board You can Undo this deletion but you cannot Paste what is deleted In addi tion to this command you can use the DELETE Windows and Macintosh or BACKSPACE Windows only key to delete a selection You can retrieve what you deleted with the Undo command Cut Command See an earlier section for information on how to use this command Retrieving with Undo and Redo Once an object is deleted or cut you can retrieve it with the Undo command in the Edit menu The number of Undo commands can be specified in the Layout gt Prefer ences gt Undos You can use CTRL Z Windows or Z Macintosh to issue the Undo command from the keyboard Undo Command CTRL Z Windows 3 Z Macintosh This command in the Edit menu reverses the last action For example if you delete an object you can choose Undo to restore it You can then use Redo to return to the deleted version You can Undo actions that create and edit geometry and text but not actions that do not change the contents of the drawing such as resizing the window or quitting If you are using a tool which involves a multi step process such as constructing with Connected Lines or creating a 3 Entity
191. do not get attached to the symbol when placed in the new drawing To access the object attributes the symbol must first be ungrouped An object can have both object attributes and symbol attributes and their values do not have to be the same Editing Attributes Assigned attributes display in the Status Line where the default values can be edited Showing Attributes 1 In the BOM tool palette select the Attribute Selection tool Editing Attributes Move the mouse pointer over the drawing area As soon as the pointer comes near an object with assigned attributes these attributes and their respective val ues automatically display in the Status Line Important Attributes must be visible eye mark and the proper layout must be active as indicated in the Define Attributes dialog box and in the Define Layouts dialog box in order to display assigned attributes in the Status Line Changing the Values of Attributes Tip 1 In the BOM tool palette select the Attribute Selection tool p Values of attributes can also A be edited in the Edit Objects dialog box To do so you 2 Move the mouse pointer near an object with assigned attributes select the object choose Edit gt Edit Objects change The attributes and their respective values display in the Status Line the value in the Edit Objects Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool dialog box and click Apply 4 Change the respective values in the Status Line To
192. e 4 Click Apply The selected object fills with the current pen color Changing the Color of an Existing Solid Fill 1 Select the existing solid fill by clicking it with the Selection tool 2 Inthe Pen menu choose a new color from the Color submenu The Fill color changes as you specified and will be visible as soon as you deselect the solid fill Changing the Tolerance of an Existing Solid Fill 1 Select the existing solid fill by clicking it with the Selection tool 2 Choose Pen gt Solid Fill 3 Change the Tolerance and press Apply You can also change the Tolerance in the Edit Objects dialog box Fill Command CTRL B Windows B Macintosh This command is located in the Pen menu and fills the selected objects using the current pen color If you want to change the fill color in the Pen menu change the color from the Color submenu Fill with the Current Pen Color 1 Select the object you want to fill 2 Choose Pen gt Fill Arrowheads The selected area fills with the current pen color Arrowheads When you want to use arrowheads on lines or circular arcs that are not a part of Tech Note dimensions specify the placement of arrowheads in the Pen menu You can have Arrowheads for dimensions an arrowhead at the beginning or end of a line or circular arc or at both the begin are controlled with com ning and end mands from the Dimensions menu Width of Arrowhead The width of the arrowhead is based on the t
193. e Printer orientation and other options Name Properies Status Ready Type HP LaserJet 5MP Setting up the Page Where WOhrishtech a A Comment 1 Select the plotter or printer ll m Paper r Orientation YOU WES USS Size Letter 8 1 2x11 in x Portrait A 2 In the Paper Size menu Source Upper tray 7 C Landscape select the paper size a e 3 Specify the orientation Portrait is taller than wide EE Portrait Landscape Landscape is wider than tall F Orientation Portrait 4 Click OK Drawing Size Command This command in the Layout menu allows you to see the size of the maximum plot ting printing area relative to the drawing It also allows you to specify the scaling of the drawing so it fits the paper size and orientation set by the Print Setup Win dows or Page Setup Macintosh command Setting up the Drawing Size If the geometry is larger than a standard piece of paper or so small that it would be impossible to use it at full scale you must set the Drawing Size In many cases you may want to use a standard drawing scale such as 1 4 inch 1 foot for the draft ing project 15 26 1 Choose Layout gt Drawing Size A dialog box appears r Always Display Page Bounds r Keep Text Size 2 Specify the scale To specify a scale use Pikecpuinenion et she one of two methods the ratio represents Drawing Scale z Plotted size Actual size
194. e 20 4 Diameter 20 7 Feet A 3 File 15 8 Backup 15 5 Menu 3 10 Organization 15 6 Plotting to a file 15 36 Program files D 1 Program settings D 1 Recent file list 15 3 File command Close 15 6 Exit 15 6 Export 15 7 Import 15 7 Open 15 2 Save 15 3 Filename 15 3 Fill Command 11 18 Detail view 14 16 Solid 11 12 11 17 Fillet 3D 8 3 Smart wall 7 11 Fillet tools 10 2 2 Entity 10 2 Fillet 10 3 Flatness GD amp T 20 5 Flatten view 2 8 14 24 Floating tool palette 6 1 Font ANSI 11 6 Dimension 12 28 Plotter 11 10 15 37 Text 11 5 Text size 11 6 Format Creating 15 32 Drafting with 5 26 Drafting without 5 25 Drawing 2 7 15 30 Importing 15 31 Modifying 15 32 Placing 15 30 Sheet into view 14 18 15 31 Views 14 26 Forms Command 15 33 Creating 15 33 Fractions dimensions 12 24 Front view 14 19 Index G GD amp T 20 1 ANSI 20 1 20 11 Background 20 1 Command 20 11 Dimension 20 3 Geometric characteristic 20 4 Label 20 11 Material condition 20 7 Symbols 20 10 GD amp T setting Alignment 20 2 Bonus tolerance 20 2 Datum 20 9 Feature control frame 20 4 Tolerance 20 7 20 10 Geometric characteristic Angularity 20 5 Circular runout 20 6 Concentricity 20 6 Cylindricity 20 5 Flatness 20 5 Parallelism 20 6 Perpendicularity 20 5 Profile of Line 20 5 Roundness 20 5 Straightness 20 4 Symmetry 20 6 Total runout 20 7 True position 20 6 Graphite Constructing a model 2 6 graphite prefs 3 16 Graphite Window Drawing ar
195. e 6 4 Cutting ODJECE eironi i eiiie eas eR AE e A E AARE oia 10 19 Editino Pen PattetNSeragius inesi ni ee oa i e aan 5 17 Editing Pen Weights inesistenti ii n E EA ERES 5 12 Editing a MACO miresia OO E 6 5 E e SCLS EE E E E N 10 30 Extending lines to a theoretical intersection ccccccecerccrrcrernerreen 10 7 Using the Expand Shrink toblerone E 10 10 Using the Mirror tool series cciseniraunasaimmaiianpuiubaneniis einen 10 10 Moving geometry with the Cut COmMmmMmand srissirsisseressiswirniisnei aiina 10 19 Moving objects with tools eee ceseceneseneeeseeeseneessnsessnteseneesneeneas 10 12 Moving with the Move Toolsin na a E 10 14 Moving with the Selection TOO eration EE 10 13 Usin THEY ROLLE LOOM scsi ss secs cates sntuiganteabni a e e a a ania 10 8 Task Index TI 4 Using the Segment tol 2 ccsscicissinceitiinsccnsenidiins cana aaaionim mene TEN 10 6 Sizing an object with the Move Tool eweseer ee noina vpe ua AEN Ne 10 17 Sizing an object with the Selection Tool eee ereeeteeeeneeenes 10 16 Using the Simple Trim 160 essensen i ei a E eia 10 5 Usethe Relimit tOOL prre ines TaN Ia r ENEE OE 10 5 Using Linear Duplicate snc sacikutehaiie EE E meine 10 23 Using Polar Duplicate sss isseire nnna e wane esadines unees 10 26 Using the Remove Dots Command cccccecceeseeeeeteeeetteeeeeeteteeeesnireeeeneetees 10 22 Ellipse Using the 2 Point Center Ellipse toolesrarni ia 7 18 Using the 3 Point Center Ellipse tool eee ee eeen
196. e BIOCKS swcsisaacveiadsinisievannad seuondnedennnnodsdna tend siehsevanbun eau n wia 15 33 Printing or Plotting a Drawing c ieee ce ceteeeeeeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeeeeettteeeeeeess 15 35 Section 8 Parametrics and Symbols PAPAMELEICS 5 6 vecesssscssesesssaccceaeess ca osecesencesscudsessussstssessondsonesessdecesenassedeseesseveess 16 1 Introduction to Parametrics srcveyahet opadensapersteeesencrse EEEE AS 16 2 WSIS Patametnies eienen Tane E EAE E EAER 16 2 Parametric Draing eane ea A EEA EENE EEEE E EETA 16 9 Parametric ProDlemS inog enee pa i EEE NEE ATEN 16 12 Complex Parametric Dratun ge corcseini inr a a R 16 19 Parametrics and Grouped Objects isisisi a 16 25 SY MOIS sicseeccvececessssescsicecedisconteceassesssscscccsessscotessaceeesscesdecsceeesateceecseessisdssesvesess 17 1 Using SYMBOLS serana EEE E OEE ENEE AEEA 17 2 Placing Symbols siririn nia TTR eE EE did ead ee AE ER E 17 2 Smart Sym HOLS sersseisisninsiseceeiiekoniseyioii ia a a i e 17 5 Section 9 Geometric Analysis 2D Analysis veces cessccssssdsccessssosesccecdsssctasssssosssssccssascensecscceesscccsssscesesssesessssossecase 18 1 2D Analysis Command ssciidcecadiiieciyassiiyeieves aes dekeneein dame aea RE a 18 1 CAG AOS an ce cheeses A EAE E A E O 18 4 Bill of Materials octets ccsceceis sicecviveccvivederessvassseveveseeesesdesedesstiiveasvenccutewseszeccedeoa s 19 1 TAtrOMUGtiOn cacavsiceecseenes Sededian cae hea eenessaeeaunesaceans Gance bens cde eyan cam
197. e Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences following their definition they will be available each time you open a new file Because the color displays are different for Windows and Macintosh machines the process for defining a color vary slightly Step 5 and higher take this into account Windows Macintosh users continue on page 5 7 Pen Characteristics 1 To define a new color choose Pen gt Pen Color gt Define tyle Color 2 Define Weight gt Palette gt Pattern gt Black Arrowheads gt Red Arrow at Start Yellow Arrow at End Green Cyan Crosshatch Blue Hatch Ctrl H Magenta Solid Fill More Fill Ctrl B 2 The Edit Colors dialog box appears x 3 In the dialog box window scroll down and Violet Define select one of the undefined color numbers White Yellow Green Current like lt User65 gt the first definable color avail Yellow Orange able Wild Strawberry No Use a Vivid Tangerine 4 Enter the color name limited to 15 charac V User lt 65 ters in the Color Name data field and click User lt 66 gt User lt 67 gt Rename The name entered replaces User lt 65 gt in the colors list as displayed here as 5 Click Define The color display Cele TE N Basic colors appears on the screen E E EEr m A EnEn Eon EEE EERE SEG eCer Custom colors BEEBE See EEE ESE Qetine Custom Cokrs gt gt 6 Click Define Custom Colors to display the full color display
198. e Object 1 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette The Message Line reads Select Select Shift Extend Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macintosh Move the pointer to an object and click The object is selected and any previ ously selected objects are deselected Selecting Multiple Objects using the SHIFT key 1 2 3 4 5 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette Move the pointer to an object and click Press down the SHIFT key While holding down the SHIFT key click other objects to be selected The objects you clicked are selected If you then click one of the selected objects it is deselected Release the SHIFT key Selecting Multiple Objects by Dragging If you want to select more than one object you can drag a selection fence around the objects 1 2 Click the Selection tool in the tool palette Drag a selection fence around the objects you want to select All objects that lie completely inside the selection fence are selected If a portion of an object is outside the region you dragged that geometry is not selected but the control points of the geometry which lie inside the selection fence are selected If you want to select most of the objects within an area you can drag a selection fence to select all the objects and then deselect the objects you do not want selected by holding down the SHIFT key and clicking them Selecting All Objects You can also sele
199. e Text gt Indentation Indentation Command Text Adding Details 11 10 This command in the Text menu sets the indentation of paragraphs for the selected text area as defined by the units set in the Preferences submenu 1 Choose Text gt Indentation AEREA The dialog box appears First Line You can use point values if you Blghtindent include pt in your entry gt 2 Specify the indentation you want Lettinaent o be OK Cancel You can specify the number of units for any or all the choices 3 Click OK First Line Sets the number of units for the indentation of the first line of each paragraph This is an example f a paragraph with the irst line indented oa Left Indent Sets the number of units for the indentation of the left margin of each paragraph 2 This is an example of a paragraph with a left indent Right Indent Sets the number of units for the indentation of the right margin of each paragraph This is an example of a paragraph with i a right indentation i Plotter Fonts You can use all TrueType and PostScript fonts that are installed on your computer SHX fonts are not supported on the Macintosh platform Text In addition Graphite offers the following Plotter fonts Plotter ABCOEFGHIKLMNOPGRS TUVWXYZ abcdefghiklmnoparstuvwxyz Se ete ualnnopar Stuy wp YO 123456789 Plotter Extended ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abedefghijkimnopaqrstuvwx
200. e adjacent points so you don t change the slope of the rest of the spline Lock Spline Control Point Tool N This tool in the seventh subpalette of the main tool palette allows you to lock specified points on an existing spline so you can change the slope between the points without affecting the rest of the spline Using the Lock Spline Control Point Tool 1 Select the spline 2 Choose Layout gt Show Points 3 Select the tool The Message Line reads Lock Spline Control Point Pick control point 4 Click the vertices you want to lock The Lock Spline Control Point tool is used to lock or immobilize selected control points on an existing spline You may Drawing Tools Description and Use then adjust the curvature of the spline between the locked points without dis turbing other areas of the spline ri Locked Control Points Selected Point z Drag 4 way pointer to adjust area between locked points Unlocking Spline Control Points Use this tool and click the pointer to unlock it Locking More than One Spline Control Point You can lock more than one point by simply clicking each point Editing Control Points of a Spline 1 2 6 J Select the spline with the Selection tool Choose Layout gt Show Points If the menu says Hide Points you don t need to choose it Click on the drawing area to deselect the spline If necessary select the Lock Spline Control Points tool from the
201. e all the construction lines that you ve created by choosing Layout gt Delete Constructions Delete Constructions This command in the Layout menu deletes all construction lines and any geometry on the construction layer The Drafting Assistant s dynamic construction lines appear only temporarily and are not affected by this command Any geometry on the construction layer regardless of the pen style used is deleted by this com mand You can retrieve deleted construction geometry within the eight 8 level limit of the Undo command Basic Environment Settings This chapter describes the options you have for adapting Graphite to your needs The following topics are covered Pen Styles Pen Characteristics including the color palette Setting Units The Grid Drawing at Full Scale The Drafting Process OS Settings Saving Preferences Saving Palettes Pen Styles The pen style determines the appearance of lines on the screen and during plotting If you are using a monochrome monitor or printer all lines will be black but the weight and pattern will be visible Any line thickness of less than 016 inch appears one pixel wide on the screen When you print or plot such lines you can see the different weights 5 1 Basic Environment Settings 5 2 The default pen style is Outline solid black lines 01 inch wide You can change to a different pen style or change an individual characteristic of the current pen You c
202. e desired axis 6 9 Advanced Environment Settings If your geometry is displayed in the trimetric view and you want to rotate it around the screen s z axis G place the cursor on the Trackball hold down the V CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macin tosh and drag the cursor in a circular motion Your geometry rotates around the screen s z axis ShowlHide Triad This command toggles the display of the Triad symbol in the upper left corner of the view windows The Triad illustrates the orientation of the x y z axis and the work plane This symbol also temporarily displays at the origin and rotates as you rotate the view orientation manually with the Trackball Top Isometric a Front Right LL If you have not created a detail view the Triad symbol displays in the upper left corner of the sheet Once a view window is created the sheet camera cannot be rotated any more it remains stationary at the world orientation For more informa tion on detail views and sheet views see Chapter 13 6 10 3D Viewing The Triad represents the principle of the right hand rule a memory aid for the rela Y tive directions of the positive axes With your right palm upturned the thumb x points right the index finger y points straight ahead and the middle finger z points up If you move your hand to indicate z the x and y axes you can easily see the X direction of the z axis Ta Views Co
203. e endpoint Straight lines and Bezier curves create such paths For example a circle contains the following components e 4 connected Bezier curves in Adobe Illustrator the path is structured by anchor points startpoint centerpoint and endpoint and segments If the circle is cre ated using one tool then the anchor points are connected e Path width user defined units or points 1pt 0 35 mm e Path Color user defined e Fill inside Startpoint Endpoint user defined e Fill Color user defined CADAM BMI Translator This translator is located in the Graphite Unsupported Folder The CADAM BMI Translator enables you to share data between Graphite and CADAM The translator converts this data using the BMI format into a neutral file format of CADAM All recognizable entities will be converted with their attributes For unrecognizable entities only the shapes will be converted CADBMI Control Parameter file BMI import 7 lt 4 Parameter The translator works according to the graphic below CADAM Vellum _ CADBMI _ gt a 4 module BMI Parameter Vellum drawing file BMICAD file file drawing file module Lo t BMI a Control export file For Windows Ve Bmi ini in the Graphite32 folder is the Control Parameter file This parameter file is used in the translation of the geometric entities in your drawing Importing and Exporting Tips for the Best Possible Translation In general it is recommended
204. e plotter s computer The type of plotter you choose when you are setting up the page determines the format of the plot file If you choose a PostScript printer the file format will be Encapsulated PostScript and the HPGL language is used when you select Hewlett Packard plotters The computer that finally plots the file must have an application compatible with the file format of your printer or plotter 15 36 Printing or Plotting a Drawing Plotter Fonts When you are using a plotter you should specify the Plotter font for the text and dimensions on your drawing You can also specify different text styles such as italic or bold in the Text menu and generate special characters and accents as described in Appendix B 15 37 Graphite Documents 15 38 Parametrics Graphite s integrated parametrics feature allows you to create geometry without regard to its actual measurements When you resolve geometry parametrically you specify values for the dimensions and Graphite redraws the geometry to your spec ifications One example of parts well suited to parametric definition are containers that vary in size according to the needs of the product line Another might be hydraulic pistons that vary in size because of the duty loads Still another might be valves that vary according to the diameter of the pipes to which they are attached This parametric feature is the basis for creating symbols that you would use in your drafting on a
205. e pointer location Displays the name of the current tool and step by step instructions for using the tool The Basics Drawing Area Status Line Scroll Bars Work Layer Indicator Title Bar Consists of multiple layers where you construct and annotate geometry Shows the coordinate location and other geometric parameters of the current construction Allow you to move around a drawing so you can see different sections of it through the Graphite window The scroll buttons allow you to move one line at a time Displays the name of the current layer and pro vides a menu for changing the work layer The Title Bar includes the name of the current document and the Control Menu Minimize and Maximize Restore buttons Windows or the Close and Zoom boxes Macintosh Windows Close Button Maximize Button Minimize Button Control Menu Button L Control Menu Button Minimize Button olx Allows you to close move and change the size of the window This button is available on all win dows and many dialog boxes Double clicking this button closes the window without displaying the menu If you want to choose a different option from the Control menu click the button once to display the menu and then make your choice Reduces the Graphite window to an icon near the lower left corner of the screen This action does not close or save the document it only shrinks the window to an icon so you ca
206. e selected object in addition to allowing you to make changes Edit Objects Command CTRL I Windows I Macintosh This command in the Edit menu allows you to edit selected objects by changing individual characteristics such as weight layer or pen style or other specifications Changes made through this dialog box can be reversed with the Undo and Redo commands 10 29 Editing Objects Editing Objects Tip 1 Select the object to be edited SEARONEES You can change a single char i acteristic faster by simply 2 Choose Edit gt Edit Objects selecting the object and The dialog box appears unlocked A changing the characteristic from the menu But if you are 3 Change the information in the data changing several characteris fields a eee Double click the data field and type a positions you should use the Edit Objects command new entry do not press ENTER Win dows or RETURN Macintosh Many data fields have pop up menus for selection Press the down arrow and then drag to the selection you want 4 Make any other changes you want Click Apply 6 Double click the Control button Win dows or single click the Close button Macintosh to close the Edit Objects dialog box You can use Undo and Redo to reverse changes made through this dialog box The specifications shown in this box depend on the type of object selected and a include at least the following You can use the Expand
207. ea 18 2 2 Entity Chamfer 10 3 Fillet 10 2 2 Point Center Ellipse tool 7 18 3 Corner Ellipse tool 7 20 3D Drawing tools 8 1 Extrude 8 4 Features tools 8 3 Geometry 8 1 Revolve 8 5 Tracer tool 8 3 Work plane 8 6 3D construction rules 8 2 3D geometry Arcs 8 3 Circles 8 3 Ellipses 8 3 Fillets 8 3 Lines 8 2 Rectangles 8 3 Splines 8 3 3D viewing 6 6 3 Entity Fillet tool 10 3 3 Point Center Ellipse tool 7 19 3 Point plane command 8 7 8 11 3 Point tools Arc 7 13 Circle 7 16 A Absolute value A 1 Active view 13 16 Add Spline Control Point tool 7 25 Addition A 1 Align axis x 2 5 y 2 5 z 2 5 Alignment Angles 4 6 Drafting Assistant 2 5 GD amp T 20 2 Text 11 8 Anchors parametrics 16 8 Angles Alignment 4 6 Construction 4 10 4 12 Creation 4 7 Angular Chamfer tool 10 4 Angular dimension command 12 25 Angular dimension settings 12 25 Angular Dimension tool 12 18 Angularity GD amp T 20 5 ANSI Font 11 6 GD amp T 20 1 20 11 Arc Length Dimension tool 12 19 Arc tools 7 12 3D 8 3 3 Point 7 13 Center Point Arc 7 13 Tangent objects 7 14 Tangent Point 7 14 Arctangent A 1 Index Area 18 3 19 5 Arrange menu 3 10 Arrow pointer 3 2 Arrowhead Arrow at end 11 19 Arrow at start 11 19 Dimension 12 31 Arrowhead appearance Pen 11 19 Size 11 19 Type 11 19 ASCII 15 8 15 10 Ashlar web page 1 5 Associative Detail view 13 15 14 14 Dimensions 12 2 Asterisks 3 15 Attribute operation Assigning 19 5 19
208. ea 3 4 3 9 Menu Bar 3 3 3 10 Message Line 3 3 3 8 Pointer 3 3 Pointer Locator 3 3 Scroll Bars 3 4 3 9 Status Line 3 4 3 8 Title Bar 3 3 3 4 Tool palette 3 3 3 5 Work Layer Indicator 3 4 3 10 graphite ini 5 27 Grid 5 22 Command 5 23 Drawing area 3 9 Show 3 9 5 23 Grid setting Origin 5 23 Preferences 5 29 Spacing 5 23 Subdivision 5 23 Group Command 9 2 10 32 Parametrics 16 25 H Hatch 11 17 Hidden pen style 5 2 5 18 Hide Attributes 19 5 BOM palette 19 6 Layer 13 7 Hide points 9 10 Hit radius 4 6 Horizontal Dimension tools Base Line 12 7 Chain 12 8 Horizontal 12 6 Ordinate 12 8 Hot spot 3 7 HPGL 15 36 HSL picker 5 7 HSV picker 5 7 Hue 5 6 ifelse A 2 IGES 15 15 Export 15 15 Index Export effects 15 17 Import 15 9 Import Command 15 8 Formats 15 31 Symbol 17 5 Text 11 2 Import type ASCII 15 8 15 10 Bitmap 15 9 BMI 15 9 15 20 DWG 15 9 15 15 C 2 DXF 15 9 15 15 EPS 15 9 IGES 15 9 MetaFiles 15 9 Pict 15 9 Spline 15 9 15 10 Text 15 8 15 10 Inches 5 21 A 3 Indenting text 11 9 Inertia 18 4 Inscribed Polygon tool 7 22 Installation 1 5 Intersect Drafting Assistant 4 3 Invert preference 5 29 ISO crosshatching 11 13 11 16 Isometric view 14 19 Item number Balloon 19 10 Text 19 10 Tool 19 9 Item number operation Assigning 19 9 Delete 19 10 Editing 19 10 Object copies 19 11 Renumber 19 11 K Keyboard Versus mouse 3 11 L Layer 4 10 13 4 Color 13 5 Command 13 6
209. ea and click to indicate the center for the array of copies The values for Center X and Center Y appear in the data fields 6 Specify Upright or Rotated objects by clicking a button See the next section for the definition of these terms 7 If you specified Upright click a location for the reference point in the drawing area 8 If you do not want the copies in a complete circle click the Total or Step Angle option 9 Enter a value for the specified angle type 10 Click OK If you want to place a selected object three times in a semi circle you have to enter 3 for the Number and 90 for the Step Angle Offset Command This command in the Edit menu allows you to create offsets from lines arcs circles ellipses and splines Duplicating Objects Original Spline Offset Spline When you select this command the Offset dialog box appears Offset Distance 332 Ref point to define offset direction Ref X 4 15 Y 3504 ZO Options Cancel OK The dialog box contains the following settings Offset Distance The offset distance is the distance away from the original geometry that the new geometry is cre ated The asterisk indicates that you may use the cursor to input an offset distance by dragging between any two points on the drawing area The cursor must be in the Offset Distance field while dragging For multiple offsets additional values may be entered manual
210. ecify the values for the variables automatically 5 Select the text filename The variables and values are read from the file Using Parametrics Tech Note If you use a spreadsheet like Microsoft Excel for creating the text file you have to type in each cell the variable name and the value separated by a white space and export it as a text file Tech Note If your text file contains more variables and values than you need to resolve the geometry Graphite automatically imports only the needed vari ables and values 16 7 Parametrics 16 8 6 7 Specify an anchor point if you want one Click OK The geometry resolves accordingly Anchoring the Geometry You can anchor the geometry by clicking the anchor point when the Resolve dialog box appears For example in a tutorial exercise in the Getting Started section of the manual you used parametrics to l create the side view If you were using this side view as parametric geometry you would want to anchor the upper right corner so that it remains aligned with the front view after resolution Changing the Dimensions to Actual Measurements Once you resolve parametric geometry the dimension notations continue to show variables and constants If you want the geometry to reflect the actual measure ments you have to edit the dimensions Follow these steps to change a resolved para
211. ect and the center of the last copy The number of degrees between the center of the selected object and the center of the first copy Copies are rotated relative to the angle between the copies Each single arbitrary point of all copies have the same distance to the center of the circular array That means that any point of the object can be the reference point Copies are upright with respect to the selected object This option requires a reference point 10 25 Editing Objects 10 26 Ref X Ref Y The reference point for the Upright Objects option Ref X and Ref Y determine an imaginary point duplicated around the center as specified The selected objects are reproduced in the same posi tion relative to each imaginary point that is dupli cated With the option Rotated Objects the reference point has a constant distance to the cen ter of the circular array You can specify the Ref X and Ref Y by entering a value or by clicking the mouse in the drawing area Using Polar Duplicate T Select the object to be duplicated 2 Choose Edit gt Polar Duplicate A dialog box appears An asterisk appearing beside an entry field indicates that you can fill in the data field by dragging the mouse in the drawing area to indicate the length This is a very handy and accurate way to specify this information Enter the Number of objects in the circular array Click the Center X data field 5 Move the pointer to the drawing ar
212. ected 4 Click a location on the positive x axis The Up data field is selected Click a location on the positive y axis 6 Click OK The definition box goes away and the new plane is defined The new work plane is named Plane 1 by default If this plane is not renamed the next plane created will be named Plane 2 Select Plane 1 the new plane just created 8 Click Set Work The current plane changes to the new specification 9 Rename this work plane if you want 10 Dismiss the dialog box if you have no other need to define work planes Be aware that simply changing the work plane does not mean that work you do will be on the visible face The view orientation must be adjusted accordingly Renaming a Plane 1 2 Choose 3D gt Define Plane If necessary click the lock icon to unlock the plane then click the plane to be renamed in the list box Type a new name Click Rename The plane is renamed If the renamed plane was a temporary plane it becomes permanent The name is added to the Planes submenu and the list in the Define Plane dialog box The World plane cannot be renamed Deleting a Plane I 2 Choose 3D gt Define Plane If necessary click the lock icon to unlock the plane and then click the plane to be deleted from the plane list Click Delete You cannot delete a plane if it is set as the current work plane First make another plane the current work plane and then it can be deleted I
213. ects to fillet the objects are not trimmed See the Message Line There are no Status Line entries 2 Entity Chamfer Tool This tool in the ninth subpalette of the main tool palette creates a chamfer across a corner at the specified distance from the intersection of two lines Using the 2 Entity Chamfer Tool 1 Click the 2 Entity Chamfer tool The Message Line reads 2 Entity Chamfer Pick first entity chamfer Shift Corner Ctrl No trim Windows or Option No trim Macintosh 2 In the Status Line enter the distance you want the chamfer from the corner The default distance is 25 inch 3 Click each line making up the corner you want chamfered as directed by the Message Line You can also hold down the SHIFT key and click once inside the corner you want to chamfer See the Message Line 10 3 Editing Objects 10 4 The lines are automatically trimmed or extended If you hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects to chamfer the objects are not trimmed See the Message Line The Status Line allows you to specify the distance Length from the chamfer to the intersection of the corner lines lx E41 Y E67 z9 dx L06 dy 1 06 Zi ms p Angular Chamfer This tool in the ninth subpalette of the main tool palette creates a chamfer at the specified angle and distance from the corner The specified angle is that between the chamfer and the second line of the c
214. ed Fawees Maa CHa by A aad On 19 1 Attributes and ONE wevsescecaserseseoreremendusndsehewassev EE 19 2 Assigning AtIDULES ciiiiidasaseecess duces sccunndenuausdysansesantadaensaaetusaceseadderdutdiahbereancdead 19 5 Editing Atti DUteS a csuw see destaseltercdsectdbestetiny ascenansandeneunslelaeitdsh ddadmin mecaaian 19 8 Tema NUM De rs riensi Aa A ET E TET neck toes 19 9 Bill Of Materials cessccssetics vepcedeas seceyes sents ionieni aE van deena een Sones veyed HINGE AERA FONTS 19 11 GDSCD sisdssscetcsccescdssscesececcescessctessseesssctesssscasstecSosesde cbesedecscsctesiecesessccessscccsdsdecase 20 1 PAC OTOUIG sonor re aE EN E E EE E E depseteeeat 20 1 Aligament Information speiniini oa E E ERE TAT 20 2 Bonus Tolerate mririinr an nn EEEE TE EEE 20 2 Basic DIMEnSIONN suer aiaia un niian aeaa A ORENA EENES A 20 3 GD amp T Feature Control Frame sicasencissssad enaisendonddecessscisinwtdonondiaealeannssenauasaetenas 20 4 Geometrie Characteristics nienicsni reissen E ENEN 20 4 The GD amp T Label scsvitccsscuetisviecana nor aor aioe OR an 20 11 Appendices Appendix A Operators and Units cc cescccceesccccescccccescccccssccccsssccceeseeee A 1 Appendix B Special Characters ccccccssscccessscccessccccsscecccsscccessssccesseees B 1 Appendix C DWG Note siscccnescscccecicccsescccisssosbsseriecevsscocssssecssecvesecssesessesoesssooe C 1 Appendix D Program Settings amp Files 6 6 ccisssccseisecccssvecssesssosese cv
215. ed point Selected point 5 A line without points displayed A line with points displayed If you select and drag a line the line and the endpoints move If you select and drag only an endpoint of the line the endpoint moves and the line length changes while the other endpoint of the line remains fixed Displaying Points 1 Select the geometry 9 9 Selecting Objects 9 10 2 Choose Layout gt Show Hide Points to toggle the display of points on and off To turn off the point display once the points of an object are showing you must select the object again and choose either Layout gt Hide Points or the Control Points option in the Edit Objects dialog box Showing and Hiding Points with Stroke When you hold down the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the Command 3 key Macintosh and click an object the display of the object s points toggles on or off If the points are hidden when you click the object the points will be displayed Selecting Points You can select a control point whether the points are visible or not however note that Selectable Points in the Edit menu must be on displaying the W symbol in the menu To select points if points are not visible 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Drag a selection fence around the location of the point The selected point displays as a square Unselected point Selected point To select points if they are visible 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Click the p
216. editor a word processor or a spreadsheet to create a text file Input X Y and Z values for your spline coordinates In the case of Graphite enter X and Y values The text file should be tab or space separated Each line ends with a return Line feeds after each return should have no effect The text file should conform to the following columnar format 1 1 0 2 2 0 You are allowed to specify decimal coordinates as well 1 33 1 1 0 Importing and Exporting 2 4 2 5 3 5678 Be sure that you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh after the last coordinate if not Graphite will not import the coordinates specified in the last line 3 Save the file as Text only and import into Graphite to create the spline How Importing Affects Some Objects It is difficult to exchange data between different graphics programs because each program defines geometric objects differently All entities created in one program may not translate accurately or at all depending on what the program supports The following lists are specifics about entities for two translators DXF DWG Graphite Blocks Convert into groups Center Mark Convert into lines Crosshatch Convert to grouped lines Donuts Convert to grouped Three Point arcs Double lines Convert to lines Points Convert into Points Polygons Convert into grouped lines Polylines Polylines and 3D polylines convert into lines 3D Face Converts into lines that define the polygonal bound
217. eeeneeeneeenes 7 19 Using the 3 Cormner Ellipse tO0 c icsanescnntessnnessacsasned sensivenneds sands e a 7 20 Using the Opposite Corner Ellipse tool ssrisrsiesanerniscea a 7 19 Fills Creating a SOU Fill cnrs i nei a 11 19 Changing the color of an existing Solid Fill nccc 11 19 Group Changing the members of a group without adding a hierarchical level 10 32 WB SLOU P COMMA d eatorra e dese E e 10 33 Layers Changing the Work Layer with the Work Layer Indicator box 13 8 Creating a new LAV STs dssetacsun causa sted sotavsisides aidaa aia anala aaa 13 7 Creating a Layer GOUD wesna onse a a o A ia 13 12 Deleting a layers cenione nn N EEEN E 13 7 Deleting a Layer Group shicaxiiiccei nE EEE E E ETERA E 13 12 Di pl yi g a hidden layer iscissi geisiais ee in 13 8 Determining how many objects are on a layet ccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeenneeeees 13 8 Fi in Oa Lay Oi sa isuri pieced santa eCard onaes Wawa sna geeae ceca paaadid Gholaduant Ue aaa acetate nedaenaeaT 13 7 Makirio a layer the work layer sretienaonekan na me ar e AA nanii 13 8 Moving Objects to a another layer cc eeecceceereeeeeneteeeecseeeeentereeseneteeeenees 10 14 Renaming a LAV ED nenuorat orti A ENN OEN EN ERE 13 7 RENAMING Layer Gro Pre yrei eita gts ANERER E AEE OREN 13 12 Using smart walls with layers ccccceecceceseeceeesenneeeeseneeeesenneeeesenneeesseneeeeses 13 9 Lines Creating a line Dy CHORIN iocdccsistiecis enctceredtiosanenaes shauduebawelna
218. eet View or Detail View of the model but not the geometry Gnodel itself Note The current sheet cannot be deleted Making a Sheet the Current Sheet 1 Select the name from the list 2 Click Current Models Models are composed of the geometry you are creating Even if it looks like the geometry is created directly on the sheet it is not What you see on the sheet is only an image of that model The model itself is created in an infinite three dimen sional area we call Model space Projected Model Image The image you see on the sheet is the projected Sheet View of the model picked up by the Sheet Cam era which is aligned parallel to the sheet and looking from a top view at the model When you use the Zoom commands in the Arrange menu or the Zoom tools from the tool palette you change the view scale of the model by zooming the Sheet camera like you would with a video camera Multiple Models m Model a 1 Rectangle Image of the Rectangle Sheet camera is ridgidly fixed and parallel aligned to the sheet v Model 1 i H Sheet 1 Model 1 projected on the current Sheet There are two different ways to create models e with the Sheets command in the Views menu or e with the Model command in the Views menu When you create a new sheet Graphite automatically creates a new blank model where you can create geometry Creating a New Model with the Sheets Command This task assume
219. elease the mouse button The content of the dragged box is made visible on the screen Zoom In Tool Q This tool in the last subpalette of the main palette zooms in by the specified factor The default factor is two This is a visual rather than a physical change Zooming When you click in the drawing area that position redisplays in the center of the screen and the drawing enlarges by a factor of two You can also drag a box around an area so only that area magnifies The Status Line shows the current zoom scale If you enter a different scale that scale takes effect when you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Pressing the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while using this tool causes it to change to and behave like the Zoom Out tool Zoom Out Tool This tool in the last subpalette of the main palette zooms out by the specified fac Tip tor The default factor is one half This is a visual rather than a physical change Using the CTRL Windows stad Poa or the OPTION Macintosh When you click in the drawing area that position display in the center of the screen key you can toggle between and the drawing reduces in size by a factor of one half the Zoom In and the Zoom Out tool The Status Line shows the current zoom scale If you enter a different scale that scale takes effect when you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Pressing the CTRL Windows or the OPT
220. en you can edit the dimension of the symbol Smart Symbols The Architect folder of the Symbols folder contains smart symbols for doors and windows Smart window and door symbols are smart because they contain a smart wall segment When you add one of these symbols to a smart wall it breaks into the wall in the location you specify You should draw smart walls with the Construction pen style when creating your own smart symbol Geometry created with the Construction pen does not appear when it is brought into a drawing The invisible geometry is still functional in that existing smart walls in the drawing detect the invisible wall of the symbol You must draw a thick wall in line with or overlapping a thinner wall so it hides the thinner wall Therefore to get a symbol to mask part of a wall you should include a single wall that overlays the target wall If you want to see an example open one of the smart symbols in the Architect folder that was installed with Graph ite Creating a Smart Symbol 1 Choose Pen gt Style gt Construction 2 Draw a smart wall thicker than the maximum thickness you expect to use and only as long as the final symbol will be Change pen styles to any style other than Construction 4 Draw the symbol 5 Choose File gt Save As and save as you would any other symbol 17 5 Symbols 17 6 Using Symbols for Smart Windows and Doors The Symbols Architect folder that was installed with Graphite contai
221. encecsassevecddvescasvecesenssesssees D 1 Glossary GIOSSALY E ccosossscseatissesiscsestassssssseteasesceessdeessessccecscatbeveasstedteceetscossersssten G 1 Indices User Guide Documentation This User Guide is written for both Windows 98 NT 2000 and Power Macintosh platforms of Graphite Before using this manual however you will need to install Graphite Instructions are contained in the Getting Started section of this manual that came with the software After installation we encourage you to continue on with the tutorial exercises included in the Getting Started section of this manual This will familiarize you with the tools features and commands of Graphite and enable you to maximize your productivity in the shortest amount of time Chapter Layout The chapters are arranged in the order of the design process starting with the basics It then provides explanations of each tool editing procedures adding details and printing Each chapter contains subheadings indicating the different sec tions and within those are further subdivisions as needed Windows and Power Mac Notations Throughout the manual notations are included to perform tasks using either plat form Steps are identical except for specific keyboard commands In cases where the steps vary each are listed Menus and Submenus Choosing Commands As you proceed through the exercises you will be directed to choose commands contained in submenus of other menus like t
222. end to send to a plotter since plotting Postscript or TrueType fonts take much more time to plot or may be substituted The font you choose stays in effect for the cur rent document until you choose another font Note The font used for dimensions are the same set of fonts However they are set in the Dimension menu Special characters and accents are available as described in Appendix B Extended Font Selection Windows The Font submenu can display up to 20 fonts If you have installed more than 20 Fach Note fonts select More in the Font submenu of the Text menu for more available fonts Macintosh users All fonts Choosing More brings up a dialog box that allows you to specify the font text size available in your system are and text style The text size is measured as point size If you want to specify Se cae ale He selection process Adding Details the size in the units you have set for your drawing you have to type the exact unit such as for inch or mm for millimeter after the value 1 Choose Text gt Font gt More The Character Format dialog box displays Character Format Font v Size T Bod tatic Canc aw 2 Select the character format The text size is always measured as a point size pt If you want to specify the size in another unit like in millimeters include mm with your numeric entry 3 Click Apply You can leave this dialog box open to assign other character formats If you want
223. erences Text Alignment The four commands in the second section of the Text menu align your text within the text box The text can be aligned on the left the right centered in the mid dle or it can be fully justified so that it is aligned with both left and right margins of the text box If the Text tool is active both the selected text and future text are aligned as speci fied but existing text is not aligned If you choose this command when a tool other than the Text tool is active only future text entries are aligned If a text entry is selected when you choose this command the selection and future text entries are aligned as specified Align Left Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can This command in the Text menu i i aligns the selected and future text at fro align text with the left or the i the left margin of the text area right margins with both margins or centered between Align Middle S MAON e a Text alignment is controlled from the Text menu You can align text with the left or the This command in the Text menu cen i i the text area right margins with both ters the selected and future text in margins or centered between Align Right a tho margins This command in the Text menu aligns the selected and future text at the right margin of the text area Justified This command in the Text menu aligns both the left and right margins of the selected and future
224. eristics need to be tracked The next step is to assign these character istics to an existing catalog of parts typically Graphite symbol files These parts can You can decide to use the BOM package on new projects only and assign attributes to the parts on an as needed basis for new then be used to create an assembly or installation drawing These attributes can designs then be extracted into a Bill of Materials table or exported for use in other applica tions The Bill of Material distinguishes between two kinds of attributes User defined Attributes You define and assign attributes to object geometry after you have created the geometry 19 2 Predefined Attributes These are numerical attributes like the perimeter or area of a circle which are automatically defined by creating the geometry Non numerical attributes like line color and line style are not recognized by the Bill of Materials Attributes and Objects Each object you create in Graphite automatically has different kinds of attributes numerical attributes like the perimeter and the area of a circle and non numerical attributes like the line color and the line style With the Bill of Materials Extraction utility you can now assign User defined Attributes to objects like a Part Name or Part Number Defining Attributes Before you can assign attributes to objects you Text Dimension Yiews 3D Utilities Help have to define them first For defining attributes
225. ers are then displayed in a pull down menu from which aliens you can select a different layer to be the current work layer Layer Drag to the layer and release the mouse button The selected layer becomes the work layer and all geometry you create will be placed onto that layer Menu Bar The Graphite menus contain related commands and settings File Commands that affect entire documents files Edit Commands to select and manipulate objects Layout Commands and settings that specify the drawing area and provide program features and functional ity such as construction lines and 2D analysis Arrange Commands for zooming to change the area dis played in the window and setting specifications for objects Pen Text Dimension Views Utilities Displaying a Graphite Menu 1 Point to the menu name 2 Click on the name The menu appears If you want to dismiss the menu without making a choice click outside the menu Choosing a Command from a Menu 1 Point to the menu name 2 Click on the name The menu appears 3 Click on the command The command executes or the setting such as Select able Points toggles on or off Mouse versus Keyboard Menu Bar Commands to specify pen characteristics style color weight and pattern crosshatching fill and arrows Commands to set the font size style alignment and indentation of text and also to create text blocks and forms title blocks Commands
226. es Layout Options For all BOM layouts you define you can set x some preferences globally I Ballooned Only Export Headline Headline Color M Show Item Number Header Item Number Header Son By M User Widths Edit Widths Table Margin po CS Y Cancel Apply When you select the Text gt Bill of Materi als gt Options this dialog box displays Ballooned Only When checked this option places only BOM items in the table that have an associated BOM Balloon in the file Export Headline Draws the header line in the table when checked Show Item Number Header Marking this option creates an Item column as the first column Item Number Header In this entry field you name the Item column Bill of Materials 19 17 Bill of Materials 19 18 Table Margin Headline Color Sort by User Widths Draw Table User Widths In this field you can enter a value for the margin between the text and the vertical column guides In this pop up menu you choose a color for the title text l Headline Color Blue Black Red Yellow Green Cyan Blue Magenta More To choose a color you click into the pop up menu and drag to the desired color As soon you release the mouse button the selected color displays in the pop up menu In this pop up menu you select the attribute by which the Bill of Materials should be sorted Click into the pop up menu with the left mouse button pressed
227. es can be exported AutoCAD s native file format R14 and ACAD2000 files can be exported Initial Graphics Exchange Specification version 4 the National Bureau of Standards format to stan dardize the exchange of graphics The translator also includes the support of IGES entity 128 and 144 NURB surfaces and exporting an unlimited number of entities ASCII characters This option is available only if the Text tool is the active tool 15 15 Graphite Documents 15 16 META Bitmaps Pict EPS Windows only The format used by the Windows clipboard is an interchange format specifically used for graphics commands A document saved in this manner contains only the routines to repro duce the drawing as it appears on the screen The filename WMF automatically appends to the file name Windows only Microsoft Windows Bitmap file format The filename extension BMP automatically appends to the filename Macintosh only Macintosh s Pict file format which uses object oriented bitmaps or resolution inde pendent graphics Encapsulated PostScript format for printing to a Postscript printer and for importing into compati ble applications If you specify Only Selected only the selected objects in your drawing are saved in the export format If you do not specify Only Selected all objects are saved for export How Exporting Affects Some Objects It is difficult to exchange data between different graphics programs
228. et camera Graphite 3D When you create view windows either detail views drafting layouts or design lay outs each view window looks at the same model When you make a change in any view window the model changes therefore the model in every view changes For more information on models see Chapter 14 Advanced Viewing Techniques The Drafting Assistant The Drafting Assistant The Drafting Assistant is unique to Graphite and makes Graphite easy to use because it thinks like a designer The Drafting Assistant guides a designer in the cre ation of geometry It displays temporary construction lines provides information about existing geometry and gives notations of the relationship between new and existing geometry in all three dimensions As you move the pointer near an existing geometric construction the Drafting Assistant s snap point locks onto individual geometry displaying an on notation The Drafting Assistant also displays information about geometric landmarks such as endpoints and centers and temporary automatic construction lines such as align ment and tangents The following examples illustrate the alignment notations for the x y and z axes align z The z direction is perpendicu lar to the work plane on align x The x direction is parallel to the work plane align y The y direction is parallel to the work plane For more information on the Drafting Assistant see Chapter 4 The Draf
229. etric mechanism would display this problem message Resolve Problem Geometry Overconstrained Cannot generate circle 2 defining lines parallel Cannot draw the Circle to be tangent to the line Problem Shown 1 of 1 Cancel Next Solution Use the Undo command to return to the original shape The Undo command is always available for any of the previous eight actions You could also solve this problem by changing the geometry Parametric Problems This section illustrates problems you may encounter when you resolve parametric geometry It provides examples and shows you what caused the problem and how to solve it When you resolve parametric geometry Resolve Probl problems which prevent resolution solvo Problem Geometry Overconstrained appear in a message box stating the Cannot generate circle 2 defining lines parallel type and number of instances of the Cannot draw the Circle to be tangent to the line Problem Shown 1 of 1 problems When a message appears the problem atic geometry appears as thick lines and individual dots The lines indicate the geometry that the parametric mecha nism can draw Dots indicate unknown points When you click Next the next problem is shown Examination of the Resolve Problem Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem Shown 1 of 2 relationships between the problems can help you discern what must be done Important Pay attent
230. ew work plane ee ecceseeceeeeeeteeeestneeeesetteeeesentereesenteeeeeas 8 12 Points CLEA LI Ss A POM irsinin ceed ba natn EENE E E gluleadtudadnnt cnaudhinncias 7 9 Creating geometry offset from a point 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeentteeeeentteeeenteeeeees 7 6 Displaying DOMMES ior inna EE vcs shea ee ose aeis ches ceases tas E tena deta eaoneads 9 9 REMOve Dots COMMANG meirar sands ances EEEE O 10 22 Showing and Hiding Points with Stroke cc ceeeteeeneeeeeentteeeeeneeteeenes 9 10 Selecting POMS sisiisciesvedacacaawurcemaranentoes dloes caiaanbodatalewuneeahnads ELE KELAA NEA 9 12 Polygons Using the Circumscribed Polygon tool ccecccceeetseeeeeeteeeeetteeesenereeesnneeeees 7 23 Using the Inscribed Polygon tool ecccceeeteeeeeneeeesenteeeesenteeeesenteeerseneeeess 7 22 Using the Rectangle tool miseriaren inis aei piae Tonnen E n EA EEEE AAS TERO 7 21 Preferences Changing the default SEtiNS Sijenski esir E EEE 3 17 5 30 SAVANE PLELELSIICCS oeii E EE REE e E EE AAE E 5 28 Printing and Plotting Drafting without a drawing format ssrssriesiii eii srne a a Ra ia 5 25 Drafting with a drawing format susmissnrimisiidisistaiari inris de Ada aAa oai 5 26 TI 6 Placing a drawing format iix siaccsssecdiadessagucs a E E EE E T 15 27 Setting the printer or plotter and paper specifications 0 0 0 15 41 Setting up the drawing Size ses siarsinsies e nnininsrinns i iaon nnan aea nii iTA 15 33 Setting up the page snesena reni NETE E R EEEE 15
231. ews available only for the 3D ver sion Vellum 2 7 Graphite Overview 2 8 Flatten any view that contains geometry you want to edit independently For more information on flattening a view see Chapter 14 Advanced Viewing Tech niques Crosshatch dimension annotate and perform any view editing you need Fine tune the model if necessary Specify the paper size from the Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh command in the File menu Set the scale for the drawing format to fit on the plotter paper If you don t care about the exact scale you can click Fit in the Drawing Size dialog box and the geometry and format will be scaled appropriately for the paper size you have specified Plot the finished drawing For more information on plotting printing and related activities see Chapter 15 Graphite Documents The Basics This chapter describes the basic components of Graphite This brief overview of useful features may be all you need to know if you are familiar with CAD software The following topics are covered e Using a Mouse e Parts of the Graphite Window e Menu Bar including the dialog boxes e Preferences For more information about standard elements such as menus scroll bars File menu commands and dialog boxes refer to the Windows or Macintosh User s Guide that came with your compute
232. ext size Text Size lt Arrowheads Types ban The size of dimension arrow heads is set using the Arrow lines Size command from the Dimensions menu The Arrowheads submenu allows you to choose one of eight arrowheads for arrow Arrow at Start Command This command in the Pen menu places an arrowhead at the beginning of selected and subsequent lines and circular arcs You can choose the type of arrowhead from the Pen menu A check W indicates the current arrowhead setting You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file Tip Arrow at End Command You can also add or remove arrows to or from lines and This command in the Pen menu places an arrowhead at the end of selected and arcs in Edit Objects subsequent lines and circular arcs You can choose the type of arrowhead from the 11 19 Adding Details Pen menu A check W indicates the current arrowhead setting You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file No Arrow At Start _ No Arrow At End Arrow At Start lt _ No Arrow At End No Arrow At Start gt Arrow At End Arrow At Start lt lt gt Arrow At End The start and end of a line and an arc is determined by the point that was created first 11 20 Dimensions This chapter explains how to use the dimension tools in Graphite The topics are e Dimension Menu e Associative Dimensions e Using the Dimensi
233. f text to be changed Select the new characteristic from the Text menu The selection shows the new characteristic Changing the Size of the Text Box T 2 Click the Selection tool Drag a selection fence around the right side of the text box The dotted lines shown below do not appear on your screen Note For single lines of text if you are unable to select the control points on the right side of the text box it may be that your original text box extends further than the edge of the text With the Selection tool first select the text by clicking on it When the text box appears drag a selection fence around the right side The control points mark the boundaries of the text box when you first created it Drag the control points to the right as shown below or to the left if you want to make the text box smaller Text Tip If you want to change charac teristics for the entire text entry use the Selection tool to select the text block Tip If you want to change the characteristics of a word or portion of a text block use the Text tool to select what you want to change Adding Details The area changes size and the text rewraps automatically i The right and left margins The right and left margins of the text are Of the text are controlled by controlled by the size of the text box i the size of the text box S epee beee A okt ty anemia ear aCe You can drag a control You can drag a co
234. f you want to delete a standard plane Front Right or Top you must unlock it You can never delete the World plane If you do choose to delete a standard plane do not choose Save Preferences Otherwise you will have to recreate the plane if you want it for future files Redefining a Plane You can use Define Plane to change the origin or orientation of the axes of any plane except the World plane I Choose 3D gt Define Plane Work Plane 8 13 3D Drawing Tools 8 14 2 Click the lock icon for the plane you want to change Click the name of the plane you want to change Click Redefine The Redefine Plane dialog box displays the settings as they appear on the screen with the origin selected 5 On the drawing area click the location for the new origin The Right data field becomes selected 6 Click a location on the positive x axis The Up data field becomes selected Click a location for the positive y axis Click OK The plane is redefined You cannot redefine the standard work planes Front Right and Top without unlocking them You can never redefine the World plane which was established from the original orientation of the model Set Plane to Screen This command in the 3D menu sets the work plane to be coincident with the screen where the origin is in the center of the screen the x axis is coincident with the width of the screen and the y axis is coincident with the height of the screen Th
235. fer ence line need not be parallel to the object Hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key before specifying the reference line to create a mirrored copy The Status Line has no entries Note When working in 3D you can mirror selected geometry through the axis you specify and parallel to the work plane Additional Transformation Tool The Stretch tool is not a part of the Transformation tool palette but is transforma tional in nature It can be added into your program using the Add Function com mand and is accessed through the customized tool palette which appears when you choose Utilities gt Show Palette See Chapter 6 for more information Stretch Tool This tool allows you to scale objects along one axis and a specified angle Using the Stretch Tool 1 Select the object 2 Choose Utilities gt Show Palette 3 Select the Stretch tool The Message Line reads Stretch Vector defined Click point to remain fixed 4 Click on one point of the selected rectangle 5 Enter the desired Scale factor and Angle in the Status Line 6 Press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key 10 11 Editing Objects 10 12 The rectangle is scaled at the specified factor and along the specified angle You can also click the reference points as directed in the Message Line to set the scale and the stretch angle The Status Line allows you to enter the exact scale and angle for the stretch 1 Angle 0
236. fer angle and length e Resolve values e User defined colors Changing the Default Settings 1 Create a file which has the preferences you want 2 Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences The preferences are set for subsequent new documents after restarting Graphite Be careful choosing Save Preferences when working in a file with multiple sheets models details views or layers Even though your geometry will not be saved all other data will be All new files opened subsequently will contain items that may not be desired Ona regular basis check the Preferences file for the items men tioned The original default setting for the file includes one sheet one model three layers Construction Dimension and Layer 1 and no detail views Save Palettes In the Preferences submenu you find the Save Palettes command When you select this command the Status visible hidden and the Location of all palettes are saved to preferences When you restart Graphite all palettes that were displayed when you closed Graphite are automatically reopened Location and Status for the following palettes are saved with this command Save Palettes e Dimension palette e Symbol palette e Function palette Neither the Floating tool palette nor the Trackball save with this command For Windows the Location and Status of these palettes are saved in the Grapbite ini file under the section Palettes 5 31 Basic Environment Settings Adva
237. file format which uses object oriented bitmaps or resolution independent graphics To select a location or object by clicking it Surfaces or points that lie in one two dimensional plane To draw a part on paper using a plotter A computerized drawing device for hardcopy out put A location for constructing geometry The position locator similar to a cursor When a tool is in effect the pointer takes on a representa tive shape while in the drawing area To copy a selection and rotate it around a refer ence point The tool that draws regular polygons that is objects with equal sides You can specify rectan gles and inscribed or circumscribed polygons To press and hold down the mouse button This action is most commonly used to view the contents of a menu Glossary Radius Redo Redraw Relative Position Relimit Reload Remove Dots Resolve Right hand rule Right hand rule Segment Tool Selection Tool Half the distance across an arc starting from the center The command that reverses the action of the Undo command You can undo and redo the last eight creating and editing actions To refresh the screen recreating all objects A location specified as a certain distance from another location It is often called the delta posi tion A trim tool that lengthens or shortens lines to the specified object This command is used to load commands and functions into Graphite This c
238. first entity to trim Shift Corner Ctrl No Trim Windows or Option No Trim Macintosh 2 Click each object as directed by the Message Line You can also press and hold the SHIFT key and click inside the about to be cre ated corner There are no Status Line entries Extending Lines to a Theoretical Intersection If you want to extend a line to its theoretical intersection with another line first click the line to be extended then hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and click the line that is not to be trimmed see the Message Line Transformation Tools He BS These tools on the tool palette move rotate expand or shrink and mirror objects Select the object you want to transform before you select a Transformation tool You can copy at the same time you transform objects by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while you specify the transformation When you press the SHIFT key you can select additional objects after you have selected a Transformation tool See the Message Line As soon as you release the SHIFT key the Transformation tool is active again Move Tool 5 This tool in the eleventh subpalette of the main tool palette moves the selected objects to a new location You can copy the selection by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects If you select Referral more than one object they remain in the same position re
239. g Assistant This command should be distinguished from the Snap command 4 5 The Drafting Assistant chosen through the Utilities menu that allows you to activate snap modes of the Drafting Assistant Hit Radius 12 pixels Alignment Angles 0 90 Additional Creation Angles 45 45 Point _Cancel OK _ Hit Radius This setting determines the detection distance in pixels When the pointer is within the specified Hit Radius the Drafting Assistant notations are dis played and the object is selected when you click the mouse The default Hit Radius is 12 pixels If you can t specify locations that are close together because the Drafting Assistant snaps to an existing control point you can do any of the following e Decrease the Hit Radius e Zoom in so more pixels separate the existing point and the point you want to select e Lock on a point by pressing the mouse button and then typing the letter that represents the point Gm for midpoint for example If you set the Hit Radius to zero you disable the single click selection of the Selection tool dragging a selection fence and double clicking to select all objects will still work Instead you might consider using the Selection Mask in the Edit menu to specify that some objects cannot be selected Alignment Angles These angles define the dynamic construction lines that the Drafting Assistant automatically uses If
240. g Formats to the Sheet Into View Dialog Box List You can create your own drawing formats and add them to the list in the Sheet into View dialog box 1 Start a new document 2 Select the Detail View tool and create a view window 3 Display the Models dialog box and create a new model 4 Click on the sheet and make Model 2 the current model in the Model dialog box 5 Click in the view window and make Model 1 the current model in the Models dialog box 6 Click on the sheet to activate Model 2 Tip i 7 Create the drawing format at a scale 1 1 or import one of Ashlar s formats and You can also open one of the P modify it layouts in the Layouts folder of Graphite and change it But 8 Save the drawing with a proper name in the Layouts folder of Graphite be sure that you save that lay out under a different name before you modify it The Filename is listed on the Layout menu See Chapter 15 Graphite Documents for more information on Formats and cus tomization Erroneous Sheet into View If you mistakenly invoked the Sheet Into View command and do not want your geometry in a view use Undo to recover If this is not done immediately you must use the following method to manually back out Recovering from an Erroneous Sheet Into View 1 Delete all view windows on the current sheet by choosing Delete from the View window menu of each view 2 Make Model 1 in the Model dialog box the current model for the Shee
241. g text dimensions crosshatching and fills on the cur rent sheet into a view window and displays it in the scale you have specified within the drawing format you have selected Model 2 automatically Ae created with Sheet Into View command K Detail view camera auto matically installed with Sheet Into View command Layout with drawing format and one view loaded with Sheet Into View command Placing Geometry into a View using Sheet Into View i 2 Draw the geometry Choose Views gt Sheet Into View Choose the layout you want from SS lll the Layout menu You can choose from a view with no Layout a Landscape 1 View vc6 z drawing format or a view in a Scale Enter the scaling value in the Cancel Scale box Factors greater than standard drawing format one enlarge the model in the view s and factors less than one reduce the model Click OK Choose Arrange gt Zoom All Views Tip Use the Sheet Into View com mand when you want to import a drawing format which is a different scale from your geometry Tip You can add your own for mats to this list as described Chapter 5 Graphite Docu ments or modify the layouts provided to meet your needs 14 17 Advanced Viewing Techniques The geometry scales and the views appear as specified If you specify a drawing format it imports into the view and scales appropriately for the drawing size you have specified Addin
242. geometry is no longer associated with the model If you make changes to the flattened geometry those changes do not affect the model If you make changes to the model the flattened geometry is not changed 1 Select a view window to make it the active view 2 Choose Views gt Flatten View A dialog box displays a warning message Since flattening disassociates the cur 14 24 3 Views rent view from the model you are given this opportunity to be certain you have selected the view you want to flatten and that you really want to flatten the selected view All dimensions in the view are deleted because the 3D dimensions would not be correct in 2D geometry Click OK The geometry is placed on the sheet at full scale Important The geometry will also be flattened at the scale that you are viewing in This scale is listed in the Control Menu of the Detail View Text and crosshatching are treated like geometry by this command Dimensions will no longer update if you make a change to the 3D model since the flattened geometry is disassociated but they will change if you alter the flat tened geometry Also if you dimension your geometry after it is flattened you will have to enter the desired values because Graphite will simply read the length of the projected flat lines If you want to keep the dimensions copy the view and flatten the copy or group the geometry with the dimensions then flat ten the view If you receive the fol
243. gth 2 Clicking the dash handle to the right of the dash activates the handle for the pat tern segment the handle is now filled The dash s current length appears in the Dash Length data field You have two ways to change the length of a dash e Enter a new value in the Dash Length data field and changes the length of the selected dash e Drag the handle As you drag the dash s length updates in the Dash Length data field Release the mouse button when the dash is the length you want To add a new dash click Add A solid and blank dash are added with a length of zero The solid dash handle is activated You can change the length of the new dashes by dragging their handles or by typing in a value in the Dash Length data field If you select a handle before clicking Add the new dashes are placed in front of the selected dash To remove a dash select its handle and click Remove The dash is removed from the pattern element Note Pattern elements start with solid dashes and then switch to blank dashes and then if necessary back to solid and so on Adding or removing dashes may change existing dashes from solid to blank or from blank to solid When the pattern element is properly defined click OK The new pattern is created and you are returned to the Define patterns dialog box Click Cancel to close the Edit Pattern dialog box without retaining the pattern set tings Select the Pattern Name field and enter a new name for your
244. h as 3 and press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macin tosh 6 Continue with your construction y gt X Offset CNE gt 2 Selected point Offset reference on O from which new geometry gt geometry will location appropriate be offset to selected tool The Message Line The Message Line is an important feature when drawing Upon selection of a draw ing tool the line displays what tool you have selected and the first step in its use As you follow each step the line displays the next one until the steps are com pleted The Message Line may also display additional commands that can be used with the tool See the example below Center Point Circle Pick center Ctrl Copy previous X N D S Ol Drawing Tools Description and Use This section describes the drawing tools found in the tool palette Line Tools m E pP E The Line tools in the Line tool palette create line segments connected lines lines parallel to existing lines and smart walls As you create a line the coordinate loca tions line length and angle from horizontal appear in the Status Line The line is also drawn with the current pen specifications for color weight and pattern 7 7 Drawing Tools 7 8 Single Line Tool NI This tool in the second subpalette of the main tool palette draws a line between two points You can click or drag to draw a line Using the Single Line Tool 1 Select the
245. he CONTROL Macintosh key pressed changes the view scale property of that view only With the Zoom or Stroke Zoom commands you change only the screen display scale of the sheet and all Detail Views projected on that sheet but not the size of the geometry itself Text Dimensions Crosshatching Fills and Detail Views Where it is important that changes made to geometry in one view be reflected in the other views the same is not true for text dimensions crosshatching and fills The views would become very cluttered and rendered useless if all notations made in each view appeared in the others For that reason Graphite designed these ele ments so that they would not be associative in line with standard drafting practice Sheet Into View Command This command places all the geometry on a sheet including dimensions text cross hatching and fills into one view window the front The view window created with the Sheet Into View command behaves like any view window created with the Detail View tool Although both view windows behave the same the Sheet Into View command includes three automatic steps which are not performed when you create a view window with the Detail View tool The Sheet Into View command e creates an additional Model blank or containing a standard drawing format if selected e moves the Sheet camera to that model blank or with the drawing format to dis play it on the current sheet puts all geometry includin
246. he height on the left H H H Ww 16 16 Parametric Problems 2 You can draw a constraint line to close the opening H w 3 You can dimension the height from the top of the left line to the bottom of the right line While this is not i good drafting practice it is very use w ful for parametric symbols Assumptions Involving Tangency The parametric mechanism can identify tangent points but not the tangency of geometry Problem we The endpoints of the lower line that is 2 D tangent to and ends at the circle can be a determined However the upper line is tangent to and extends beyond the circle D and cannot be defined without more information Solutions Here are three possible solutions to the problem 1 Draw a constraint line from the center wee of the circle to the point of tangency for the line that extends beyond the Constraint Line circle as shown here 16 17 Parametrics 16 18 2 Use the Rotate tool on the Transfor mation subpalette to move the end point of the circle to the tangent point of the line that extends beyond the circle 3 Divide the line into two segments which join at the tangent point Relationships Involving Symmetry If you create geometry with a mirrored copy the parametric mechanism cannot resolve and maintain the symmetry without more information Problem The problem message shows three unre lated groups the trapezoid on t
247. he left and the two rightmost corners as shown below ren US IRP He Ho Each of these points is considered an unrelated group H1 Resolve Problem H1 Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem Shown 1 of 3 W W Cancel Next H2 H2 A H1 If parametrics swings an arc of the radius H1 and H2 it doesn t know where the point is supposed oe to be on the arc The point has a distance but no H2 direction unless an angle dimension is added Complex Parametric Drafting Solution Single points that are considered a group H1 provide a clue to the solution In this ii na 5 example the parametric mechanism does not know where those points are relative to the original trapezoid You can solve Ww 3 the problem by adding a constraint line 4 and angle dimension between that line 4 and the mirror line H2 Constraint line Golesi angle Complex Parametric Drafting This section illustrates two complex examples of parametric drafting These exam ples combine the information provided in this chapter so you can see how to use the parametric mechanism Example Departures from Standard Drafting This example illustrates the parametric drafting practices that differ from standard drafting practices The first illus tration is the side view of an adapter without dimensions so you can see its shape clearly 16 19 Parametrics 16 20 Here is the side view with typical dimen sions added The illustration sh
248. he opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Perpendicular Dimension Tools VARS CRIN These tools measure an object or space perpendicular to another line If most of your dimensions start from a line edge you can use this tool to generate both hori zontal and vertical dimensions For 3D geometry perpendicular dimensions are created in the plane of the base line Perpendicular Dimension Tool N v 6 549 This tool dimensions an object or space perpendicular to a line Using the Perpendicular Dimension Tool 1 Select the Perpendicular Dimension tool The Message Line reads Perpendicular Pick first dimension point 2 Click the Click the base line Be certain that you click on the base line not on the endpoint of the base line The Message Line now reads Perpendicular Pick second dimension point 3 Click the object or location The dimension appears You can drag it to a new location Dimension and exten sion lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects 12 13 Dimensions 12 14 Perpendicular Base Line Dimension Tool N 9 01 This tool dimensions between a point or object we K TA perpendicular to an existing base line Using the Perpendicular Base Line Dimension Tool 1 Select the Perpendicular Base Line Dimension tool The Message Line reads Perpendicular Base Line Pick first dimension poi
249. he pull down menu For example you User Guide Documentation Tip Tips referrals to other chap ters and alternative ways to accomplish a task are dis played in the margin through out the manual might be asked to select Define in the Color submenu of the Pen menu That will be written as Pen gt Color gt Define Margin Notes Graphite includes margin notes that provide information that may help you use Graphite There are three types of margin notes Tips Tech Notes and Referrals These notes have been given a special treatment so that you can instantly recognize their significance and locate them for future reference Tip A tip provides instructions for getting the most out of Graphite Tips may show you how to speed up an operation or how to perform some timesaving drawing tech nique Tech Note A technical note is intended to provide additional technical information not neces sary for using Graphite but useful in understanding how it works Referral A referral directs you to related information contained somewhere else in the man ual for the particular topic being addressed Style Conventions This manual uses various style conventions which highlight certain terms or phrases The list below includes an explanation and an example in parentheses The conventions are as follows Bold Tool palette names Light palette Tool name Single Line tool Keyboard entered text Defini tion terms as shown in these sty
250. hown by the inches option below units Precision v Selected Option inches Omm O feet Ocm feet inches meters Option Buttons Check Boxes Leading 0s Trailing 0 s Cancel OK Check Boxes Check boxes as shown above provide options you can switch on and off and which are not mutually exclusive A check mark shows the options is set List Entry Boxes Some dialog boxes contain lists of options dis playing an arrow to provide access to the list Co lor If the entry includes an arrow you can display a Ae E menu which works like a submenu on the menu aaa bar but the item you specify appears in the box once you select it Some list boxes also allow you to type an entry For example you can type a value in the Scale data field in the Drawing Size dialog box or choose from the pop up menu See the graphic below Drawing Seale EZ To type an entry select the current entry if it isn t already selected then type a new entry In most cases clicking on the OK button saves the changes Preferences Asterisks When an item in the dialog box displays an asterisk you can specify a value by clicking or dragging in the drawing area This feature is particularly useful for specify ing location because you don t need to know any x y coordinates Construction Apply Buttons Some dialog boxes have an Apply button that Crosshatch all
251. i 4 4 a 1 394 1 390 4 xxx yyy limits Upper Lower 007 Dual Dimensioning You can also choose to display your dimensions a4 in both inches and millimeters dual dimension 36 331 ing Fractional Display or Decimal Display To change the current linear appearance of your dimensions you must first change the precision setting in the Units dialog box Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Units In the Units dialog box change the Precision to a decimal or fractional option by holding down the mouse button on the arrow to the right of the data field and scrolling to the desired precision That precision will now be displayed in the Status Line data fields Graphite will still calculate out to sixteen decimal places However the Status Line will display the nearest fraction or decimal to the calculated value based on the pre cision selected Linear Tolerance This command in the Dimension menu allows you to set the precision of a linear dimension s tolerance values Angular This command in the Dimension menu allows you to set the format for Angular dimensions You can set degrees minutes and seconds as well as the tolerance and limits for these dimensions Show Palette Standards GD amp T nea Angular 4 Angular Tol x 8 7 x 16 Text x 32 Font x 64 Size Style No Decimals Color Weight gt Layer Arrowheads Arrow Size Witness Lines
252. ibute Selection tool The Message Line reads User Attribute Tool Select Geometry Return Append Attribute Ctrl Return Remove Attribute Windows or Option Return Remove Attribute Macintosh Tip 8 Select the object to which you want to assign attributes p a If you want to assign 9 Enter the desired values in the entry field in the Status Line attributes to an object made Attribute values which are locked cannot be edited in the Status Line up of several individual objects like a rectangle 10 Press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key made up of four single lines group the object before assigning attributes Otherwise the attributes assign to each individual Symbol Attributes Tool o ieeeded Important The attributes will be assigned only when you hit ENTER Win dows or RETURN Macintosh This tool marks a symbol with assigned attributes Graphite doesn t recognize any difference between drawings and symbols They are only opened by different commands e Drawings are opened by choosing File gt Open e Symbols are inserted by choosing File gt Symbol gt Insert m E Attribute Value Name Wedge Material Steel Quantity Symbol attribute tables cannot be edited They must be deleted and reinserted Marking an Object as a Symbol With the Symbol Attributes tool you mark an object with a small table containing all assigned
253. ick the 2 Entity Fillet tool The Message Line reads 2 Entity Fillet Pick first entity Shift Corner Ctrl No trim Windows or Option No trim Macin tosh 2 Enter the arc radius you want in the Status Line The default radius is 25 inch 3 Select the first entity The Message Line now reads 2 Entity Fillet Pick second entity to fillet Ctrl No trim Windows or Option No trim Macintosh 4 Select the second entity The fillet is created Editing Tools You can also hold down the SHIFT key and click once inside the corner you want to fillet See the Message Line at the top of your drawing area for a reference to this feature If you hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects to fillet the objects are not trimmed See the Message Line The Status Line allows you to specify the Radius of the fillet either before or after you create the fillet i 25 3 Entity Fillet Tool a This tool in the ninth subpalette of the main tool palette constructs a fillet tangent to the three objects you choose Using the 3 Entity Fillet Tool 1 Click the 3 Entity Fillet tool The Message Line reads 3 Entity Fillet Pick first entity Ctrl No trim Windows or Option No trim Macintosh 2 Click the three objects you want to fillet as directed by the Message Line If you hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while you select the obj
254. ies Segment Tool xX This tool in the tenth subpalette of the main tool palette divides a line or curve at intersections with other lines or curves Using the Segment Tool 1 Select the objects that limit the segmentation 2 Select the Segment tool The Message Line reads Segment Pick entity Shift Select boundary Ctrl Current pen Windows or Option Current pen Macin tosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the object to be segmented The selected object segments at the boundary objects Even though you cannot see the segmentation on the screen you can select parts of the segmented line by clicking If you hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while selecting the line to be segmented the new segment appears in the characteristics of the cur rent pen style see the Message Line There are no Status Line entries In order to see the segmentation on the screen first select the boundaries and the object you want to segment and then choose Layout gt Show Points After the seg mentation the endpoints of the segmented parts are displayed Corner Trim Tool This tool in the tenth subpalette of the main tool palette creates a corner from the two objects you specify Lines are extended or shortened to create the corner Editing Tools Using the Corner Trim Tool 1 Click the Corner Trim tool The Message Line reads Corner Trim Pick
255. iesssucccceceeecsets ecedecessesteasacecsnestessceesee 12 1 Dimension Memi smirio na a ATE teas OTENE AEEA E 12 1 ASSOCIAMVE DIMENSIONS aseri iniinis eE E N n A ETA 12 2 Using the Dimension Tools isnieaneinicisoniaoniianiionie aana 12 2 Dimension Appearance icici ecccsecsssecsmve caieeess caaspuguenteaeshedieveatenceess caer a 12 22 Section 6 Viewing Your Designs Viewing Geometry ecieecessciccscsscscscsccsiccdescoessoassesesedcecessscosssossccssssceseceseceesseaseess 13 1 ZOON eaae ara EEEE E EAE AEE OO EEEE EESE OA ANERE E EARRA 13 1 Layens uone bears suc dys eE T T EE E E E A EEE 13 4 Wew DEPIS Yarn n A E T 13 13 Views MeNi reren inea a AEE ET kA EEE 13 20 Advanced Viewing Techniques ccccssccccsssccccssccccsssccccescecccscecccessecoeees 14 1 Sheets en a E E bans 14 1 Models sirsiran an E EE ARE EE N EE ences eng 14 4 VieWS arumoni oen ae E e a E NA ael 14 14 Combining Sheets Views and Models ccccccecccecteeceeteeeettteeeesneteesenneeees 14 34 Section 7 Documents Graphite DOCUMeEnNntS siscsscccicssccccccessccasscscosecsecestetessscsccestscoassc oeesssceecesertessscee 15 1 USING DOCUMENTS iiye aa EEEE A AO EET uae AEN 15 2 Importing and Exporting oo r eitn nsr NRE EENEN EESE OENE 15 7 Drawing at Full Scale cissctsciidhebacessacdstantdeeadiehnesansed ae EN i NEE Eiaa 15 23 Drawings Scale and Paper Sie socrii aoir Nea N ENN 15 25 Dra wins FOIMats orron aininn nta EAA EE ARTET RE AATA TE ETa 15 30 Forms Tith
256. iews of a part such as 1 50 in a standard drawing for mat with title block and borders that must be plotted at a scale of 1 1 e create detail views if an object that is not associative to the original model e create customized drafting layouts or e recover from an erroneous Sheet into View command The first section of this chapter explained the use of Sheets Views and Models Each is a simple and straight forward operation In the graphics you could see the environment and how sheets views and models are set up in Graphite What you still need to know is the exact definition of all engaged components and the rules that describe how they are interact Components The environment in Graphite for handling all geometry you create can be described by five components sheets models views cameras and projectors First you have to know that all geometry you create is not created directly on the sheet you see on your computer screen but somewhere outside of the sheet in an infinitely large three dimensional work space Model space All geometry is placed here as separate models You only see images or views of these models on your sheet Sheets A sheet is an infinite 2D planar area that displays an image of one or more models The image of a model is picked up either by the Sheet camera and projected onto the sheet the Sheet View or by a Detail View camera and projected into a view window which is resting on the sheet the Detail
257. ifications for the Drafting Assistant This allows you to activate or deactivate different snap modes of the Drafting Assistant A smooth free form curve passing through speci fied points The line at the bottom of the drawing area in which you can enter the specifications for the geometry you are creating Used to stretch your geometry along one axis and at a specified angle Groups of symbols of the same type These were either included with Graphite or created by you The command that retrieves a predefined drawing This command may use Graphite s integrated para metric feature The point where a line or curve touches a curve without intersecting it The Drafting Assistant dis plays the tangent notation of a curve when the pointer nears it This command allows you to create a standard text block for multiple use Text Tool Text Lines Tool Toggle Transformation Trim Trimetric Undo Unfold Units Vertex View Dependent Visible Wireframe World plane The tool for drawing annotation It allows you to specify a text box the area where text is dis played and then enter text Used to place text within a geometrically created horizontal line To switch between two conditions for example Hide Grid Show Grid The tools to move rotate expand or shrink or mirror an object or group of entities To shorten or remove a portion of a line A top front and right view in which the Z
258. iginal orientation If you drag the starting point of the drag specifies the insertion point for the symbol and the direction of the drag indicates the orientation 17 3 Symbols Tech Note You can use a text file to fill in parametric dimensions of a symbol Create a text file with value pairings for each variable and its value Then load the symbol and click on File in the Symbol Panel The file automatically fills in the values you specified for each dimension 17 4 Bringing a Symbol into the Current Document 1 6 Choose File gt Symbol The Open dialog box appears Select the symbol file you want to use and click Open The Symbol dialog box appears displaying a preview of the currently selected symbol All symbol files in that directory appear in the symbols list on the left side of the Symbol Panel Enter a value for each of the parametric dimensions Specify the location and orientation for the symbol In the dialog box a triangle appears on the geometry to indicate the origin or the point you are locating If you click the symbol inserts at the click location in its original orientation If you drag the starting point of the drag specifies the insertion point for the symbol and the direction of the drag indicates the orientation If you do not specify a location you may have to scroll to see the symbol Click OK The geometry resolves and appears in the current drawing at the location you clicke
259. igned with dimension leader lines Over and Under display text above or below leader lines while Break in places the text between leader lines Dimension Appearance 12 27 Dimensions Tech Note The Font command only tl affects dimensions To change he font of other text objects choose Text gt Font The Font submenu in the Text menu has no effect on dimensions You must use the Font command from the Dimension menu to specify tl he font for dimension text 2 28 a 994 lt a 994 Q Ke fee Horizontal Text Aligned Text 994 Q Ko ISO Text Font This command in the Dimension menu Dimension lets you pick the font for dimension text Show Palette The fonts in this list are the same as those Son dards available in the Font submenu from the Wiese A Text menu Linear Tol gt Angular gt Angular Tol gt Windows If you have more fonts in than r Text gt appear in the Font submenu you can Size access them by choosing the More com Style K mand Color Weight gt Layer Arrowheads gt Arrow Size Witness Lines Arial Black Arial Narrow Avant Garde BodonPoster Book Antiqua Bookman Century SchoolBook Cottonwood Courier Courier New Fixedsys Frank Goth FreestyleScript Garamond GillSans Helv HelvCompressed Helvetica Helvetica Black More Size This command in the Dimension menu lets you pick the size of dimension tex
260. iiia ENEA Niina ACA 5 1 Pen Cha racteristicS epad annie N E EAE VA EEE AV EN EE E 5 3 SEUNG WIS sarapan an a E E dis mus A E EED TEE 5 20 THE GHd anpes ana e E a r a A NA 5 22 Drawitts At Pull SCAle ss icecsiasvey dusnsceehaivcewseada A svanueotesuls sdesasnangaldunticedtynccdetaasenen 5 24 The Drafting Process innin a n E E a eee eae eS 5 25 OS SENES nrs a E a E E wens EEEE ES 5 27 Savino PEGIChCNCES eriein a a e E E E E A 5 28 Save Palettes cd cisarsnepactsnadtcudeddmneacsacate E E EE EEE EA 5 30 Advanced Environment Settings ossoooseeoooseeossseossseoseseossseossseosssessssesseses 6 1 Pile OfrGaniZatiOn acscsncssnccduasavascersnecsadecsina cass vena necdawneata dauagceuasecasarenca i 6 6 BD Viewing arien na REEE a E E E versie daphed 6 6 Section 3 Creating Geometry Drawing TOONS ssccsisccsccsciscZicedestevevvevscceswadstscovesstecesstecsesscasvssccnuseccetusecassssseesaesrs 7 1 Drawing TECHNIQUES wscissvedsissusminectuscnsawardnsntsishsoneaweteny sens susie peasawarsny cena venedvonsawets 7 2 TDS Stats LINE eire ngiu EEn NEA ae cx beneeg pees diraey teas EAEE AANT 7 4 The Message LINE ciinei ne i a A A A 7 7 Drawing Tools Description and Use cc iisdisscdisscasavcesis oasiehoussavetsavarsessetvavonsives 7 7 3D Drawing TOS cc sisdsccscsssccsseccceasssccusssccosdsseccessececsstececoessseserseesesssccssccscsesesee s 8 1 SEOMEMY I DID seirinin nan Gad Baas EE E EE R a an ented AEA 8 1 3D Features and TOOLS awose or
261. ill contain all Item Numbers and their associated attributes E C a a 4 a cur Pte nerd T 5 2 sent E C E E 25 1 acwe_ nem Fari nerne For murmner weterat_ Cost ouomny vero The Bill of Materials will be placed on the current sheet You can move it to another location copy it to another sheet or export it into an ASCII file to use it in other programs like spread sheets or text editors In order to create a Bill of Materials you must define a layout first Bill of Materials Layouts Text Dimension Views 3D Utilities Help I In conjunction with the Define Attributes dialog Pes box the Layouts command found by choosing Style gt Text gt Bill of Materials gt Define Layouts uae allows you to define different layouts for the Align Right Bill of Materials Align Middle Justified v Single Space 1 1 2 Space Double Space Indentation Ure Hide Palette Spell Check Define Attributes Forms Text Options Bill of Materials 19 15 Bill of Materials 19 16 Layouts Command ee ee xi submenu of the Modules menu dis plays the following dialog box E New Rename Layouts differ only by the attributes to which they relate A layout contains all the visible attributes listed in the Define Attributes dialog box Visible attributes are indicated by a check mark Therefore the Define Attributes dialog box should be displayed when defining a layout Us Define Layouts x x
262. ill visible use the Selection Mask You can also specify the selectability of layers with the Selection Mask Creating a New Layer Click New to create another layer You can name the layer by typing the name in Tip the Rename data field and clicking Rename You can have as many as 255 layers You can also type a name then click New Renaming a Layer 1 Select the name of the layer from the list box 2 Type the new name 3 Click Rename Deleting a Layer 1 Select the name of the layer from the list box 2 Click Delete Note The layer and everything on that layer deletes however a warning appears before this happens Hiding a Layer 1 Click the layer s you want to hide in the list 13 7 Viewing Geometry Tech Note You can select a contiguous group of items in the Selec tion Mask by clicking on the first or last item in the desired group then holding down the SHIFT key and either clicking on the items or dragging up or down to the other end of the desired list If you want to select or dese lect noncontiguous items hold down the CTRL Win dows or the Macintosh key and click the items 13 8 2 Click Hide The visible mark beside the layer name disappears Notes e You can t hide the work layer e Ifa layer is hidden and you choose Select All and delete the objects on the hidden layer are not deleted Displaying a Hidden Layer 1 Click the layer s you want to make visible in the list
263. inear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol yrwry rey Text Font size Style ee wh Color Weight Layer Arrowheads Arrow Size Witness Lines Linear This command in the Dimension menu allows you to set the precision either frac tional or decimal of the dimension s nominal value and the format of tolerance and limits for linear dimensions The default dimension appearance is decimals Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear gt No Decimals No Decimals Linear Tol r X Angular gt XX Angular Tol gt XXX x 32 XXXX Text gt x 64 XXXXX Font r Size gt XXX XXX Style xxxttol xxxttol xxxtupper lower xxx tupper lower Color gt yyy xxx limits yyy xxx limits Weight gt yyy xxx limits yyy xxx limits Layer xxx basic xxx basic _Xxx_ not to scale _xxx_ not to scale Arrowheads r Arrow Size Witness Lines gt The default is three decimal places or x 16 for fractional precision with no toler ance or limits Dimension Appearance 12 23 Dimensions Tech Note Use the xxx basic format to create dimensions for GD amp T symbols 12 24 Dimension Tolerance The following graphic shows the appearance of each tolerance format if you entered the limits shown in the Status Line 7 1 394 1 390 m yyy XXX limits 1 391 E XXX 1 391 003 1 391799 me scale 1 391 00 A a B
264. ines Stroke construction lines are lines that you create with the mouse Hold down the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh and drag the mouse hori zontally or vertically Since you are working in the drawing area the Drafting Assis tant helps you place the stroke precisely Permanent Construction Lines Holding down the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh changes the mouse pointer to the Stroke point 3 38 Drag the pointer horizontally or vertically er Tip Drag Result You can use strokes to create construction lines while you are in the process of using a tool Vertically A vertical construction line through the first point of the stroke Horizontally A horizontal construction line through the first point of the stroke Using Stroke Construction Lines Construction lines are as long as the dimensions of the viewing area of the screen or the plot region as designated in Drawing Size dialog box in the Layout menu whichever is larger For example if you are using the Connected Lines tool you can create a construc tion line that extends through the center of a circle 1 Hold down the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh The pointer becomes the Stroke pointer 3 2 Move the pointer near the center of the circle The Drafting Assistant snaps onto the center point 3 Drag the mouse vertically or horizontally away from the midpoint The construction line a
265. ing example explains the process e When you open a new document Sheet 1 displays in the drawing area e You create a complex assembly and a detail view on Sheet 1 e When it is time to plot the project you find that the assembly fills all of the plot ting area and there is no room for the detail view on the page e Select the detail view and choose Cut from the active View window menu not from the Edit menu in the menu bar e Choose Views gt Sheets and click New to create another sheet Sheet 2 Sheets e Click Current to make Sheet 2 the current sheet A blank sheet displays e Choose Edit gt Paste to paste the detail view on Sheet 2 The detail view displays on Sheet 2 You may have to do a Zoom All in order to see the detail view Finally you can check to see that the detail view is still associated with the original assembly e Make Sheet 1 current and make a change to the area of the assembly that is in the detail view Remember Crosshatching Text and Dimensions are not associ ated in a detail view e Look at Sheet 2 and see that the change appears in the detail view on Sheet 2 and of course changes made in the detail view are also be reflected in the Sheet 1 view Sheets Command This command in the Views menu allows you to 2A Sheets create and name sheets and set the work sheet The check mark V in the list of sheets indicates Sheet 1 the work or current sheet The title bar for the document al
266. ing or Stop Recording buttons Whatever action you perform selecting menu items or defining strokes records automatically in the relating list boxes as long as the Macro dialog box is open The Macro dialog box contains the following buttons New Clicking New adds a macro named Macro1 to the Names list box You can rename the macro in the Rename data field by overwriting Macro1 with a new name and then clicking the Rename button Rename Clicking Rename overwrites the selected macro name in the Names list box with the name you entered in the Rename data field For Windows macro names may only contain alpha numeric characters No spaces or other characters are allowed Remove The Remove button removes any selected entry from one of the three list boxes File Run Names list box Strokes list box Commands list box Key The File button writes all currently defined macros to files in the Scripts folder in the Graphite installa tion folder The file names are generated directly from the macro names The files are output in such a way that when Graphite is subsequently started the macros activate automatically Macro files can be moved to other locations or to other machines for use in other copies of Graphite The Run button runs the macro currently selected in the Names list box Macros can call other macros if they are in the Utilities menu This is done by clicking on the relevant entry in the Utilities menu like
267. ing window Cancel 3 Drag a line in the active view window to indicate the Normal Line of Sight vector 1 Choose Views gt Define View A Define View The Define View dialog box displays Isometric New Right 2 Click New Left Delete Front The new work view is named View 1 Back Hedefine The Redefine View dialog box displays the Set View locations for the current view If that view is Rename The Up data field becomes selected 4 Drag a line in the active view window indicating the Up direction 5 Click OK The dialog box closes and the new view is defined 6 Click Set View The active view displays the new orientation Rename this view if you want to give it a more distinctive name 8 Close the Define View dialog box if you have no other need to define work views Be aware that simply rotating the view does not alter the orientation of the work plane in 3D space x Views Deleting a View Orientation Select the view orientation to be deleted from the View list and click the Delete but ton Redefining a View Orientation You have two methods to change the orientation of the axes of a view By Example 1 Manipulate the view orientation manually with the Trackball 2 Choose Views gt Define View 3 Select the view you want to redefine 4 Click Redefine 5 Click OK The Redefine View dialog box closes 6 Dismiss the Define View dialog box if you have no other need for it By
268. ion of the dot the text appears above or to the right of the leader If you select in the oppo site order the text appears below or to the left of the leader Click the points you want to measure Dimensions automatically use the dimension pen style and current dimension text characteristics If you want to change the dimension pen color or weight you can do so in the dimension menu The dimension pattern can only be changed in the Edit Object dialog box for selected dimensions Move the dimension to a new location if its placement is not where you want it See the margin note If you are planning to use the dimension with parametrics change the entry in the text data field on the Status Line Moving the Dimension When the dimension text appears it is selected so that you can move it to a new location Move the pointer to the dimension text When the pointer changes to the 4 way Move symbol as pictured below drag the dimension to its new location 4 If you want to move a dimension later use the Selection tool Click the dimension once then drag it to the new location You can also drag to select the dimension text or to select the entire dimension or several dimensions at once Using the Dimension Status Line Fields The status fields shown below appear when a dimensioning tool is selected Text Ej Upper 001 Lower 001 Text The symbol in the text data field indica
269. ion to single points Remember the parametric mechanism connects the dots Frequently one constraint or dimension can solve several prob lems at once Geometry Overconstrained The basic rules say that you must define all geometry and relate every object to some other geometry within the parametric definition When geometry is overcon strained it is related in more than one way so the geometry s specifications could be resolved to more than one answer Problem The diameters of the circles indicate the relation ship between the circles adequately because the centerline remains horizontal and the circles are tangent to each other The length variable causes the problem because the length between the cen ters of the circles may not correspond to the sizes of the connected circles The centerline begins and ends at the centers of the circles Solution Delete the Length dimension Parametric Problems 16 13 Parametrics 16 14 Unrelated Groups If you do not give enough dimensions the parametric mechanism will find two or more groups of geometry each of which is well defined in itself but not related to each other Problem H 2 A simple example of this problem is illus trated on the left where the short vertical j line is not related to the rest of the geom ay H etry When you try to resolve this geome l try you get an Unrelated group problem 2 L message ka w The first unrelated group appear
270. ions between a point or object perpendicular to an existing base line Using the Perpendicular Ordinate Dimension Tool 1 Select the Perpendicular Ordinate Dimension tool The Message Line reads Perpendicular Ordinate Pick first dimension point 2 Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Perpendicular Ordinate Pick second dimension point Click the next point The dimension appears measured from the base point 4 Click the next point for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the base point Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned If you want to display a dimension at the base point click the base point after you have dimensioned all other points You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Reminder To display the dimension number of the base point you have to click it twice at the first and the last dimension points 12 15 Dimensions 12 16 Radial Arrow Out Dimension Tool lt This tool measures the radius of a circle arc or fillet m R 2 741 R 2 741 Using the Radial Arrow Out Dimension Tool 1 Select the Radial Arrow Out Dimension tool The Message Line reads Radial Arrow Out Select arc circle 2 Click near the circle arc or fillet you want to dimension If you click outside it the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside The dimensi
271. is an object in Graphite like any other object geom etry That means it can be moved copied deleted and edited You create a Bill of Materials with the Bill of Materials tool in the BOM tool palette BOM Tool This tool in the BOM tool palette generates a Bill of Materials of the current model and places it on the current sheet Its insertion point is based on the Draw Table setting in the Options dialog box Creating a Bill of Materials for the Entire Drawing 1 Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Show Palette Bill of Materials Tip Macintosh users you can drag the attribute names in the Attribute List in the Define Attributes dialog box to change the order 19 19 Bill of Materials 19 20 The BOM palette displays Select the BOM tool The Message Line reads BOM Tool Pick Insertion Point Ctrl Selection Only Windows OPTION Selection Only Macintosh Click in the drawing area to indicate a location where you want to display the Bill of Materials The Bill of Materials of the current layout appears at the selected location The Bill of Materials uses the font currently selected in the Text menu It can be moved copied or deleted like any other object in Graphite Creating a Bill of Materials of Selected Objects 1 2 Select all objects you want to display in a Bill of Materials Choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Show Palette The BOM palette displays Select the BOM tool With the
272. is sets the plane to match the screen in all views which is particularly useful when you are moving from view to view while drafting If you want to name this work plane use the Define Plane command Selecting Objects Once you have constructed objects you may want to make changes One of the basic rules of Graphite says that you must first select an object before you can edit it Just as you first have to select a drawing tool from the tool palette before you can start drawing an object must first be selected before a function can be applied Modifying an object is always a two step process 1 Select the object 2 Specify the action for the selected object For example you could select a circle and then change the pen style to Center to indicate a bolt hole circle The following topics are covered e Objects e Indicating Selection e Selection Process Objects A single piece of geometry is an object Single a Object A line is an object 9 1 Selecting Objects Referral Selecting points is described in a later section of this chap ter 9 2 Several objects that have been grouped with the Group command are also an object For example the four lines of a rectangle are four objects If you group them Graphite treats them as a single object 1 A rectangle is 4 r l lines 4 objects is a single object i A grouped rectangle Ungrouped Grouped Objects Objects A point is an object too Ever
273. ite folder the desired drawing format such as ViewB vc6 Windows or a Format B amp View Macintosh where 1View stands for one detail view and B for the paper format Important You can ignore the number of detail views since they are only important when using the Sheet Into View command 6 Click OK Using the Sheet into View Command With the Sheet Into View command Graphite imports not only a drawing format but also displays the drawing at the specified scale in one or several detail views depending on the selected design layout 1 Choose the Sheet Into View command in the Views menu 15 31 Graphite Documents 15 32 The Sheet Into View dialog box displays 2 Select in the Layout list box the desired drawing format such as 4ViewB vc6 Windows or a Format B amp 4Views Macintosh where 4View stands for four detail views and B for the paper format This example is only available in Graphite 3D Enter the desired Scale factor in the Scale data field Click OK The drawing format is placed at a scale of 1 1 at it s true size onto the drawing area and the complete geometry of the drawing displays in one or several detail views at the specified scale factor The number of detail views and the view angle Top Isometric etc depends on the selected design layout Only the Top view is available for Graphite Draft Modifying Drawing Formats All drawing formats shipping with Graphite in the Layout folder ca
274. k BOM geometry to point to Ctrl Renumber 2 Three entry fields display in the Status Line Item Width and Size 3 Enter the starting item number for the selected object into the Item field Item Numbers can also contain alpha characters A B C etc 4 Click the Item Number tool near the object you want to label 5 Click with the Item Number tool in the drawing area to indicate the position of the Item Number balloon The Item Numbers are placed at the location you clicked Item Numbers If you place additional position balloons the Item Number automatically increases The default Item Number always increments from the last Item Number used If you assign an Item Number to an object already assigned to another object the item numbers adjust as follows e If the new Item Number is lower than the highest already assigned Item Number all higher Item Numbers increase e If the new Item Number is higher than the highest assigned Item Number the existing Item Numbers remain unchanged You cannot assign more than one Item Number to an object if you do the original Item Number balloon deletes To get the original Item Number back do an Undo Adjusting Item Number Balloon and Text Size The following procedure describes how to adjust the Item Number balloon and Text size before you assign any Item Numbers 1 In the BOM tool palette select the Item Number tool E The entry fields Item Width and Size display in
275. l components 1 Select the group 2 Choose Arrange gt Ungroup The individual objects in a group are selected Lock Command This command in the Arrange menu prohibits editing or movement of selected geometry Preventing Accidental Changes to One or More Objects 1 Select the objects to be locked 2 Choose Arrange gt Lock Although you cannot move or change a locked object you can copy group and select it Selected objects can also be locked or unlocked by clicking the ocked box in the Edit Objects dialog box Preventing Changes to an Entire Document 1 Choose Edit gt Select All 2 Choose Arrange gt Lock Selected objects can also be locked or unlocked by clicking the locked box in the Edit Objects dialog box Unlock Command This command in the Arrange menu removes the lock in the selection You can change and move the unlocked objects 1 Select the locked object s 10 33 Editing Objects 10 34 2 Choose Arrange gt Unlock Selected objects can also be locked and unlocked by clicking the locked box in the Edit Objects dialog box Redraw Screen Command CTRL R Windows R Macintosh This command in the Arrange menu refreshes the screen When you make changes to your constructions the geometry may not be redrawn cleanly in the drawing area Redrawing the Screen To redraw all of the geometry and remove extraneous geometry choose the Redraw Screen command from the Arrange menu Stopping
276. lane The Object Rotation command allows you to rotate around any axis specified Object Rotation Command 3D This command in the 3D menu allows you to rotate geometry around any axis that you specify 1 Select the geometry that you want to rotate 2 Choose 3D gt Object Rotation 3 In the Rotate Angle field enter the angle you want to rotate the geome try Object Rotation Rotate Angle 0 Origin X 0 Yo IZo Axis dX 0 dY 0 dZ 1 Cancel Apply 10 9 Editing Objects Tip Using the beginning and end ing reference point for the Expand Shrink tool is par ticularly useful if you want to change the size of an object relative to the size of another object 10 10 4 Specify the Axis of Rotation around which you want to rotate the geometry Tab to the Origin data field in the dialog box Place the target cursor along the desired axis Drag along the desired axis Don t worry about whether the z axis is pointed in the right direction The six data fields are automatically filled in 7 Click OK The object rotates Expand Shrink Tool E This tool in the eleventh subpalette of the main tool palette enlarges or reduces objects while maintaining the proportions You can copy the selection by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same p
277. lane name a temporary plane or change a standard plane The standard planes cannot be changed unless you click the lock icon off Their default configurations are defined as follows Front The x z plane Right The y z plane Top The x y plane World The origin and plane of the original geometry when it was created This plane cannot be changed If you change any of the standard planes you can always revert to the world plane to return to the original orientation 3D Drawing Tools 8 12 If you have used other computer applications you may be familiar with the terms World Coordinate System and User Coordinate System The World Coordinate System is equivalent to Graphite s world work plane and the User Coordinate System is equivalent to the current work plane Specifying a New Work Plane 1 Choose 3D gt Define Plane LA Define Planes Ea The Define Plane dialog box displays a Top amp Front a Right Delete v World E S The Redefine Plane dialog box displays and the Rename Origin data field highlights Psuams Redetine Set York PELE Define Plane Enter values by typing or clicking the mouse in the drawing window Origin X 0 Yo Zo Right dX 1 dY 0 ___ dzo Up dX 0 dY 0 dZ 1 Cancel OK The new work plane is named Plane 1 by default 3 On the drawing area click the location for the new origin The Right data field is sel
278. lative to each other Enlarging or shrinking an object with the Move tool is described under Sizing 1 Select the object s to be moved objects with Tools in this chapter Using the Move Tool 10 7 Editing Objects 10 8 2 Select the Move tool The Message Line reads Move Pick beginning reference point Shift Select Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macintosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more objects 3 Drag the selected object to a new location pressing to set a reference point and releasing to indicate the new location You can also click a reference point then click a destination point to move the selected object to the new location It is not necessary for the reference and destina tion points to be on the object you are moving The move is performed relative to the specified points The Status Line allows you to specify the distance that the selection is to be moved in a particular direction xp yp jz fes ov sp fs A positive or negative value entered in a data field of the Status Line determines the direction along the axis A negative value moves the object to the left or down on the screen A positive value to the right or up Nudge Tool The nudge tool is used to move items a specified distance using the arrow keys Using the Nudge Tool 1 Set the nudge distance Go to Layout gt Preferences gt Nudge or Right Mouse Click and choose Nudge 2 Select an item or items
279. layer rei s If the layer on which dimensions are to Angular Tol gt be placed is hidden or deleted future Text gt dimensions will be placed on the current co work layer Style gt Dimension Arrowheads gt Layer1 Arrow Size Arrowh eads Witness Lines This command in the Dimension menu allows you to specify the type of arrowhead used for dimensions Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol vvv Text Font Size Style vvv v Color Weight gt Layer Arrow Size N Witness Lines gt Dimension Appearance Tech Note The layers in your list will be different than the ones shown here if you have added layers of your own or deleted any of the default layers Tech Note he Arrowheads command only affects dimensions To select the arrowhead type for lines or arcs use the Arrow heads submenu from the Pen menu The Arrowheads submenu from the Pen menu has no effect on dimensions 12 31 Dimensions 12 32 Arrow Size Command This command in the Dimension menu lets you specify the size of the arrowhead that you have selected Dot Size This value describes the diameter of circular and slash arrowheads The value displayed is in the current units specified in the Units dialog box from the Preferences command Length This value describes the length of the arrowhead as the horizontal distance from its tip to the fur
280. le conventions Italic Terms used for the first time in a chapter Para metrics Drafting Assistant notations midpoint tool and dialog box options Angle data field book references User Guide Message Line direc tions Single Line Pick the beginning point mar gin note headings Tip menu commands Extrude filenames Graphite ini stand alone extensions dwg directory names drawing names User Guide Chapter Breakdown Bold and Italic Command series Pen gt ColorDefine ALL CAPITALS Key names on the keyboard ENTER RETURN Title Capitalization Dialog box names Edit Objects menu names Pen menu special Graphite phrases the Drafting Assistant all lower case File names Graphite ini stand alone file exten sions dwg User Guide Chapter Breakdown The chapters are grouped into sections dealing with a specific area Sections Referral Specific page information on 1 Overview Contains chapters that provide you with informa a particular tool or com tion on the documentation layout basic elements mand can be found in the of Graphite and the Drafting Assistant index 2 Setting the Environment Contains information on setting the drawing envi ronment 3 Creating Geometry Contains information on creating geometry using the tools of Graphite 4 Editing Contains information on using the tools and com mands to edit your geometry 5 Document Detailing Contains information on adding text and dimen
281. lified drawings using layers Bedroom Bath Kitchen Dining Area Bedroom Living Room Layer 1 The foundation Layer 2 First Floor Bath Dressing Room my m Layers can be used to display differ TTT ent floor plans of the same building Study Master Bedroom Layer 3 Second Floor In order to print or plot the layers simply use the Layers dialog box to turn on the layers you want to print and turn off all other layers using the Hide or Show button When you can see what you want to print on the screen choose File gt Print Using Smart Walls with Layers You can also observe how smart walls function in these examples The interior walls on Layers 2 and 3 overlay the exterior walls of the foundation Smart walls merge only on the same layer therefore the interior walls are not merged with the exterior walls and walls on Layer 2 are not merged with walls on Layer 3 13 9 Viewing Geometry 13 10 Assembly Layers can also be used to create interlocking parts of an assembly You create one part on Layer 1 and copy the common geometry onto Layer 2 Then you create the remainder of the interlocking part on Layer 2 Layer 1 and Layer 2 Layer 1 Layer 2 In this way you can turn the display of the layers on and off to present the parts appropriately You are already familiar with these parts from a tutorial in the Getting Started section of the manual Layer Groups Layer Grou
282. line and you move the pointer hor izontally vertically or in a 45 direction the dynamic construction lines appear Drafting Assistant Construction Lines The figure here illustrates a 45 construction line relative to the endpoint of an existing line on align 45 Displaying Dynamic Construction Lines while Constructing Geometry 1 2 3 Click a point to begin new geometry Move the pointer away from the point horizontally vertically or at a 45 angle While the construction line is visible and the Drafting Assistant displays on click the next point The point is placed exactly on the construction line even though the pointer wasn t exactly on that line when you clicked The dynamic construction line dis appears Displaying Dynamic Construction Lines with Existing Geometry 1 Without pressing the mouse button move the pointer over an existing point The point notation endpoint or midpoint for example shows that the point is active Move the pointer horizontally or vertically A construction line appears through the point While the construction line is visible and the Drafting Assistant displays on click the desired point in the construction The point is placed exactly on the construction line even though the pointer wasn t exactly on that line when you clicked The dynamic construction line dis appears Tech Note You can have as many as eight active points activating the nin
283. ll down list It also saves all of the settings from the Dimension menu The Default button reverts to the factory settings of the selected standard This entry data field provides the distance from the base of the dimension text to the leader lines A positive entry places the text above the leader lines and a negative value places it below the Gap Extension Arrow Leader First Offset Next Offset Leading 0 s amp Trailing 0 s Dimension Appearance leader lines A zero value places the text on the leader lines This entry data field provides the distance between the dimension point and the witness line This entry data field provides the distance the wit ness lines extend beyond the leader lines This entry data field provides the distance the leader lines extend beyond the witness lines when the arrow lines appear outside of the witness lines This entry data field provides the perpendicular distance between object being dimensioned and the leader line and dimension text Changes to this value only affect newly created dimensions This entry data field provides the perpendicular distance between subsequent leader lines created in a base line dimensioning Changes to this value only affect newly created dimensions Selecting these check boxes determines whether Dimension or Tolerance values display leading or trailing zeros Neither option is selected by default Selecting Leading 0 s places a 0
284. ll of the field labels as they were originally created 2 Choose the Text gt AutoText gt Forms The Forms dialog box containing all entry fields of the title block displays 3 Type in the desired parameters You don t have to fill in all entry fields 4 Click OK Printing or Plotting a Drawing The Forms dialog box closes and all entry fields of the selected title block are filled in according to your specifications Editing Title Blocks 1 Select the fields containing values you want to update or choose Edit gt Select Al 2 Select the Text gt AutoText gt Forms The Forms dialog box displays again Modify the entries of the title block Click OK The Forms dialog box closes and the selected title block modified accordingly Printing or Plotting a Drawing Graphite prints and plots on most printers and plotters supported by your com puter After you have followed the manufacturer s instructions for installing and set ting up the printer or plotter you can size your drawing for the paper you will be using Setting the Printer or Plotter and Paper Specifications In the File menu use the Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh to spec ify the printer or plotter the paper size orientation number of copies and other options Once you have specified the page setup you can set the visual scale of the geome try so that it fits the paper size Follow the instructions found earlier in this chapter to scale the
285. lled off a curve circle or spline will be tangent if created in the same plane as the curve circle or spline Arcs Circles Ellipses Rectangles Splines Fillets Tracer Tangent lines that are tangent to only one object can be created only with objects on the work plane at the origin Tangent lines tangent to two objects can be created on any work plane as long as both objects are on the same work plane A center point arc is drawn parallel to the work plane A 3 point arc is drawn in the plane designated by the three points defining the arc A tangent point arc is drawn in the plane of the three defining points A center point circle and opposite point Circle are drawn parallel to the work plane A 3 point circle is drawn in the plane designated by the three points defining the circle A tangent circle is drawn in the plane of the two defining entities A 2 point center ellipse and opposite point ellipse are drawn parallel to the work plane A 3 point center ellipse and 3 corner ellipse are drawn in the plane designated by the three points defining the ellipse All rectangles and polygons are created parallel to the work plane Splines have no 3D restrictions Fillets and chamfers are constructed in the plane defined by the selected entities This tool does not work with 3D objects 3D Features and Tools Graphite provides you with tools and features specific to the 3D environment 3D Features a
286. llustration shows two text blocks One is the label a standard text block one is the field a text block beginning with no space Scale Scale TN F Label Field Entry Note All field and label text blocks have to be placed on the TitleBlocks layer Create this layer using the Layers command as discussed in Chapter 13 Preparing Title Blocks with the Forms Command 1 Open one of the drawing formats in the Layout folder 2 If no layer with the name TitleBlocks exists create this layer by choosing Lay out gt Layers and make it the current layer 3 Select the Text command from the function palette 4 Create text blocks Any text block beginning with an character will become a field all others will become labels 5 Assign all of the text blocks the desired font style and size using the Selection tool from the tool palette 6 Save the drawing format Using Forms With a format already placed in the drawing selecting the Forms command in the AutoText submenu brings up the Forms dialog box This dialog box is similar to the Resolve dialog box in that it prompts the user for values for each previously defined field Graphite replaces the field text blocks with whatever values are entered Text attributes such as font assigned in the saved format are applied to the new values Filling in a Title Block 1 Place a Standard drawing format use the Import or Sheet into View command The form appears with a
287. location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order to display the dimension below the objects Vertical Chain Dimension Tool i 313 This tool dimensions objects or space from end to end vertically Using Vertical Chain Dimension Tool 1 096 1 Select the Vertical Chain Dimension tool The Mes sage Line reads Vertical Chain Pick first dimension point Click the first point on the geometry The Message Line now reads Vertical Chain Pick second dimen sion point 289 Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the last point clicked Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Using the Dimension Tools Vertical Ordinate Dimension Tool 000 R 228 This tool dimensions objects or space vertically from a base point Sgi Using the Vertical Ordinate Dimension Tool 1 Select the Horizontal Ordinate Dimension tool 356 The Message Line reads Vertical Ordinate Pick f irst dimension point f P 1 319 2 Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Vertical Ordinate Pick second dimension point Click the next point The dimension appe
288. locks onto the exact location for you To press and hold the mouse button move the pointer to a new location and release the mouse button An acronym for Data Exchange Format a format of AutoCAD files A drafted 2 dimensional drawing of a model Usu ally a drawing including an orthogonal view AutoCAD s native file format The tool for drawing ellipses from rectangle or par allelogram specifications The first and last point of a line or curve The Drafting Assistant indicates these positions when the pointer is moved near the endpoint of an object To save a document in a file format that can be used by a different application program Glossary G 6 EPS File Fillet Tool Flatten Font Forms GD amp T Geometry Grid Group Hidden Hit Radius IGES Encapsulated PostScript format for printing to a PostScript printer and for importing into compati ble applications An individual document The tool that allows you to create an arc of a spec ified radius tangent to entities To convert a view of a 3D model into a 2D plane Flattening disassociates a view from a model allowing independent editing The assortment of type used in text This command enables you to create standardized title blocks Drafting notations for Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing The objects used to construct parts The rectangular array of lines that facilitates mea surement and alignment The
289. long the axis from the startpoint to the endpoint The six data fields are automatically filled in 9 Click OK and the selected geometry is now revolved around the axis as speci fied according to the right hand rule of revolution Right hand Rule of Revolution Axis of Revolution The direction of revolution is determined by the right hand rule of revolution which states that if the thumb is pointed toward the positive axis of revolution the revolu Direction of tion will be in the same direction in which the fingers are Pevolution curled Note When revolving a circle that will eventually be sur faced the Axis of Revolution should be on an endpoint not a quadrant i Work Plane The Work Plane is the plane on which you create your geometry It is an x y plane with an origin of 0 0 0 for all data input You can move the work plane as desired by creating your own or choosing one of the standard work planes available in Graphite As you learn to use Graphite you should attempt to use the Z Drafting Assistant without moving the work plane Even though the Z Drafting Assistant does a lot of the work for you the work plane is still an essential element of 3D modeling The Z Drafting Assistant assumes that geometry is being created in the current work plane unless it snaps to an align z or to a logical snap point that is not in the cur rent work plane If you are creating geometry that is not parallel to the current work plane
290. lor will be defined as chosen Repeat this process to define up to 170 colors yo OPN DS You save these colors as default color settings for all new files by choosing Lay out gt Preferences gt Save Preferences Editing User defined Colors You can edit the colors you have previously defined using a procedure similar to that for defining colors 1 Choose Pen gt Color gt Define 2 The Edit Colors dialog box appears 3 In the dialog box window scroll down and select one of your defined colors 4 Click Define The color display appears Edit the color Windows Click Define Custom Colors to display the full palette 5 Click OK to save the changes Pen Characteristics Tech Note The 64 predefined colors that came with Graphite cannot be redefined or edited 5 9 Basic Environment Settings 5 10 Add to Custom Colors Windows only This feature is standard for the Windows platform It allows the you to save 16 user defined colors for a particular file and display in the Custom colors area of the Color display when the Define command is chosen 1 Repeat steps 1 through 5 in the previous section Defining a Color and choose Define to show the partial color display 2 Place the cursor over one of the available aes click A dotted line appears around that See eee box to show that it is selected BEEBE eee Click Define Custom Colors and the full color display appears boxes in the Custom colors area a
291. low the objects When the dimension text appears you can drag it to a new location when you release the mouse button the dimension and extension lines are redrawn Horizontal Base Line Dimension Tool zA Kor 1 818 This tool dimensions objects or spaces horizontally from a a p base point Using the Horizontal Base Line Dimension Tool 1 Select the Horizontal Base Line Dimension tool The Message Line reads Horizontal Base Line Pick first dimension point Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Horizontal Base Line Pick second dimension point Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears above the first measured from the base point Continue clicking the points you want dimen sioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and exten sion lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects 12 7 Dimensions 12 8 Horizontal Chain Dimension Tool iil Er Er This tool dimensions objects or spaces from end to end horizontally Using the Horizontal Chain Dimension Tool 1 Select the Horizontal Chain Dimension tool The Message Line reads Horizontal Chain Pick first dimension point Click the first point on the geometry The Message Line now reads Horizontal Chain Pick second dimension point Click the point The di
292. lowing message The current view and the draft view have the same model you must change the model on the sheet Click the sheet out side all views then choose Views gt Models Click New and then click Current Repeat the above steps to flatten the view View Layouts Included with Graphite are layouts set up with various views that you can choose using the Sheet into View command in the Views menu You can also create your own view layouts In all but the Design vc6 each view has the same scale In the Design uc6 the Trimetric view is scaled as specified in the Sheet Into View dialog box and the other three views are scaled to 25 of the Trimetric view The default layouts available from the Sheet Into View command are as follows 14 25 Advanced Viewing Techniques View Top This layout shows the Top view of geometry just as it is seen in 2D D Views with Standard Drawing Formats A Landscape 4 VIEW vc6 Windows amp Macintosh 4 views for an A size sheet B Landscape 4 VIEW vc6 Windows amp Macintosh 4 views for a B size sheet C Landscape 4 VIEW vc6 Windows amp Macintosh 4 views for a C size sheet D Landscape 4 VIEW vc6 Windows amp Macintosh 4 views for a D size sheet 14 26 Views Design vc6 Windows Views Design 4 Macintosh This layout creates a Trimetric view at full sc
293. lta Section Arrow Text Line Circular Symbol Rectangular Symbol Rived Type Symbol Triangular Symbol User Definition Symbol End User Def Symbol Export Command 34 35 SLND Dimension or general elements 34 35 ASTX Dimension or general elements BALN Text Line Grouping general elements AROW Text Line Grouping general elements DELT Text Line Grouping general elements SECT Line Grouping general elements TXTL Line Text Grouping general elements DOT Circle Grouping general elements RECT Line Grouping general elements RIVT Line Grouping general elements TRIA Line Grouping general elements SYMB General elements Grouping general ele ments SYME General elements Grouping general ele ments This command in the File menu saves a document in the format you specify 1 Choose File gt Export The Export dialog box appears Importing and Exporting 2 Click the desired file type If you wish to export only selected objects on the screen rather than the entire document click Only Selected 3 Click OK The Export file dialog box appears The Export dialog box is identical in both appearance and function to the Save As dialog box For Windows filename extension indicates the type of export file Types of Files You can export the following file types Graphite DXF DWG IGES Ashlar Vellum s native file format AutoCAD s Data eXchange Format R14 and ACAD2000 fil
294. lues appear in the dialog box 2D Analysis OOOO cord 3 If necessary enter changes for the tolerance and weight per area values Tech Note Once you crosshatch the 4 Click CALCULATE area and you see that your The analysis recalculates and the new values appear in the dialog box selection is correct you can choose Undo to remove the crosshatching and still main The following items are included in the dialog box tain the selection Tech Note This tolerance value has no effect on the precision of the resultant values The preci sion of the result is set by choosing Layout gt Prefer ences gt Units Tolerance Weight Per Area 18 2 A setting to determine the accuracy of calculations for curved objects The smaller the tolerance is the higher the accuracy will be The default value is 0 01 You can change the value by entering a new number The 2D analysis mechanism analyzes arcs circles ellipses and splines as straight line segments that deviate from the true curve by no more than the stated tolerance value The smaller the number the greater the accuracy however the greater the accuracy the longer the calculation time A multiplier used to determine the actual weight of a part of constant thickness defined by a selected boundary The weight of the part is the product of the Area multiplied by the Weight Per Area The default entry is 1 You can change the value by entering a new n
295. lving para metric geometry Errors in parametrics are shown in bold lines drawn in the x y plane and independent of the z values of the highlighted lines The easiest way to see this is to look down on the x y plane by choosing Views gt View The Plane Parametrics and Grouped Objects In the drawing below the first phase of parametrics will deal with only four dimen sions W L L 2 and L 4 In the second phase the H and H 3 dimensions are evalu ated PN lt L72 i 16 29 Parametrics 16 30 Symbols In Graphite you can place any drawing as a symbol and open any symbol as a drawing You can create symbol documents for generic parameterized parts and then bring them into your drawing customizing the dimensions with each use Symbols are particularly useful for creating a library of standard designs common to your work For example you can create libraries of windows screws nuts or bolts Graphite distinguishes between e simple symbols which have neither parametric dimensions nor underlying value tables e parametric symbols with editable dimensions and e symbol libraries that contain parametric symbols with underlying value tables All commands you use to manipulate symbols can be found by choosing File gt Sym bols Most of the symbols shipped with Graphite are parametric symbols Parametric means that you can specify the symbol s final measurements just before placing it into a drawing
296. ly separated by semico lons The X Y or Z direction values can be filled in manually or indicated by a mouse click on the drawing area offset from the object The point 10 27 Editing Objects 10 28 Clicking the Options button displays this dialog box The Options dialog box contains the following settings Tolerance Max Iteration Mitered Joint Grouped Creating an Offset clicked determines which side of the object the off set should be performed The offset direction pos itive or negative value is also filled in the respective entry fields when you drag the offset distance since the vector you drag determines the Offset direction automatically Tolerance 05 Max Iteration 3 Mitered Joint Grouped Cancel OK For Spline and Ellipse objects the offset distance is approximated by a spline By setting a Tolerance for this type of object you can determine how accurate the offset is relative to its theoretical posi tion Graphite iterates when calculating the offset of Spline and Ellipse objects to improve the approxi mation the number of times indicated in the Max Iteration field The default value is 3 Setting a high value 100 1000 etc decreases performance If you mark this option the offset object will have square external corners instead of filleted corners This option is by default not selected The radius of the filleted corners is a
297. mart symbol ssa scecsesstacsptacspecsesecsss E a E AEN 17 5 Creatine a symbol d gumentar encerio an E E AEE yes 17 2 importing a Symbol sssini iiaeie a aE a OIG 17 4 Using symbols for smart windows and dooOfsS eseecseceeeceserereererere 17 5 Changing the characteristics of a block of text ceceeeeeteeeeeeeetetteees 11 3 Changing the size Of the text DOX sisicseccs tenses apesean hess sasatmnonaeannee ina 11 3 Using the Text tOOL seirinin nioan es ASEA RNA ENAA Hai 11 2 Creating Forms Title BlOCKS ispeci iinoa A R 15 40 FRIIS COR ecni A EEE E EEEO AISE 11 3 Extended font selections sicssscansscceasicstssartbedendaitonadendhhesdaaiiapainmeamenuagend shud nadine 11 5 Font Sizes and ANSI Standards sosina ia nanne nA EE ENEE 11 6 laponino A TEXT Eeo n E EET 11 2 Scaling text and dimensions manually seisis srunieiiiio niini 15 23 Specifying a non standard text SiZ oo ec eceeteeeeteeeeesteeeeeeteteeeseneeeesnneeeees 11 6 Text LAE TOOL mermerin o a seaman aces 11 12 Text SIZE and SCALING arenie inoaii i NA oaa Eiin 11 7 Units Using the Status Line to specify the unit of measure ees 5 22 STUDS ea a E e A E sais oabclgana E T A te once nmoaaeentces 5 20 Graphite Window Closing a didlog DOK irn a pen e E E E S 3 16 Choosing a command from a MENU ssssssssrisssttisttttit ttt t sterii Ettr EE rer terrere 3 12 Displaying a Graphite MENU isin siecsmeddecdteheisasanedensssaua i eiir anii iA 3 12 Selecting tool from the tool palette resser
298. mension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the last point clicked Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Horizontal Ordinate DimensionTool p x This tool dimensions objects or spaces horizontally 228 581 856 1 319 from a base point Using the Horizontal Ordinate Dimension Tool i Select the Horizontal Ordinate Dimension tool The Message Line reads Horizontal Ordinate Pick first dimension point Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Horizontal Ordinate Pick second dimension point Click the next point The dimension appears measured from the base point Click the next point for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the base point Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned If you want to display a dimension at the base point click the base point after you have dimensioned all other points Using the Dimension Tools You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Reminder To display the dimension number of the base point you have to click it twice at the first and the last dimension points Vertic
299. mension each fillet as explained ear lier BR T BR T BR BR T BR T 2 Relate this section to the rest of the geometry 3 Add a dimension to specify the dis 3 tance between the sections to Three sections are related as shown below 2 50 Y Parametrics and Grouped Objects This is the completed parametric drawing BR T BR T OL Boy 2 OL swy 2 A FW 2 DA Parametrics and Grouped Objects You can create many objects and then group them and treat them as a single parameterized object There must be a framework on which the group sits Dimen sion between two control points on the framework and then resolve the frame work the group changes accordingly shrinking or expanding proportionately to the distance between the control points You can create a spline and group it AA Then create a framework line between the endpoints and dimension the line L When you resolve for the length of the line L the spline changes accordingly 16 25 Parametrics 16 26 Using Parametrics and Grouped Geometry 1 2 3 4 5 6 Te 8 9 Create the geometry to be parameterized Select the geometry Choose Arrange gt Group Create a framework on which the grouped geometry sits Dimension between two control points You can use only one variable per group Select the framework the dimension and the group Choose Edit gt Resolve Enter the value f
300. metric dimension to a real value 1 2 4 gt 6 7 8 Choose Edit gt Selection Mask Highlight the four dimension types in the box on the left Only dimensions are selectable Choose Edit gt Select All All dimensions are selected Choose Edit gt Edit Objects Change the entry in the text data field to a symbol Click Apply Close the Edit Objects and Selection Mask dialog boxes Click the Selection tool to cancel the effect of the Selection Mask If you want different formats for different types of dimensions select each type sep arately Parametric Drafting Parametric Drafting This section describes how to modify standard drafting practices to accommodate parametrics It describes three examples with three topics to illustrate how to define parametric geometry completely Reminder e Define the geometry completely eDimension all geometry eRelate all geometry Do not include extraneous text eReturn to the original part between tests Dimension All Geometry Center lines require consideration if they are to be resolved properly Problem If you create the circle shown with two centerlines paramet rics can resolve the circle but not the centerlines because the endpoints of the lines are not defined Solutions A Using the Pen Style Center If you look at this problem as a connect the dots problem you can see that the cen terlines have no dots to define them 1 You can construct the centerli
301. minimum amount of material within its specified tolerance limit For holes the swept area is the largest and the drill bit drills the largest hole For shafts the tolerance is the smallest allowable dimension In the example above this material condition symbol means that the tolerance 002 applies to the location of the largest hole 315 As the hole size nears its lower limit 310 the tolerance for the location of the hole increases from 002 to 007 the tolerance for the location 002 plus the tolerance for size 005 Regardless of Feature Size The Regardless of Feature Size RFS material condition means the tolerance applies regardless of the size of the feature within the specified tolerance limit For holes the location tolerance is the same regardless of whether the hole is the smallest or largest allowable size For shafts the roundness tolerance is the same regardless of the shaft diameter In the example above this material condition symbol in the feature control frame 002 applies to the location of the hole whether the hole is at its smallest 310 or Geometric Characteristics largest 315 This material condition would control an axis in space so you proba bly wouldn t use Regardless of Feature for this hole Datum The last three sections of the frame show the alignment order to position the part This is easier to see in a part which does not have perpendicular sides A typical engineering drawi
302. mmand The Right Hand Rule This command displays the view orientation submenu so that you can set the orientation of the sheet view or active view window The standard views Front Isometric Right Top and Trimetric are always displayed in this menu You can create new views with the Define View command and those views will be listed in this menu Views can also be selected from the Trackball menu See Chap Hatten view ter 14 for more information on Define View Auto Front The selected view orientation affects the active area the sheet view or the active view window 6 11 Advanced Environment Settings D rawi n g Too l S Referral For more information about the Drafting Assistant see This chapter describes how to create geometric objects that are the building blocks NSP apter 4 for your designs through the use of Graphite s drawing tools It also describes how the Drafting Assistant helps you design faster and easier The following topics are contained in this chapter e Drawing Techniques e The Status Line e The Message Line e Drawing Tools Description and Use Drawing begins with the tool palette located at the left of the Ashlar Graphite drawing area shown below The tool palette has seven subpal ettes of tools that you can use to E create and select geometric objects These seven tools are the drawing tools Graphite Untitled 1 Selection tools 7 2 K Line tools gt N
303. mouse button The work plane in the sheet view or active view window rotates as specified and the work plane name is checked in the submenu Since you have only changed the plane the appearance of your geometry its view orientation remains unchanged Therefore you may also want to set the view to match the current work plane If you want to move both the origin and change the orientation of the work plane use either the 3 Point Plane command or the Define Plane command Specifying the Position of the Work Plane In conventional CAD programs you have to specify both the orientation of the work plane and its exact location along the z axis In Graphite you need only to specify the orientation of the work plane Once that is done then all planes parallel to that orientation act equally as the current work plane e g the Drafting Assistant identi fies the location of the work plane automatically z z Parallel current work plane Origin __ Origin JZ m Grid Pea xX When you identify one point of an the new object geometry is created on object with the Drafting Assistant the plane of the identified object Zz Work plane Origin Grid x gt If you do not identify an object the new object geometry is placed onto the work plane at the origin Another way to explain the relationship presented in the graphics above is to remember the role of the Drafting Assistant For new geometry to be placed on the same
304. n points within the model and observing the visual and real intersections of lines 3D wireframe models are most useful for pulling off multiple views and doing 2D dimensioning and drafting on those views This lets you do your design in 3D and then produce 2D working drawings from that 3D model 2 1 Graphite Overview Referral The definition of models is also discussed in Chapter 3 The Model A Model exists in 3D space in the computer s memory whether the geometry is two or three dimensional A model is any combination of geometry such as lines arcs circles dimensions text etc Models are created in an infinitely large three dimen sional area n the following graphics each model has its own imaginary 3D model space Models are not created directly on the sheet What you see on the sheet is only a projected view of the model A sheet in Graphite is an infinite 2D planar area always aligned parallel to the screen that displays an image of one or more models You view the model as if looking through a camera while it moves around the model The image of a model is picked up by either a sheet camera or a detail view camera The sheet camera projects the image directly onto the sheet called a Sheet View The detail view camera projects the image into a view window called a Detail View which rests on the sheet Sheets do not actually contain any geometry only images of geometry Your computer screen displays all
305. n Tool 9 1 Select the Oblique Base Line Dimension tool The Message Line reads Oblique Base Line Pick first dimension point 122 G 2 Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Vertical Base Line Pick second dimension point Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears to the right of the first measured from the base point Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Oblique Chain Dimension Tool g This tool dimensions objects and spaces point to point end to end The results shown reflect colin ear dimension points Using Oblique Chain Dimension Tool 1 Select the Oblique Chain Dimension tool The Message Line reads Oblique Chain Pick first dimension point Using the Dimension Tools 2 Click the first point on the geometry The Message Line now reads Oblique Chain Pick second dimension point Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the last point clicked Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in t
306. n be modified When you want to create your own drawing formats it is recommended to modify existing formats and save them under a new name Creating Drawing Formats and Design Layouts for Laser Printers 1 Open in the Layout folder within the Graphite folder the drawing format 1ViewB vc6 Windows or a Format B amp View Macintosh where 1View stands for the number of detail views and B for the paper format 2 Save the drawing under a new name 3 Choose Layout gt Drawing Size The Drawing Size dialog box displays 4 Mark the Always Display Page Bounds option The Printing area of your active Laser Printer displays as a gray rectangle 5 Click OK The Drawing Size dialog box closes 6 Select the grouped drawing format on the drawing area and ungroup the format by choosing Arrange gt Ungroup Forms Title Blocks 7 Adjust the border lines of the drawing format until they are placed exactly on top of the displayed gray rectangle for the printing area of your laser printer Delete all cutting lines since they are not required for print on a laser printer 9 Hide the TitleBlocks layer All Text Entries are hidden See the next section for information about title blocks and text entries 10 Select the complete drawing format by choosing Edit gt Select All and group the format by choosing Arrange gt Group Important Text entries with an character in front must not be grouped since then the Forms command cannot identify these e
307. n change your mind press the ESC key or choose Undo to remove the last line Pressing the BACKSPACE Windows or DELETE Macintosh key removes all connected lines in the current construction The Message Line changes after the beginning point is chosen asking you to pick the endpoint and also reminding you to double click when you want to complete the series of segments 3 Indicate the last point by double clicking or by choosing another tool After completing at least one segment with the Connected Lines tool you can cre ate a tangent arc off of the last line by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key the pointer temporarily changes to an arc icon and 7 9 Drawing Tools 7 10 clicking or dragging to the next point The Message Line notes this added feature Several tangent arcs can be strung together by continuing to hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key Note The radius of these arcs cannot be edited with this method The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the beginning the rel ative location of the end delta X and delta Y the line length and the angle from horizontal Once the line segment is created line Length is the selected status field By entering successive sets of data and hitting ENTER Windows or RETURN Mac intosh after each set a continuous string of connected lines can be entered from the keyboard X y dX dY A
308. n green Notes e Layers can be saved as Preferences with specified colors e Layers do not have an orientation or origin in Graphite Layers Command CTRL L Windows L Macintosh This command in the Layout menu allows you to create delete hide show and rename layers as well as set layer specifications The work layer is the active layer the layer on which the current construction is created You cannot hide or delete a layer that is the current active work layer The visible layers are indicated in the list box by an Eye Symbol and a check mark indicates the work layer Layers 13 6 Layers When you open a new drawing the default layers include Construction Dimension and Layer 1 Construction This layer automatically accepts all Construction lines created with stroke commands or with the Construction dialog box All lines of the construc tion line type go on the current work layer not this construction layer Dimension Dimensions are placed on the layer you select from the Layer list of the Dimension menu The default layer is the Dimension layer Generally this layer should be reserved for dimensions Layer 1 This layer is the current work layer when you open a new file If the file only contains the default lay ers all geometry is normally placed on Layer 1 You can edit any geometry or text that is visible regardless of its layer If you want to make some geometry unselectable but st
309. n perform some other Windows related task To redisplay the window double click the icon Parts of the Graphite Window Maximize Restore Displays the window full or partial screen Once the window appears full screen click the button again to restore it to its previous size Macintosh Close Box Zoom Box L J Close Box Closes the window when you click on it If you attempt to close the window without saving your work Graphite displays a message so you can decide whether to save or not Zoom Box Toggles the window size between the previous size and full size Tool Palette A tool palette is a group of tool icons along the left side of the screen The icons represent the tools for drawing editing and annotating geometry Selection tools Line tools Arc tools Circle tools Ellipse tools Polygon tools Spline tools Text tools Dimension tools Fille Chamfer tools Trim tools Transformation tools View Control tools Orbit tools Selecting a Tool from the Tool Palette 1 Position the arrow pointer on the icon of the tool you want to use 2 Click the mouse button The icon appears highlighted to indicate its selection The Single Line tool is selected here The Basics 3 6 Tool Subpalettes Most of the tools in the tool palette contain a subpalette of tools with related func tions The arrow in the lower right corner of the tool icon represents the presence of a subpalette whi
310. n the first phase parametrics ignores the z coordinates of the selected geometry and resolves the geometry as it does in 2D Any dimension that is not completely in a plane parallel to the x y plane is also ignored In other words the x and y coordinates are resolved and the z coordinates are not changed In the second phase parametrics adjusts the z coordinates as necessary All linear dimensions parallel to the z axis are examined and every point in the selected geometry is considered to define a plane parallel to the x y plane The dimensions in the z direction define the required distances between these planes Unlike the first phase in the second phase parametrics is very tolerant of missing dimensions If the dimensions do not completely define the distance between any two planes then the distance is not changed In phase two any line or arc that does not lie in a plane parallel to the x y plane is modified appropriately because the defining points are adjusted by parametrics and the line or arc is changed accordingly This includes all lines parallel to the z axis and any oblique lines at any angle to all three axes Parametrics deals with all geometry in the current work plane coordinates Conse quently it is a good idea to set up a view that looks down the z axis of the work plane onto the x y plane In this way you can see what the first phase of the oper ation sees This is particularly useful if you encounter problems reso
311. n the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the lower left point The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the lower left point and the length and angle of the major and minor axes of the ellipse Y L1 A1 L2 A2 90 3 Point Center Ellipse Tool This tool in the fifth subpalette of the main tool palette constructs an ellipse inscribed within the parallelogram calculated from three specified points the center point the midpoint of a side and a corner of the parallelogram Using the 3 Point Center Ellipse Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads 3 Point Center Ellipse Pick center of the ellipse Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh The Message Line will guide you through each successive step Drawing Tools 2 Indicate the center of the ellipse 3 Indicate the midpoint of the side of the rectangle defining the ellipse 4 Indicate the corner of the rectangle defining the ellipse If the three points are on the vertical or horizontal axis a straight line is drawn You can create a copy of the last ellipse by holding down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the center The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center point and the length
312. nal objects after the Trim tool is selected see the Message Line Simple Trim Tool x This tool in the tenth subpalette of the main tool palette shortens a line to the specified boundary If you hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macin tosh key while using this tool it becomes the Relimit tool Rule Point to what you want to remove Using the Simple Trim Tool 1 Select the object that limits the trim 2 Select the Trim tool The Message Line reads Simple Trim Pick section to trim Shift Select boundary Ctrl Relimit Windows or Option Relimit Macin tosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the section of the object to be discarded There are no Status Line entries Relimit Tool This tool in the tenth subpalette of the main tool palette lengthens or shortens a line to the specified boundary If you hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while using this tool it becomes the Trim tool Rule Point to what you want to keep Using the Relimit Tool 1 Select the object that limits the change 10 5 Editing Objects 10 6 2 Select the Relimit tool The Message Line reads Relimit Pick section to retain Shift Select boundary Ctrl Trim Windows or Option Trim Macintosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more boundary objects 3 Click the section of the object that you want to remain There are no Status Line entr
313. ncate 6 125 Fractional Part sqrt 8 75 Absolute Value abs 47 16 3 5 2 4 Smallest Larger ceiling 5 25 Integer 4e 3 Largest Smaller floor 12 75 Integer exp 2 7 Negative Value neg 11 12 Appendix A Operators and Units Sine of Angle sin 15 Round round 11 12 Cosine of cos 30 Random in randO Angle range 0 to 23 Math operators are case sensitive so be sure to type them in lower case when you use them You can use these operators to edit objects make entries in the Status Line and specify values in dialog boxes Conditional Expressions Conditional expressions are particularly useful with parametrics when an expression depends on a condition For example a flange might depend on the diameter of a pipe but should never be smaller than some minimum size You can use two func tion forms of conditional expressions ife se and RNG range ifelse condition expression1 expression2 Condition The result of a boolean expression equals not equals greater than gt greater than or equals lt less than lt less than or equals amp amp logical and logical or logical not expression1 The value of the ifelse function if the condition is true expression2 The value of the ifelse function if the condition is false The following examples show boolean expressions and an ifelse statement Length gt 5 The length is greater than 5 a lt 3 QW gt 2 Either the length is less than 3 or the width is
314. nce you define a new window that is substituted for the original one If you cannot see the content of the view window after you have applied the Resize command choose Arrange gt Zoom All with the SHIFT Win dows or CONTROL Macintosh key pressed This fits all the geometry of that model into that view window at the necessary view scale When you are trying to fit a view or group of views in a drawing format you may have to scale a view 1 In the Detail View window s Control menu choose Properties 2 Specify the scale you want and click OK Copying a View Window You can use the view window menu to make another view window in case you want to add to or change the arrangement you selected with Sheet Into View 1 Click inside the window to make it active 2 Choose Copy from the view window control menu 3 Choose Edit gt Paste The copy of the window appears slightly offset from the original window You View Displays Tip You can also scroll within a view by holding down the SHIFT Windows or the CONTROL Macintosh key while moving the scrollbars 13 19 Viewing Geometry 13 20 can drag it to a new location Panning the Geometry in a View Window 1 Click inside the window to make it active 2 Choose Pan from the view window menu The pointer changes to a mover hand icon 3 Drag the geometry to the location you want Zooming within a View 1 Click inside the view to make it active
315. nced Environment Settings This chapter describes the various advanced options that you have for adapting Graphite to your needs The following topics are covered e Customization e File Organization e 3D Viewing Floating Tool Palette Graphite s standard tool palette is fixed at the left side of the Graphite window But you may display an additional Floating tool palette which you can drag and place anywhere on the screen Displaying the Floating Tool Palette 1 Press and hold the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh 2 Drag the mouse pointer first down and then up 3 Release the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh The Floating tool palette displays You can close the Floating tool palette by double clicking the Control menu Win dows or the Close box Macintosh in the upper left corner of the Floating tool palette 6 Advanced Environment Settings 6 2 Macros The Macro capability of Graphite allows you to create macros and access them through menu commands stroke commands or key combinations providing an alternative way to invoke Graphite commands A macro automates a repetitive task by executing a group of simple commands If you can point and click you can define a macro That s how easy it is Macro Command If you choose Utilities gt Macro the following dialog box displays The Macro dialog box is modeless in the sense that there are no Start Record
316. nd Move the cursor to the color palette and drag it to the color you desire You can also adjust the of black in the color by dragging the arrow in the scroll bar to the right to the desired location 5 Click Add to Custom Colors The color f Custom colors appears in the Custom colors patch a 6 To fill in the others boxes go through the See eee same process EEE Eee ee If a name has not been assigned to one of these colors previously the program will choose the next available undefined color number to assign to the color You will have to later rename it for your own purposes Saving Colors Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences to save the colors you have defined Colors created for a specific file are saved with the file if they have not been saved using Save Preferences Windows only Custom Color only saves with a specific file See the previous sec tion Customizing the Color Palette This feature allows you to choose which colors display in the Palette when you choose Pen gt Color gt Palette Displaying a Color in the Palette 1 Choose Pen gt Color gt Define 2 3 Select the color you want to display Click Use An eye icon appears next to the color name You can also click in the blank space to the left of the name to display the icon When you choose Pen gt Color gt Palette the color patch has been added to the palette Removing a Color from the Palette T 2 3 Choose Pen g
317. nd Tools 8 3 3D Drawing Tools Extrude Command This command in the 3D menu allows you to take 2D geometry and make it 3D through a simple extrusion process You also have the option to extrude as a sur face When you begin thinking about using this command consider the following points e Which face shows the most detail e Will the extrusion be uniform or do some portions of the part have different dimensions For example the top view of a bracket provides the most detail Draw it with the Connected Lines tool on the tool pal ette Once you have the basic shape drawn you can use the Extrude command from the 3D menu to create the depth of the bracket Once extruded you can add some circles and extrude them to create holes in the bracket Using the Extrude Command 1 Draw the geometry to be extruded 2 Select the geometry if it is not already selected 3 Choose 3D gt Extrude Extrude 4 Enter the distance and direction or drag to specify the extrusion Positive or negative values indicate the direction 3D Features and Tools The Tab key can be used to move between the x y and z coordinate data fields 5 Click OK and the geometry is extruded Notes e Xand Y are on the current work plane and Z is perpendicular to that plane This is not necessarily relative to the original x y z axes that were used when the geometry was constructed e If the object was drawn in the x y
318. nes which are a superset of Bezier curves These splines are curves created by a com plex mathematical formula NURB splines provide designers with two interrelated functions First curvature continuity remains intact when the curve is changed Kinks don t develop as the spline is altered Second NURB splines provide localized control of a complex curve You can isolate an area and make changes without affecting the remainder of the spline These properties are essential in aerodynamic designs Air molecules moving over a wing surface must flow smoothly for maximum aero dynamic lift If the surface does not maintain curvature continuity the air molecules separate from the wing surface and cause a vacuum Such a vacuum causes an eddy as the molecules try to fill it This disruption of air flow increases the drag which is not a part of an effec tive design The automotive industry needs smooth air flow to improve gas mileage Complete curvature continuity also improves styling The appearance of a car is one of the major sales factors The potential buyer would not be impressed if the showroom 7 23 Drawing Tools 7 24 lights reflection on the car rippled and wavered It is complete curvature continuity that makes a smooth reflection Localized control of complex curves allows you to make minor modifications with out adversely affecting the shape For example if a new bigger engine wouldn t fit under a perfectly designed h
319. nes so their endpoints are on the circle as shown here 16 9 Parametrics 16 10 2 You can include dimensions for the center i D 5 gt lines The dimensions should be variables j D 2 25 based on the diameter of the circle so ne when you specify the diameter of the cir D 2 25 E D 5 cle the centerlines are drawn relative to the diameter B Using the Circle Center Line Tool 1 Use the Circle Center Line tool to place the center line on your circle 2 Dimension the diameter of the circle and one of the center lines relative to the diam D eter You can either dimension the center line from endpoint to endpoint or from the D 5 center of the circle to one endpoint of a center line Relate All Geometry All parts of the geometry must be related Baa i X Problem BA Y Both squares could be drawn by the Y y parametric mechanism but there is no way to determine their relative positions Solution px x You can add a constraint line and dimen 4 A sion between the squares to connect the Y Y dots L Ki Additional Tips elo ee Constraint line 1 The added dimension is an example of using a constant value Of course you could have entered a variable expression such as x y for the constraint line 2 Constraint lines are ordinary lines usually drawn with the Single Line tool They can be any line style but they should be different from the lines of the regular geometry The Constructi
320. ng a title bar and control button for its pull down menu as in the right graphic above Inactive view Active view The sheet view is made active by clicking in the drawing area away from all detail views In other words all the detail views look inactive You must activate the sheet to construct geometry that is outside of a view A view must be active for you to work in it Either a detail view is active or the sheet view is active but only one can be active at a time Dimensions and hatch pattern only on the sheet View Window The view window includes a title bar size box Puliidownimenu and Control pull down menu only when the p bar detail view is active You can drag the view around by the title bar and resize the window by dragging the size box Size box P Control Pull down Menu The Control pull down menu provides options for manipulating the view Bo Properties Cut Copy Delete Pan Resize View Displays Tech Note In the Graphite View win dow the Control Menu in the upper left corner does not contain the standard control commands but special view window commands 13 17 Viewing Geometry Properties Tech Note t Using Cut or Copy within the ii Detail View does not cut or copy the geometry inside but rather cuts or copies the detail view itself To cut or copy just the geometry use these commands from
321. ng might appear as shown below 1315 310 M A B IC B A For proper drilling alignment and measurement this part would lie on a flat surface Surface A with Side B pushed against the first straight edge and then Side C pushed against the other straight edge GD amp T tells a manufacturer which surface to align first If you align the part with Side C before Side B the holes do not line up in the same way as they would if you align with Side B before Side C The rule for points of contact per surface is as follows Surface Point of Contact minimum 20 9 GD amp T 20 10 1st 3 2nd 2 3rs 1 Datum Material Condition When showing a datum in a feature control frame you also have the option of indi cating a material condition Such a modifier should only be specified for a datum that is an axis or centerplane of a feature such as a hole or boss Material Condition modifiers do not apply to planes such as the straight side or flat bottom of a part Composite GD amp T Symbols A composite symbol uses more than one line of the feature control frame to specify more than one tolerance for the same feature aE LLM LA _ _ as 4 498 J 001 1 0 The first line of the feature control frame means that the hole must be straight throughout within a cylindrical
322. ns symbols for smart windows and smart doors These symbols work like regular Graphite symbols in that they are parameterized and you can place and orient them on your drawing In addition they break into any smart wall they touch and the cut area of the smart wall fills in if you move or delete the smart symbol 2D Analysis The 2D Analysis provides sectional properties for the selected geometry a feature that is useful for many calculations related to design and drafting Architects can use the perimeter and area values for calculating material requirements engineers can use the moments of inertia for stress analysis manufacturers can use the cen troid for balancing parts for turning The following topics are covered in this sec tion e 2D Analysis e Calculations 2D Analysis Command This command in the Layout menu displays the statistics on the selection the length of the perimeter the enclosed area the center of gravity centroid and i Tech Note moments of inertia The selection must be a closed figure The closed figure is an area that could be crosshatched If you are in doubt about the Performing 2D Analysis 1 Select the geometry that defines a closed boundary You may want to use the area simply crosshatch the Tracer tool to select the perimeter geometry to see if it repre sents the area you want to 2 Choose Layout gt 2D Analysis analyze 18 1 2D Analysis The analysis is performed and the va
323. nt 2 Click the base point of the geometry The Message Line now reads Perpendicular Base Line Pick second dimension point Click the point The dimension appears Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears above the first measured from the base point Continue clicking the points you want dimen sioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and exten sion lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Perpendicular Chain Dimension Tool Y This tool dimensions between points or objects perpendicular to an existing baseline 6 E 2 470 Using the Perpendicular Chain Dimension Tool 1 Select the Perpendicular Chain Dimension tool The Message Line reads Perpendicular Chain Pick first dimension point 2 Click the first point on the geometry The Message Line now reads Perpendicular Chain Pick second dimension point 3 Click the point The dimension appears Using the Dimension Tools 4 Click the next place for the dimension This dimension appears measured from the last point clicked Continue clicking all the points you want dimensioned You can drag each dimension to a new location Dimension and extension lines automatically redraw Click the points in the opposite order if you want the dimension to display below the objects Perpendicular Ordinate Dimension Tool En This tool dimens
324. nt of the step 7 Click at the end of the entry in the X Length data field 8 Type 2 to multiply the width of the geometry by two 9 Click OK VVVYYY The geometry duplicates in a linear array Polar Duplicate Command This command in the Edit menu allows you to copy and rotate the selected geometry When you duplicate an object in a circular array you can spec ify the number of duplications the cen ter of the array and whether the objects are copied in a rotated orientation or an upright orientation When you select this command the dialog box appears 1 t G q Y Reference Point qF Duplicating Objects The Polar Duplicate dialog box con tains the following settings Number Center X Center Y Total Angle Step Angle Rotated Objects Upright Objects Rotated Objects Upright Objects Polar Duplicate Number 4 Rotated Objects Center X 0 O Upright Objects Center Y 0 Ref X Total Angle 360 Ref Y Step Angle 90 Cancel OK The total number of objects you want Be sure to include the selected object itself in this total count The Center X and Y values determine the center of the circular array The Center X and Center Y can be set by entering values or by clicking the mouse in the drawing area The total number of degrees between the center of the selected obj
325. nt when you are working on another view This command only works for views Bring To Front Command This command in the Views menu brings the specified view to the front of the stack of views 1 Select the view 2 Choose Views gt Bring To Front This command counteracts the Auto Front command so when you click you select objects in the view rather than activating another view Views Menu 13 21 Viewing Geometry Send To Back Command This command in the Views menu sends the specified view to the back of the stack of views 1 Select the view 2 Choose Views gt Send To Back This counteracts the Auto Front command so when you click you activate another view rather than selecting objects Draw View Boundaries Command This command in the Views menu shows the boundaries of all inactive views This boundary will be printed if you leave it displayed when you choose the Print com mand If you want to print the view without boundaries in the Views menu deactivate Draw View Boundaries Windows This submenu on the Views menu shows the names of all the open Graphite docu ments To bring a different document to the top window choose it from the sub menu 13 22 Views Menu Navigator Palette The Navigator Palette allows you to easily move through sheets and layers in a circular file fashion It can also display the active dovuments and iso late layers Sheet Navigation Click on the S gt button to mo
326. nting 15 28 Scale 3 14 Tiled printing 15 29 Using 15 26 Drawing tools 3D 8 1 Arc 7 12 Circle 7 15 Ellipse 7 17 Line 7 7 Polygon 7 21 Spline 7 23 Dual dimensions 12 24 Duplicate commands Linear 10 22 Polar 10 25 DWG Export C 1 Import 15 9 15 15 C 2 Notes C 1 DXF Configuration files 15 21 Index Export effects 15 16 Import 15 9 15 15 Import effects 15 11 Dynamic construction lines Constructing geometry 4 9 Existing geometry 4 9 Attributes 19 8 Bill of Materials 19 15 BOM layout 19 12 Color 5 9 Crosshatching 11 17 Item numbers 19 10 Macros 6 5 Menu 3 10 Objects 10 1 10 29 Pattern 5 17 Pen style 5 2 5 19 Symbol 17 5 Text 11 3 View 14 24 Editing commands Copy 10 19 Cut 10 19 Delete 10 21 Paste 10 20 Redo 10 21 Remove dots 10 22 Undo 10 21 Editing tools Chamfer 10 2 Fillet 10 2 Transformation 10 2 10 7 Trim 10 2 Ellipse tools 7 17 2 Point Center 7 18 3 Corner 7 20 3D 8 3 3 Point Center 7 19 Opposite Corner 7 19 Index Endpoint 4 2 Environment settings Advanced 6 1 Basic 5 1 EPS 15 19 Export 15 16 Export effects 15 18 Import 15 9 Equals A 2 Erasing geometry 10 20 Exit command 15 6 Expand Shrink tool 10 10 Exponentiation A 1 Export Bill of Materials 19 15 Command 15 14 Convert 15 15 Tips 15 21 Export type Bitmap 15 16 BMI 15 16 15 20 DWG C 1 EPS 15 16 IGES 15 15 MetaFiles 15 16 Pict 15 16 Text 15 15 Extrude Command 8 4 E Feature control fram
327. ntries as title entries see a later section Creating Forms 11 Activate the TitleBlocks layer 12 Save your work Forms Title Blocks By using the Forms command in the AutoText submenu of the Text menu you can fill in text or values within a dialog box for the title blocks of all standard drawing formats that are saved in the Layout folder of the Graphite folder Graphite allows you to create your own drawing formats that you can use with the Forms com mand This is described in a later section of this chapter As long as no standard drawing format is placed in a drawing the Forms command is not available It can be only selected if you place a drawing format with a title block using the Import command in the File menu or the Sheet into View command in the Views menu Creating Forms Title Blocks Before you can use the Forms command in the AutoText submenu to fill in your own drawing formats you have to prepare the title blocks of these formats To enable Graphite to identify the title blocks the user must define fields in the drawing format To define a field create a regular text block but type an charac ter in front of the text Any text following an character then becomes a field For example for an entry field Scale create a text block and type in Scale If you want a label in front of the field create another text block without an character 15 33 Graphite Documents 15 34 The following i
328. ntrol point on the box to point on the box to make it make it larger or smaller 1 larger or smaller We eee re Nee a In the Edit menu Selectable Points must be active for selecting the control points of the text box Moving Text 1 Choose the Selection tool R 2 Select the text object you want to move 3 Move the cursor over the text object The cursor becomes a 4 way Move sym bol 4 4 Place the 4 way Move symbol at the desired handle location using the Drafting Assistant notations as a guide 5 Drag the text object to the new location Spell Check Spell Check any text item in a drawing by using this command To use the spell check feature you must first select the text to be checked then go to Text gt Spell Check The spell check dialog box operates the same as any other spelling checker You must have the required files in the directory named Spell of your Graphite application folder The user requested additions are compiled in the userdic tlx file Text Text Menu The Text menu contains commands for changing the text font size and style as well as the justification spacing and indentation Font This command in the Text menu changes the font for selected text or future text entries The fonts listed in the menu are those installed on your computer and include Ashlar s Font Plotter fonts Use a Plotter font whenever you are creating text for a drawing that you int
329. o perform a model change either by the Models command or by the Sheets command in which the Sheet camera moves automatically to the related model Detail View cameras display their views via Detail View projectors in view win dows which rest on the sheet You can install as many Detail cameras as you want even if each one is looking at one model You install Detail cameras by creating Detail views either by the Detail View tool from the tool palette or with the Sheet Into View command You can move Detail View cameras to another model by performing a model change when the view window is active Combining Sheets Views and Models e Both cameras the Sheet camera and a Detail View camera can look only at one model at a time Using Sheets Views and Models We listed many rules in the sections above and they all describe the same fact that Graphite administrates geometry models views and sheets separately That has a lot of advantages The most impressive example is if you delete a sheet displaying geometry The geometry is not lost since you have not deleted the related model If you practice the following examples and implement them in your daily work using Models Sheets and Views will become second nature and you will never want to work without them Recovering from Deleting a Sheet Displaying Geometry To restore the geometry displayed on a sheet you deleted unintentionally proceed as follows m Select Views gt Sheets
330. objects only once since i the next values you enter in the Status Line do not refer to the new position of the moved point s but always to the original one That means if you enter in our Sizing Objects with Tools Referral Sizing with the Expand Shrink tool is described in an earlier section 10 17 Editing Objects 10 18 example 1 in the X data field and 1 in the Y data field the point is not moved back to its original position but in the opposite direction referring to its original position Selected Sizing versus Expand Shrink Tool Dragging a control point of a selected object changes the size of the object but it also distorts the object changing the proportion between height and width R The Expand Shrink tool on the Transformation subpalette enables you to resize geometry while maintaining its proportions Use the Expand Shrink tool to enlarge or shrink a shape proportionally In addition you can specify proportions by clicking points on other geometry For example you can resize an object to fit within another object by clicking the boundary into which the resized object must fit Selected Sizing versus Stretch Tool You can drag one control point of an object for selected sizing as shown in the pre vious section Using the Stretch tool however you can resize along one axis and at a specified angle See an earlier section on this tool Editing Commands Four commands
331. oint The selected point displays as a square Selectable Points This command in the Edit menu gives you the ability to select points that aren t dis played When Selectable Points is not set you cannot select points by dragging a fence If points are displayed simply click the point to select it If points are not displayed you can select a point by dragging a selection fence around it lowing example illustrates the use of Selectable Points The line s control point is y p TT selected with the rectangle The line s control pointisnot gt selected with the rectangle With Selectable Points turned on the Move tool moves the lower rectangle and the line endpoint With Selectable Points turned off the Move tool moves the lower rectangle but not the line endpoint The fol Selection Process Selecting Objects Editing Objects Once you create an object you can select and alter it by choosing a command or selecting a tool to edit it This chapter describes the common editing activities you can perform on a selected object and compares different methods for performing the same action The specific topics covered are e Editing Tools e Moving Objects with Tools e Copying Objects with Tools e Sizing Objects with Tools e Editing Commands e Duplicating Objects e Changing the Characteristics of Objects e
332. ommand You can also paste the selection into another document or into a document created with another application If you want to create an even distribution of geometry in the Edit menu you can Linear Duplicate or Polar Duplicate Rules 1 If the object was cut or copied from a Graphite document when it is pasted into another Graphite document it goes on the layer with the same name from which it was cut or copied A pasted selection retains its original attributes Any geometry on a layer that is not in the new Graphite document is placed on the current work layer So make sure that the new document has all the layers of the pasted geometry by creating those corresponding layers in the new document before you paste the geometry 2 Objects cut or copied from non Graphite documents are pasted onto the work layer The Clipboard The Cut and Copy commands place a copy of the selected object on the Clipboard The Clipboard is a buffer a temporary storage place that holds the last cut or cop ied selection The contents of the Clipboard are objects not bitmaps or picts Erasing Geometry You can use several methods to erase objects e You can select the object s then press the BACKSPACE Windows or DELETE Macintosh key You can retrieve what you deleted with the Undo command Editing Commands e You can select the object s then choose the Delete command from the Edit menu You can retrieve what you deleted with the Un
333. ommand removes lines of zero length The command that draws geometry according to the specific measurements you indicate See Para metrics A memory aid for the relative directions of the pos itive axes With your right palm upturned the thumb X points right the index finger CY points straight ahead and the middle finger Z points up If you move your hand to indicate the X and Y axes you can easily see the direction of the Z axis A memory aid in which the thumb of the right hand points in the direction of the positive axis of rotation The fingers curve in the direction of rota tion The tool used to divide a line or curve at specific boundaries The tool that selects objects Usually subsequent actions affect only the selection Also used to move selected geometry Sheet Slope Smart Symbol Smart Wall Snap Snap Command Spline Status Line Stretch Tool Symbol Libraries Symbol Tangent Textblocks An unbounded region for drawing You can think of a sheet as one page in a set of blueprints The change of x relative to y between two points on a line In a spline slope defines the vector of a line tangent to the spline at a particular knot point A symbol created with the Smart Wall tool which is automatically incorporated into a smart wall A tool to create special double walls automatically trimming overlapping intersections The Preferences command that allows you to set the spec
334. on Tools e Dimension Appearance e Parametric Dimensions Dimension Menu The Dimension menu contains commands for displaying the palette of dimension ing tools and for setting the format and tolerance limits for dimensions When you are ready to start dimensioning choose Dimension gt Show Palette to display the dimension palette beside the tool palette The dimension palette can be moved so that it doesn t obscure your work If you want to dismiss the palette choose Dimension gt Hide Palette You select dimension tools in the same way you select tools from the tool palette The first four tools have subpalettes which also work like the subpalettes of the tool palette 12 1 Dimensions 12 2 Associative Dimensions Graphite s geometric dimensions are associative when you make a change to the geometry the dimension changes also This is not true if you have entered a man ual dimension entered a value for the in the dimension text data field in order to use parametrics This associativity is a tremendous time saver because dimensions automatically update whenever you make a change in the geometry You can even change the units from English to metric one setting in the Preferences submenu in the Layout menu and every dimension on your drawing will reflect the change When you extend a line by selecting the endpoint of the line and dragging it to a new position the dimension changes also because the dimension has a control
335. on is placed on the outside of the selected object When the dimen sion appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the loca tion you clicked You can drag the text to a new location For 3D geometry radial dimensions are created in the plane of the arc or fillet Radial Arrow In Dimension Tool x R 2 385 This tool measures the radius of a circle arc or fillet with the arrow inside the geometry eee Using the Radial Arrow In Dimension Tool 1 Select the Radial Arrow In Dimension tool The Message Line reads Radial Arrow In Select arc circle 2 Click near the circle arc or fillet you want to dimension If you click outside it the dimension text appears outside and if you click inside it appears inside Either way the arrow line starts from the arc center The dimension text appears inside the object The arrow line starts from the arc center When the dimension appears the leader line is placed at the nearest 15 increment from the location you clicked You can drag the text to a new loca tion For 3D geometry radial dimensions are created in the plane of the arc or fillet Using the Dimension Tools Diametral Arrow Out Dimension Tool 838 i This tool measures the diameter of a cir cle 838 Using the Diametral Arrow Out Dimension Tool 1 Select the Diametral Arrow Out Dimension tool The Message Line reads Diametral Arrow Out Select arc circle 2 Click
336. on line style is a good choice Parametric Drafting 3 If you place the constraint line and dimension on a layer named Constraints you can hide that layer when you plot the drawing No Extraneous Text You must dimension all geometry because the parametric mechanism does not understand text and cannot detect symmetry Problem X 4 If you dimension the radius of a filleted i corner of a rectangle as R 25 4 PLCS to eee Y indicate four fillets the parametric mech anism doesn t understand 4 PLCS and i R 25 4PLCS doesn t know the corners are symmetri cal Solution R 25 e R25 Dimension each fillet R ms Return to the Original Part between Tests If you resolve parametric geometry more than one time you can introduce uninten R 25 tional constraints that will prevent you from using the parametric function to return to the original display of the part Take the part below for example Problem R g If you first resolve this geometry by spec ifying that R is half the measurement of X i R X 2 the resolved geometry would appear as shown in the lower illustration y 16 11 Parametrics 16 12 You would now be able to resolve this geometry only with the same X value of R R 2 because the undimensioned line is ver tical and according to the basic rules ver tical lines remain vertical a x If you tried to use a value for R or X other than the R X 2 relationship the para m
337. only affects dimensions To change the color of other objects use Edit Objects or the Color submenu from the Pen menu The Color submenu from the Pen menu has no effect on dimensions Tech Note The Weight command only affects dimensions To change the weight of other objects use Edit Objects or the Weight submenu from the Pen menu The Weight submenu from the Pen menu has no effect on dimensions The values shown in the Weight submenu may be dif ferent if the available line weights have been changed using the Pen Weight Editor 12 30 Color Dimension This command in the Dimension menu allows you to specify the color of the dimension The default color is blue Weight Dimension Show Palette This command in the Dimension menu allows Standards i i GD amp T you to specify the weight of dimension lines peas y Dimension lines are typically drawn in the thin Minean Tol nest weight available For Graphite that is 0 002 ngular Angular Tol gt or 0 05mm Text gt ont The default weight is 0 002 or 0 05mm Size Style gt Color Layer Arrowheads gt Arrow Size Witness Lines Layer This command in the Dimension menu allows you to specify the layer on which COR dimensions are placed Dimensions can Standards GD amp T Dimension be placed on any visible layer Linear The default layer is the Dimension
338. ontain a title block and a border format that format becomes Model 2 and is projected by the Sheet camera in the Top view on the current sheet Model 2 Drawing format cel Model 1 oe Layout with views Front and Trimetric including drawing form loaded with Sheet Into View Combining Sheets Views and Models In general you need a powerful CAD program for two tasks e The creation of your designs and e the generation of 2D engineering drawings or blueprints in order to get the designs built The design phase is effortless and very productive with the help of Graphite s Draft ing Assistant Integrated Parametrics Chapter 16 and the intuitive user interface itself For the second of these two tasks you need very powerful and flexible drafting functions since there are so many possible types of drawings that you might need Combining Sheets Views and Models to create One of the specific features in Graphite that handles this so well is the combined power of Sheets Views and Models For most of your daily work it is not necessary to know anything about the rela tionship between Sheets Views and Models But for some tasks it is helpful to understand this relationship since it offers elegant solutions that were not possible without the combined power of features in Graphite Using the relationship between Sheets Views and Models makes it easy to e place differently scaled v
339. ood you could use a NURB spline to raise the center of the hood without changing the basic design NURB splines are also valuable for injection mold designs to eliminate the swirl of plastic as it is injected into the mold Such designs provide better surface finishes and allow thinner cross sections in the die Through Points Spline Tool MJ The Through Points Spline tool in the sev f DE l enth subpalette of the x placed with mouse cleke S main tool palette draws a spline through the points that you place Using the Through Points Spline Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Through Points Spline Pick control point Double click last point 2 Click the points for the vectors of the spline 3 Double click the last point The Status Line shows the X Y and Z coordinates of each point as you go along Graphite shows only X and Y coordinates me ye Iz Drawing Tools Description and Use If you create a spline that crosses over itself the Drafting Assistant will not be able to find that intersection This is by design Vector Spline Tool ce This tool in the seventh subpalette of the main tool palette draws a spline using vectors determined by the points you specify The Vector Spline tool uses each point that you place as the vertex of a vector for the spline it creates Point placed here 2i i Point placed here Control point i P e f i f is i i i i i i i
340. ools Base Line 12 12 Chain 12 12 Oblique 12 11 Offset Command 10 27 Construction lines 4 12 Creating point offset geometry 7 6 Distance 10 27 Parallel lines 7 10 On Line help Windows 1 5 Open command 15 2 Operators A 1 Absolute value A 1 Addition A 1 Arctangent A 1 Cosine of angle A 2 Division A 1 Equals A 2 Exponentiation A 1 ifelse A 2 Log Base 10 A 1 Multiplication A 1 Natural log Base e A 1 Negative value A 1 Parenthetical A 1 Random A 2 RNG A 3 Index Round A 2 Scientific notation A 1 Sine of angle A 2 Square root A 1 Subtraction A 1 Opposite Corner Ellipse tool 7 19 Ordinate dimension Horizontal 12 8 Perpendicular 12 15 Vertical 12 11 Origin 8 6 Setting 8 10 Work plane 8 9 OS settings Macintosh 5 28 Windows 5 27 Outline pen style 5 2 5 18 P Page setup 15 26 Palette Bill of Materials 19 6 Color 5 6 5 10 Dimension 12 1 Floating 6 1 Main palette 3 5 Save 5 29 5 30 Pan detail view 13 18 Parallel construction lines 4 13 Parallel Lines tool Offset 7 10 Using 7 10 Parallelism GD amp T 20 6 Parametrics 16 1 3D 16 28 Anchoring geometry 16 8 Complex drafting 16 19 Dimension 12 36 16 3 Drafting 16 9 Grouped objects 16 25 Insertion point of symbols 17 2 Problems 16 12 Resolve 16 5 Rules 16 2 Symmetry 16 18 Text file 16 7 Wave forms A 4 Parenthetical A 1 Paste 10 20 Pattern Crosshatch 11 12 Dash handle 5 16 Define pen 5 15 Edit pen command 5 17 Pen 5 1
341. oose one of the predefined styles You are provided with nine pen styles The following are the default settings for the styles in the Pen menu Outline Solid 01 inch black lines the default pen setting Visible Solid 02 inch black lines Hidden Hidden pattern 016 inch red lines Hidden lines are actually visible on the screen and in your drawing they represent lines that would be hidden in a solid object Dash I Dashed 016 inch yellow lines Center a Center 01 inch green lines Pen Characteristics Phantom Phantom 01 inch cyan lines Dimension Solid 002 inch blue lines These lines are 002 inch thick regardless of the weight you specify Balloon Solid 005 inch green lines Construction rrr nrnarasssecsessccsscscscccsccscscccs Dotted 002 inch magenta lines This does not create construction lines but uses construction line characteristics True construction lines are placed on the construction layer and are deleted when you choose Layout gt Delete Constructions Modifying Pen Styles You may want to modify a pen style to suit your needs You can change one char acteristic of the style by choosing it in the Pen menu or you can change the style for the duration of the work session by choosing Pen gt Style gt Edit Style Changing One Characteristic of a Pen Style 1 Choose the pen you want to modify 2 Inthe Pen menu choose a characteristic Color Weight or Pattern To return a standa
342. or by pressing and dragging the mouse in the draw ing area Using Linear Duplicate 1 Select the object to be duplicated 2 Choose Edit gt Linear Duplicate A dialog box appears An asterisk appearing beside an entry field indicates that you can fill in the field by dragging the mouse in the drawing area to indicate the length This is a 10 23 Editing Objects 10 24 very handy and accurate way to specify this information 3 Enter the Number of objects Per Row 4 Specify Total or Step Lengths by clicking a button 5 Click the X Length data field 6 Move the pointer to the drawing area and drag to indicate the length of the row of copies Both the X and Y values appear in the data fields 7 If you want more than one row enter the Number of Rows and click a button to specify the type of offset 8 Enter the offset if any You can use a negative number Dragging to indicate the offset is particularly useful if you want the offset to equal the distance between two objects 9 Click OK An Example Suppose you want to illustrate six machine screws You could draw geometry then use Linear Duplicate to copy the geometry in an array 1 Create and select the geometry you want to duplicate 2 Choose Edit gt Linear Duplicate 3 Enter 6 in the Number Per Row data field 4 Click the Step Length option 5 Click in the X Length data field 6 Move the pointer into the drawing area and drag across the widest poi
343. or 12 30 Decimals 12 24 Font 12 28 Fractions 12 24 Pen style 5 2 5 19 Size 12 29 Style 12 29 Text 12 27 Weight 12 30 Witness lines 12 33 Dimension setting Angular 12 25 Angular tolerance 12 26 Limits 12 6 Linear 12 23 Linear tolerance 12 25 Standards 12 33 Tolerance 12 6 12 24 Dimension tools Angular 12 18 Arc Length 12 19 Automatic Dimensioning 12 21 Balloon 12 20 Circle Center Line 12 21 Diametral Arrow In 12 17 Diametral Arrow Out 12 17 Horizontal 12 6 Oblique 12 11 Perpendicular 12 13 Radial Arrow In 12 16 Radial Arrow Out 12 16 Vertical 12 9 DIN crosshatching 11 13 11 16 Divide command 10 31 Division A 1 Document New 15 2 Organizing 15 1 Windows 13 22 Drafting Drafting Assistant 2 5 4 1 Full scale 5 24 Parametrics 16 9 Process 5 25 Wireframe 2 1 With format 5 26 Without format 5 25 Drafting Assistant 2 5 4 1 Point 4 7 Alignment 2 5 Alignment angles 4 6 Construction angles 4 10 Construction lines 2 5 4 8 Creation angles 4 7 DAssistant command 4 5 Snap command 4 7 Snap point 2 5 4 2 4 4 Z direction 8 7 Drafting Assistant notation Center 4 2 Endpoint 4 2 Intersect 4 3 Midpoint 4 3 Perpendicular 4 3 Quadrant 4 3 Tangent 4 3 Vertex 4 3 Drag using mouse 7 2 Draw View Boundaries command 13 22 Drawing Formats 2 7 Print 15 35 Techniques 7 2 Tools 7 1 Drawing area Graphite 3 4 3 9 Scroll bars 3 9 Drawing at full scale 2 6 Drawing size command Page bounds 15 28 Preview layout 15 29 Pri
344. or as part of the whole Each document has one or more sheets like the sheets of paper in a set of blueprints and each sheet is made up of layers which can be hidden or displayed as needed Sheet 4 Sheet 3 Sheet 2 Sheet 1 Graphite Document If you are new to computers you may be too busy learning about Graphite and how the computer operates to think very much about how to organize your draw ings You should consider organization early however since eventually you will end up with a large number of drawings Organization is particularly important if you are sharing files with other people The following topics are covered in this chapter 15 1 Graphite Documents Tech Note Use the Import command if you want to use drawings of other format types such as DXF IGES or ASCII text 15 2 e Using Documents including opening recent file list and saving e Importing Exporting e Drawing at Full Scale e Drawing Scale and Paper Size e Drawing Formats e Forms Title blocks e Printing and Plotting Using Documents A drawing can be a simple part or a complex assembly A new document opens as Untitled and remains untitled until you save it Saving a drawing is explained later in this chapter The commands you use to manipulate documents are in the File menu New CTRL N Windows 6 N Macintosh This command in the File menu creates a new Graphite document The new document has no name
345. or box and click on the color N Show selection by name to display the color list Drag to the color you want and release or click the cee color Once the selection color is ear changed all current and future selected Bed items ar in the new color e le Cancel OK You shouldn t use black for indicating selection because many of the standard pens use black lines Selection Process Selecting an object does not affect the properties of the object A selected object highlights but this highlighting goes away once the object is deselected While points and objects are selected in a similar way point selection is controlled by the Selectable Points setting in the Edit menu For this reason selecting objects and selecting points are discussed separately Graphite provides you with Selection tools and commands for selecting your objects Selecting Tools You have four selection tools Selection Tracer Select by Line and Select by Polygon RED Selection Tools The Selection tool in the first subpalette of the main tool palette selects one or more objects or points in the drawing area 9 3 Selecting Objects Tip You can specify that only cer tain objects layers or colors are selected by setting a selection mask with the Selec tion Mask command Select All is useful if you want to make a global change in a drawing such as changing the width of all lines 9 4 Selecting a Singl
346. or the distance between the control points Click OK If you include a dimension as part of the Group the dimension will change when you resolve the Group It will not be used as part of the parametric solver Rigid Links You can group geometry into a rigid body and then attach the rigid body to para metric geometry in at least two points When you resolve the parametric geometry the rigid body undergoes the same geometric transformation The following example shows a real life example of using parametrics with grouped objects Begin with a basic shape that resolves properly as shown in the Parametrics and Grouped Objects part below Then add the thread groups When you resolve the part the threads also resolve Ze d ThreadDia Add and group these lines Be sure these groups match the endpoints on the geometry In the next example you can see the usual method of parametric drafting followed by an example showing how using parametrics with groups can simplify making changes to the part D 4 _ Add and group these lines __ _ Be sure these groups match the RS UU endpoints on the geometry 16 27 Parametrics 16 28 Parametrics in 3D The parametric feature works in 3D with some restrictions You might consider its functionality as 2 1 2D since it functions properly in all planes parallel to the work plane The parametric mechanism has two phases I
347. orner The specified length is the distance between the corner and the intersection of the chamfer and the second line of the corner The second line of the corner refers to the second line chosen when creat ing the chamfer Using the Angular Chamfer 1 Click the Angular Chamfer tool The Message Line reads Angular Chamfer Pick first entity to chamfer Ctrl No trim Windows or Option No trim Mac intosh 2 Inthe Status Line enter the length you want the intersection of the chamfer and the second line of the corner from the corner The default Length is 25 inch Enter the angle between the chamfer and the second side The default is 45 Click each line making up the corner you want chamfered as directed by the Message Line The lines are automatically trimmed or extended If you hold down the CTRL Windows or the OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects to chamfer the objects are not trimmed See the Message Line The Status Line allows you to set the distance Length from the intersection as well as the Angle iv ber Zoe fg av os Jep A fas P Editing Tools Trim Tools Dr Br bya F ETE IECIT The Trim tools on the tool palette lengthen or shorten lines and curves In general you select the limiting object s before you select the tool However if you don t select everything you need you can hold down the SHIFT key the tool becomes a temporary Selection tool and click additio
348. osition rela tive to each other Using the Expand Shrink Tool 1 Select the object s to be expanded or shrunk 2 Select the Expand Shrink tool The Message Line reads Expand Shrink Pick anchor point Shift Select Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macin tosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more objects Click a point on the object that you want to remain stationary Drag the selected object to a new location clicking to set a reference point and releasing to indicate the new location The Status Line allows you to enter the exact scale Factor 4 gt To expand or shrink geometry in one direction only use the Stretch tool See a later section Mirror Tool This tool in the eleventh subpalette of the main tool palette creates the mirror image of an object or objects on the opposite side of a reference line You can copy the selection by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key Editing Tools while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Using the Mirror Tool 1 Select the object s to be mirrored 2 Select the Mirror tool The Message Line reads Mirror Pick beginning of refer ence line Shift Select Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macintosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more objects 3 Specify the reference line by clicking two locations or by dragging The re
349. ost but the dimensions and text are retained The leader style may change Fonts are not maintained The feature control frame converts to a group of non GD amp T geometry The geometry is retained but it is no longer grouped The layers are lost but the geometry is retained The geometry is retained but it is no longer locked Each sheet must be exported individually The leader style may change The double lines convert to symbol representation A multiple line note becomes many single lines 15 17 Graphite Documents 15 18 Graphite EPS Line Line all shapes and attributes are maintained Circle Curve convert to a spline All shapes and attributes are maintained Arc Curve converts to plural connected paths a max imum of 8 paths and 45 degrees All shapes and attributes are maintained Ellipse Curve convert to plural connected paths a maxi mum of 8 paths All shapes and attributes are maintained Spline Curve all shapes and attributes are maintained Fill Fill all shapes and attributes are maintained Hatch Fill patterns are not maintained Wall Line Dimension Not supported Text Not supported Picts Not supported Groups Line curves fills group attributes do not convert Layer Layer layer names shapes attributes and ele ments are retained Layers that contain no ele ments are not retained Color 7 colors as defined by v 2 7 Color converts to approximate color
350. otal runout Position Tolerance The third section of the feature control frame defines the tolerance allowed under the stated conditions Material Condition The fourth section of the feature control frame provides the material condition for limiting the tolerance You can use any of three material conditions Maximum Least and Regardless of Feature Size Maximum Material Condition Maximum Material Condition MMC indicates that a feature contains the maximum amount of material within the specified tolerance limit For drilling holes MMC 20 7 GD amp T Tip Maximum Material Condition is the most commonly used symbol for parts Tip Least Material Condition is most frequently used to con trol wall thicknesses of parts as well as for tool fixtures and inspection gauging 20 8 means that the drill bit is accurate it drills the smallest hole For shafts MMC results in the largest dimension 315 310 002 MIA B IC In the example above this material condition symbol means that the tolerance in the feature control frame 002 applies to the location of the smallest hole 310 in this case As the hole size nears its upper limit 315 the location of the hole increases from 002 to 007 the tolerance for the location 002 plus the tolerance for size 005 Least Material Condition Least Material Condition LMC indicates that a feature contains the
351. our specifications Once you have pressed ENTER Win dows or RETURN Macintosh you must make subsequent changes with the Edit Objects command in the Edit menu Note When working in English units and you want to enter values in the Status Line that combine feet and inches enter them as x y and not x y The dash reads as a minus sign and x y is calculated as an equation See Appendix A for operators and units Try the following exercises to create and change a single line with the Status Line Altering Geometry in Progress with Status Fields 1 Select the Single Line tool 2 Click two locations in the drawing area The length L field automatically high lights in the Status Line Type 3 The 3 is entered directly in the L field 4 Press the Tab key to select the next status field The angle A field now high lights Enter 15 Press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh Pressing ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh completes the data entry for this object The line redraws 3 units long and at a 15 angle You must remember that when you press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macin tosh Graphite constructs the object based on the specifications in the status fields Pressing ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh a second time in the above example would create a second line with the same values Since the lines have the same values the second line overlays the first line and you won t be able to see it 7 5 Drawing Tools
352. owing are the folders and files that come with Graphite Windows Graphite Folder Files 9 pt Normal Blue 002 dimension Standard 125 25 125 258 28 4 21 Line at Start On Line at End On Sheet 1 Model 1 Top Off On Off Untitled Top Off Empty Unchecked D 3 Appendix D Program Settings amp Files Tech Note Adinit dat graphite chm graphite dll graphite exe Graphite feb graphite ini For Windows you have the graphite txt PREFS VC6 Solobug exe SoloBug hlp SsceBase dll option of installing Graphite f to any folder Within that Folders folder are the files and folders Ansi Folder 12 files JSredhiere Fonts Folder 1 files Xcmd Folder 11 files Scripts Folder 2 files Spell Folder 9 files clx and tlx file types Layouts Folder 40 files Graphite viewb VC6 4viewc VC6 4viewd VC6 4viewsa VC6 design VC6 draft VC6 frntrit VC6 frnttop VC6 trimtric VC6 Viewtop VC6 1viewa VC6 1viewb VC6 cformat VC6 dformat VC6 Samples Folder 2 folders Samples2D Folder 14 files Symbols3d Folder 2 folders Fastener and Features Fastener Folder 2 folders Fastenr and Fastenrm Fastenr Folder 4 folders Mcscrw3d Nuts3d0 Pins3d0 Washer3d Mcscrw3d Folder 7 files Nuts3d0 Folder 1 file Pins3d0 Folder 2 files Washer3d Folder 3 files Fastenrm Folder 2 folders Mchscrwm Nutsm0 Mchscrwm Folder 7 files Nutsm0 Folder 1 file Features Folder 2 folders Assorted Holes Assorted
353. ows the side view with added constraint lines The next illustration shows the side view with numbered constraint lines 1 The centerline does not extend beyond the geometry Constraint lines define the edges of the groove Parametrics does not rec ognize non touching colinear lines 3 000 875 lt _ 000 1 750 001 1 000 692 1 625 002 250 125 Yo 1 00 _ eee _ T Complex Parametric Drafting 3 Constraint lines connect the end points of the upper and lower halves 062 REF 813 REF to relate the geometry Parametrics _ does not recognize non touching OO REE colinear lines 4 Four dimensions are added to relate a000 REE the geometry to the centerline Para metrics doesn t recognize non touch ing colinear lines The illustration below shows the completed parametric drawing 3 000 875 lt 7 062 REF 1 000 813 REF yy H 500 REF ya 1 750 001 a 002 1 000 95 l 3 000 REF 250 125 J 1 00 Additional Tips 1 You should place the additional information on a separate layer so you can hide the layer when you plot the drawing 2 If you use a yellow pen which is hard to see against a white background you won t confuse the additions with the actual geometry Example Keep It Simple or Testing as You Go When you have unconnected multiple views the parametric mechanism can t deter mine the
354. ows you to apply the specification you just Standard set You can leave the dialog box open to set other specifications For example once you crosshatch a part you can leave the Crosshatch dialog box open and select other objects to be crosshatched Closing a Dialog Box If a dialog box contains an OK or Cancel button or an action button such as Open the dialog box closes when you click the button Otherwise you dismiss the dialog box manually by double clicking the Control Menu Windows or clicking the Close Box Macintosh button in the upper left corner of the box If the dialog box has an Apply button such as the Crosshatch dialog box above you must dismiss it manu ally Toggling Commands Commands that set a condition such as Selectable Points and Arrow At Start dis play a check mark check mark in the menu to indicate that they are active To turn a command off choose it and the check mark disappears In the case of pen styles and text characteristics the check shows the current set ting Other commands Show Grid Show Points Show Palette Show Trackball and Show Triad toggle to Hide Grid Points Palette Trackball or Triad when the component is visible Preferences All files are saved with their settings when you choose File gt Save The characteris tics used for new files the default settings are contained in the preferences file The Basics The preferences filename is prefs vc6 Windows or Gra
355. p Selection Process e To select or deselect non contiguous items hold down the CTRL Windows or the key Macintosh and click on the items The Selection Mask includes objects like lines arcs circles text etc Most of the objects are self explanatory except for those mentioned below Chain This object is created when you use Flatten View in the Views menu For more information see Chapter 14 Advanced Viewing Techniques Selecting Points Selecting points differs from selecting objects because points are not always visible Being able to select points is useful in two situations stretching selected geometry described later in this chapter and control point selection for transformations When you drag a selection fence around objects all geometry that is completely within the fence is selected If geometry is partially within the fence only the con trol points inside the fence are selected and the geometry is not selected Show Points This command in the Layout menu toggles the display of the control points end points midpoints center points and knot points for selected objects When points are displayed you can select a point by clicking it If points are not displayed but Selectable Points is set in the Edit menu you can select a point by dragging a selec tion fence around the location of the point To show points for an individual selection in the Edit menu use the Edit Objects command Unselect
356. palette 2 Move the pointer to the drawing area and click to set the starting point of the line 3 Move the pointer to the desired location for the endpoint of the line and click Click at the beginning point of the line x Click at the endpoint of the line The line is drawn between the two points Immediately after construction you can make changes in the Status Line at the bottom of your drawing area to alter the length or position of the line If the geometry isn t satisfactory just press the BACKSPACE Windows or the DELETE Macintosh key Creating a Line by Dragging 1 Click the Single Line tool in the tool palette 5 Move the pointer into the drawing area Press and hold down the mouse button at the desired location for the starting point of the line With the mouse button still held down move the mouse to the desired location for the endpoint of the line Press and hold the mouse button at the starting point of the line Drag the mouse until the line is the length you want Release the mouse button Drawing Techniques Tech Note Notice that no rubberband line guides you when you click to draw a line Tip Notice that when you drag between points a rubber band line guides you If you use the clicking method you can perform unrelated activi ties such as zooming between clicks 7 3 Drawing Tools Ti p Notice how each method a ffects
357. pear in the Recent File List from using the Recent File List con the File menu Supply a positive integer after Files to specify the number of files sult the discussion of the that are to appear in the File menu The names and paths of recently opened files Recent File List in Chapter 15 are saved in the list that follows the Files line File1 is always the most recent file Graphite Documents opened As new files are opened the file list gets shifted down so the old File1 becomes File2 and so on The default number of files is four 4 The maximum number is eight 8 5 27 Basic Environment Settings 5 28 Macintosh Settings Fonts All of your system fonts are available when choosing Text gt Fonts Recent File List You can specify the number of files that should appear in the Recent File List of the File menu A file named recent Ist can be found in the Scripts folder This file is an ASCII text file that can be opened and edited in any text editor The following is a sample of the contents of the recent st file aRecentFiles 4 Number of recent files remembered 8 maximum store aRecentFileList MacHD Graphite 3D 3 0 Samples 3D YF 22 MacHD Graphite 3D 3 0 Samples 3D Chair 3D MacHD Graphite 3D 3 0 Samples 3D Question Mark store Supply a positive integer before Number of recent files to specify the number of files that are to appear in the File menu The names and paths of recently opened files
358. phite cannot identify parallel or colinear lines eSelect the appropriate dimensioning tool eClick the geometry to be dimensioned eEnter an expression such as 1 5 x x 3 y in the text data field in the Status Line ePress the ENTER Windows or the RETURN Macintosh key Select the geometry and dimensions to be resolved Choose Edit gt Resolve 5 If necessary enter the values you want to assign to the variables You can enter mathematical expressions fractions and decimals in the data fields of the Resolve dialog box You can use different units as long as you are specific for example 2 6 6 Optional step If you want to anchor a point on the geometry at a particular location click the point The point remains in the same location after you resolve the geometry An example appears later in this section 7 Click OK If the parametric dimensions defined the geometry properly the geometry redraws as you specified The dimensions remain as variable expressions If Graphite cannot resolve the parametrics a message box displays information about the problem The Parametric Problems section later in this chapter describes typical problems you may encounter If you have not given all of the dimensions required to draw the geometry the geometry divides into unrelated groups The missing information determines how the groups relate to one another An alert box shows how many groups exist To see each group click
359. phite prefs Macintosh You can change the default settings so that every new document opens with the settings you want The following specifications can be set in the preferences file e Pen styles e Text characteristics e Preferences settings snap grid units selection color indicator visualization pal ette status and palette location e Grid display e Layer and sheet specifications e Work Layer e Dimension and tolerance formats e Arrowhead type and display e Drawing size and scale e Zoom scale e Fillet radius e Chamfer angle and length e Resolve values The default value of any setting that can be changed on a menu or in a dialog box can be set in the preferences file Changing the Default Settings Manually 1 Open the preferences file it s in the same folder as the Graphite application 2 Change the characteristics you want and if needed create the layers and sheets you want 3 Save and close the file The file must be stored in the same folder as the Graphite application The preferences are set for subsequent new documents The settings will not take effect until the next time you launch Graphite Changing the Default Settings with Save Preferences 1 Open a new Graphite file 2 Set the preferences as you want them 3 Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences The preferences are set for this file The settings for future files take effect the next time you launch Graphite Important
360. plane the extrusion should be in the z direc tion Therefore you should enter a z value in the dialog box You can think of the screen as the 0 coordinate with positive values extending toward you and negative values away from you e You can also manipulate the work plane to determine the direction of an extru sion Revolve Command The Revolve command in the 3D menu lets you create a model as though it were turned on a lathe It copies and revolves a 2D object into a 3D object You also have the option to surface your geometry at the same time it is revolved You begin by drawing half of the model on an axis for revolving Then use the Revolve command to revolve the image a specified number of steps and angle Finally you can show the Trimetric view to see more detail of the wireframe 8 5 3D Drawing Tools Tip You can use the Tab key to move through the data fields Tip To establish the axis of revo lution you can also click the startpoint and the endpoint 8 6 Using the Revolve Command 1 Draw the geometry to be rotated 2 Select the geometry if it is not already selected 3 Choose 3D gt Revolve The Revolve dialog box dis plays 4 Specify the number of degrees Sweep Angle for the revolution 5 Specify the of Steps cop ies or divisions 6 Tab to the Origin data field in the dialog box 7 Place the target cursor at the startpoint of the axis of revolution 8 Drag a
361. plane as another piece of geometry you need to brush over that old geom etry to wake up one of its control points like midpoint or endpoint Graphite will then retain this plane information as you create the new geometry If no object exists or no geometry is referenced for plane information Graphite places the new object geometry onto the work plane at the origin The Origin and the Work Plane Occasionally when you are working on a model you may simply want to move the origin of the work plane This is especially useful for measuring distances For example you can open a document and start drawing without regard to the loca tion of the origin then move the origin to a convenient location for future refer ence Work Plane 3D Drawing Tools 8 10 Choose Layout gt Show Grid to display the origin The origin might be here to begin with but you can move it here for more convenient measurements Set Origin Command This command in the 3D menu sets a new origin in the current work plane 1 Choose 3D gt Set Origin 2 Click in the drawing area to indicate the location for the new origin The origin of the current work plane is moved while the orientation of x y z remains the same If you want to move the origin and change the orientation of the work plane use either the 3 Point Plane command or the Define Plane command Setting a New Work Plane You may want to define a work plane other than the standard
362. ppears through the center and you are still in the process of creating connected lines after releasing the CTRL SHIFT keys Windows or the key Macintosh The Construction Command Stroke construction lines are useful for creating lines through existing points If you want to create a construction line at a location other than an existing point or at a particular angle you can use the Construction command The Drafting Assistant Tech Note Graphite automatically places construction lines on the con struction layer When you choose Layout gt Delete Constructions everything on the construction layer is deleted regardless of the object s pen style Tip Windows You can also type a letter to select the first item that begins with that letter then use the arrow keys to move to the selection you want Once your choice high lights press ENTER 4 12 Using the Command CTRL K Windows K Macintosh This command in the Layout menu creates a construction a Construction line on the construction layer of the current document You can specify the angle of the construction line or the offset from a reference point defined by the X Y coordi nates The asterisk shows that the values can be specified ol by clicking or dragging the mouse values can also be typed into the data fields The distance dragged will always be entered in the Offset data field as a positive value regardless of the direction dragged
363. ps are particularly useful for viewing and plotting different layers of a complex drawing For example the document described in the Layers section that shows the floor plan of a house might have several layers illustrating the plumbing layout and several layers illustrating the electrical plan The plumbing layers can be shown in the Plumbing Layer Group but hidden in the Electrical Layer Group Simi larly the electrical layers are shown in the Electrical Layer Group but hidden in the Plumbing Layer group To create a print to go to the electrical contractor you can simply make the Electrical Layer Group be the work group This will show the lay out of the house with the electrical plan contained on various electrical layers but not the plumbing information which is on the hidden plumbing layers Rather than having to Show or Hide numerous individual layers you only have to select a single Layer Group to get the format that is desired Layer Groups Command The Layer Groups command in the Layout menu extends the functionality of layers by creating Layer Groups A Layer Group records stores and displays layer set tings which layers are shown and which layers are hidden as well as which layer is the work layer This lets you show and hide different layers quickly by selecting a single Layer Group rather than setting the attributes of numerous individual layers The Layer Groups dialog box lists the layer groups on the left and the individual
364. r Using a Mouse The mouse is your communication device you use it to tell the computer what you want to do Use the mouse to indicate locations choose commands select tools and construct objects Tips If your mouse has more than one button you can use the right button to popup a Windows only If you are left menu that contains a variety of commands and functions By default the right handed and your mouse has mouse button provides shortcuts to the most popularly used commands more than one button you A seat od i can change the functionality To set up the right mouse button options right click in the drawing area to activate to the right mouse button the menu Choose RightMouse When the dialog box appears check the boxes to You make this change in the activate or deactivate items you want displayed in the popup menu Control Panel of Windows 3 1 The Basics This manual uses the following terms for mouse activities Pointer Point Press Click Double click Drag An arrow or any other graphic symbol that allows selection or creation of an object Move the pointer to point to a command or an object on the screen Depending on its location the pointer is an arrow or looks like the current tool k O Arrow Pointer Selection Arow Center Point Circle To move the pointer move the mouse on the mouse pad You use several different mouse actions with Graphite Move the mouse until the pointer is over
365. r there are some tools features and concepts that are specific to 3D The following topics are covered in this chapter e Geometry in 3D e 3D Features amp Tools e Work Planes Geometry in 3D The Graphite tools behave in predictable ways in 3 dimensional space Once you know the rules you can manipulate the tools to construct the geometry you want In traditional 3D computer aided design you work as though you have propped a piece of glass on one of the faces of the model and draw on that Every time you want to work on a different plane you have to pick up your glass and carry it to the new position With Graphite you can move around inside the model and draw wherever you want Generally all you have to worry about is the design not mov ing the piece of glass The Drafting Assistant keeps tabs on the angles and intersections for you in all three dimensions If geometry exists you can draw relative to it When it is simpler to use a work plane or no geometry exists which is relative to the plane you want to use you can move the work plane with the Planes 3 Point Plane and Define Plane Referral Work planes are discussed later in this chapter commands in the 3D menu 3D Drawing Tools For example if you want a circle in the work plane or parallel to the work plane you can use tools which require only two specification points such as the Center Point Circle tool or the Opposite Point Circle tool If you want a cir
366. r left corner of the title bar For Macintosh click the Close button once at the upper left corner Exit Command CTRL Q Windows Q Macintosh This command in the File menu closes Graphite If you have made changes since you last saved a dialog box allows you to save the changes If you have more than one document open an alert message allows you to save unsaved documents File Organization Graphite provides you with the ability to automatically organize your files using the Directory function in Preferences When you open save import and export files Graphite goes to the directory or folder you specify 1 Choose Layout gt Preferences gt Directory The Directory Selection dialog box appears with four fields for specifying the directory location 2 Enter the directory path in each data field You can either type the path or browse your computer for the folder and have Directory Selection x swe dr seon dw OK Aay the path entered automatically To browse click on the ellipsis and the fol lowing dialog box appears Locate the desired folder and click OK The path appears in the selected data field of the Directory Selection dialog box Browse for Folder L 1x Select OPEN Directory amp My Computer ga Network Neighborhood Gy Recycle Bin _ Desktop C Brief 9 My Briefcase C Sp3 CJ Users C 3d C
367. r or both mar gins even or text centered within the designated text space Alignment is set in the Text menu 2 The spatial relationship of different sets of geometry to each other along a common line The angle of the Drafting Assistant s automatic construction lines The specification is set by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Snap Draws a part of a circle Glossary G 2 ASCII Arrow Tool Associativity Attributes Automatic Dimensions Bezier Curve Border Boundary CAD CADD CAE CAM An acronym for American Standard Code for Infor mation Interchange This is the format for text characters to be imported into Graphite Most word processors allow you to save text in ASCII format Used for selecting objects to be operated on with subsequent commands Also used to move selected geometry A link between an object and its dimensions or between views If the object is changed the dimensions automatically change to match In associative views such as a detail view when geometry is changed in one view all views of the same geometry are changed accordingly The data fields associated with a particular object that completely define that object Data such as Layer Name Pen Style Color X Y Z Coordinates and even data for a B O M such as Cost Item Name Quantity Description etc This tool automatically places dimensions on lines circles ellipses and arcs with one mouse click on the geometr
368. rac teristics in the dialog box Pen Characteristics The following characteristics are available from the submenus in the Pen menu Style CON define Weight Palette Pattern gt Arrowheads gt Arrow at Start Yellow Arrow at End Green Cyan Crosshatch Blue Hatch Ctrl H Magenta Solid Fill More Fill Ctrl B j Color There are 234 color options including 170 user definable colors and 64 predefined colors This Color palette displays the 64 predefined colors when you select Pen gt Color gt Palette Pen Style gt Color gt Edit Weight Pattern Edit Pattern attern gt Arrowheads Arrow at Start Arrow at End Arrowheads gt Arrow at Start Arrow at End Crosshatch Crosshatch Hatch Ctrl H Hatch Ctrl H Solid Fill Dashdot Solid Fill Fill Ctrl B Border Fill Ctrl B Divide Cutting Stitch Pen Characteristics 5 3 Basic Environment Settings Each definable color can be indepen dently assigned from the 16 7 million col ors available Color Palette gt This Color command specifies the color of y ee the current pen and any other selected geometry without changing any other pen characteristics Specifying the Color of the Current Pen 1 Choose Pen gt Color The submenu appears 2 Choose the color you want The pen takes on the new color as selected in the submenu Defining Colors You can define as many as 234 colors If you choos
369. rd pen to its original specifications choose a different pen style from the menu and then choose the modified pen again You may also change all of the specifications for a standard pen by redefining it with the Edit Style command by choosing Pen gt Style gt Edit Style Edit Style Command This command from the Style submenu of the Pen menu sets the characteristics for the pen styles 5 19 Basic Environment Settings 5 20 Redefining the Specification of a Pen Style 1 Choose Pen gt Style gt Edit Style The dialog box appears Style Outline 7 2 Select the pen style you want to change by color Black bd 7 Weight 010 x2 pressing the Style data field Patton Sold When the list of pen styles appears choose the style you want to change Cancel Apply OK 3 Specify the characteristics Color Weight and Pattern you want for that style 4 Click OK to set the specifications and close the dialog box or click Apply to put the specifications into effect for a single pen style and leave the dialog box open to make changes to another pen style When you edit a style you set new specifications for future uses of that pen The specifications remain in effect for the document in which they are set until you change it again with the Edit Style command You can change the default setting of any pen style by saving changes in the preferences file See the Saving Prefer ences
370. re is an endpoint at the tangency point eColinear lines remain colinear if they overlap or share endpoints eConcentric arcs remain concentric eA point of an object on a horizontal or vertical line will remain on that line 5 Be aware of the relationships that the parametric mechanism cannot recognize e Parallel lines may not remain parallel e Perpendicular lines may not remain perpendicular eSymmetrical geometry may not remain symmetrical Creating Geometry When approaching the problem of resolving geometry evaluate it as though you were going to draw it on paper Remember the assumptions and requirements for geometric relationships as outlined in the previous Basic Rules section Parametric Dimensions The essence of parametrics is in the dimensions The dimensions may be the actual value which you get by default a constant which is not the actual value a single variable or an algebraic expression involving constants variables mathematical operators functions and conditional operators Constants are specific numeric values such as specifying a radius as 25 Gnch Variable expressions may be as simple as a single letter such as Z for length or a mathematical expression such as 2 Dia where Dia may be the diameter The 16 3 Parametrics 16 4 arithmetic operators are dddition subtraction multiplication division mod the remainder after division and exponentiation See Appen
371. remove an attribute value delete the value in the entry field 5 Press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key The changed values are assigned to the selected attribute Removing Attributes 1 In the BOM tool palette select the Attribute Selection tool 2 Move the mouse pointer near an object with assigned attributes The attributes and their respective values display in the Status Line Select the object with the Attribute Selection tool 4 Press the CTRL ENTER keys Windows or the OPTION RETURN key Macin tosh simultaneously All visible and unlocked attributes are removed 19 11 Bill of Materials 19 12 Item Numbers The BOM tool palette allows you to assign item numbers to objects which will be automatically included in the Bill of Materials table Assigning Item Numbers Item numbers are assigned with the Item Number tool in the BOM tool palette Do not use Graphite s Balloon tool from Graphite s Dimension palette to assign Item Numbers for objects that you want listed in the Bill of Materials Item Numbers created with the Balloon tool are not recognized by Graphite s Bill of Materials Extraction utility Item Number Tool 2 With this tool in the BOM tool palette you assign Item Numbers to objects These Item Numbers will automatically be included in the Bill of Materials Using the Item Number Tool 1 Inthe BOM tool palette select the Item Number tool The Message Line reads Item Number Tool Pic
372. rer pana rinan eeencnneted 3 5 Selecting a tool from a subpaletiess cscsiaiispacieituncha meer dien 3 6 Using the trackball view Menu wvscsasnendsteevcnes ancasauteentvichoadaavadnpaaeevinesvenceseaionant 6 8 Views Activating VIEWS rycin ie aona REE E sabes ETE sede ina eee a ce 14 15 Adding formats to the Sheet into View dialog box list ccecce 14 18 Chia neine the ViGw SCALES cacessceaty anenduanpsceussateied ai aea aA 13 19 Creating a non associative detail view cc cccceeteeeeeeteeeettteeeeetteeeeenenees 13 15 Creating an associative detail Views anyirr n R 13 15 Placing geometry into a view using Sheet into View a c 14 17 Recovering from a erroneous Sheet Into View acsscccccccicrcrererreis 14 18 Rotating the View area and detail views eeccercccr rierren rerne 13 16 Sealing ViEWS ia cssdvesdeees eaaweaes pase EEE EEEE E EEEE 14 16 ZOOMING WM A View seinere e EAE NERA K EEE 13 20 Zooming Using the magnifying glass toOlusrrnuinaciiiicsri inican 13 2 Using Stroke ZOOM sioner aan RT eereeeS 13 3 Zooming Within a VIEW si css a e heres ead stad aa asses perce 13 20 2D Analysis Pertorming ZD AMAaly SiS a ase EE EREE 18 1 Displaying the centroid osisicurnscaia n AAE NA 18 4 TI 9 Task Index TI 10 Index Symbols Point 4 7 Numerics 2D analysis Command 18 1 Displaying the Centroid 18 4 2D analysis calculation 18 1 18 4 Area 18 3 Centroid 18 3 Inertia 18 4 Perimeter 18 3 Tolerance 18 2 Weight 18 3 Weight Per Ar
373. rint to print or plot your drawing OS Settings OS Settings Windows Settings Graphite ini The Graphite ini file is an ASCII text file that can be opened and edited in any text editor including NotePad This file contains setting for the number of fonts that appear in the Font submenu the size of the screen when Graphite is launched and the number of files that appears in the Recent File List To make changes to the Graphite ini file open it in any text editor and make the desired changes Save the file as a text file The next time Graphite is launched it will account for the new setting in the Graphite ini file MaxFont This option lets you pick the number of fonts that appear in the Font submenu from the Text and Dimension menus Graphite takes the fonts in alphabetical order up to the number that you specify in the Graphite ini file Fonts that do not show up in the menu can be accessed by choosing Text gt Font gt Other By default this value is left blank so Graphite displays all the fonts it can Screen This option lets you set the size of the screen that Graphite opens to There are two options Screen FULL opens to a maximized window Screen Standard opens to the standard size which is almost maximized but with room for icons at the bottom If no value is specified the screen opens to the standard size R l Recent File List eferra For more information about This option determines the number of files that ap
374. rovided so you can isolate an area for changes which do not affect the remainder of the spline An individual piece of geometry such as a line arc or circle Use this command to rotate geometry around any axis The 0 0 0 location on the drawing area When a new document is opened 0 0 0 is located in the middle of the screen The coordinate symbol dis plays at the origin when the grid is turned on You can change the origin at any time A 2D view of a 3D model which does not show perspective usually the top front and right view of the model A group of tools The general tool palette is always displayed to the left of the drawing area You can open the dimension tool palette from the Dimen sion menu and drag it around the screen Integrated parametrics is available through the Resolve and Symbol commands Once you create Part Paste Perpendicular PICT Pick Planar Plot Plotter Point Pointer Polar Duplicate Polygon Tool Press geometry you can add dimensions as variables or real values When you choose Resolve you can enter specific dimensions for the variables and the object is drawn to your specifications A collection of entities representing an object or structure To place the contents of the Clipboard in the cur rent document At a 90 angle The Drafting Assistant displays a notation when the current construction is at a 90 angle to an object The Macintosh graphics
375. rrent model you move the related camera The camera you move depends on what is active the sheet or the detail view If the sheet is active the Sheet camera moves to the current model If the detail view is active then the related Detail view camera moves Model space 1 S e Model change when the View window is active Model change when the Sheet is active Views Views are the images picked up by cameras and projected on sheets Graphite has two types of views the Detail View and the Sheet View Detail Views e Detail Views are picked up by Detail View cameras and always displayed in a view window which rests on the sheet They have boundaries and display only a limited view of the model You can create as many views as you want and move or copy and paste them to different sheets When you delete a detail view the Detail View Camera deletes When you delete a sheet which contains a detail view the detail view deletes also since the detail view rests on the sheet e You can place views from different models on one sheet but each view can dis play only one model at a time 14 37 Advanced Viewing Techniques Tech Note The Drawing Size command changes only the plot scale but not the scale factor of the Sheet view Even if the view is scaled to fit the paper format the scale factor remains 1 since the real size of the geometry is not affected Tech Note When you change the sheet the Sheet camer
376. s ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh a line 23 feet long is drawn Graphite converts the length to inches and Status Line displays the length in inches because of the Units setting In addition you can use mathematical exponential and trigonometric expressions in the Status Line Appendix A provides examples of the valid operators cos 30 The Grid When the Grid is visible objects snap to the grid spacing If you want to place an object between the grid marks you must either turn off the grid change the grid spacing or zoom in so that the spacing is larger than the Hit Radius The grid spac ing automatically reflects the units you set in the Units dialog box When you change the units the appearance of the grid spacing remains the same and the val ues listed in this dialog box change automatically The Grid Grid Command This command found in Layout gt Preferences allows you to set the spacing of the grid lines You can specify the number of ticks subdivisions per unit spacing You can change the default setting by saving changes in the preferences file Show Grid CTRL G Windows G Macintosh This command in the Layout menu controls the display of the grid The grid is made up of horizontal and vertical lines of dots The spacing of the grid lines and the number of tick marks between the intersections are set in the Grid dialog box by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Grid When the grid is visible
377. s and text are different colors in AutoCAD come into Graphite as black If your dimensions are different colors change them in AutoCAD to one of the colors that Graphite supports before importing the file It is recommended that you import DXF DWG drawings into Graphite with the option Dimensions Imported as Graphite smart dimensions selected If you do not some dimensions may be lost Geometry and Other Objects Exporting Files 1 2 Line types can come in at the wrong display scale in AutoCAD12 Change the LTSCALE variable to something more suitable 1 works well The lines will then display more appropriately Edited line patterns do not come across to AutoCAD via DXF or DWG Importing Files 1 Line patterns may or may not be visible when coming in from AutoCAD depending on the size of the drawing or geometry If the patterns are too small choose Pen gt Pattern gt Edit Pattern to change the pattern spacing to a better visual representation on the screen AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk Inc Appendix D Program Settings amp Files For your convenience this appendix includes the default settings present when you first install the program It also includes a list of all the folders and files that come with the program Default Settings The default settings are contained in the Prefs VC6 Windows or Graphite Prefs Macintosh file Change these setting by opening this file making the changes and
378. s based on the paper size and the printer or plotter drive currently selected 327 Drawing Scale and Paper Size When the boundary of the printing plotting region appears you can drag the boundary rectangle around the drawing area with the Hand pointer as shown above The cursor becomes the Hand pointer when you move the cursor outside of the dialog box To change the paper orientation while the Drawing Size dialog box is visible choose File gt Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh and enter the specifications you want The new specifications appear in the drawing area Tiled Printing If you are using a printer rather than a plotter you may want to tape pages together to get a larger drawing than laser printers allow Specify the layout for those pages by choosing Layout gt Drawing Size 1 Choose Layout gt Drawing Size 2 Specify the number of pages Across for the final drawing 3 Specify the number of pages Down for the final drawing 4 Specify the order for printing the pages Across then Down or Down then Across Across then Down Down then Across 1 2 13 34 24 5 Click Fit 6 Click OK Your drawing scales to fit the number of pages and layout as you have speci fied Preview Layout This command in the File menu shows the size and orientation of the printing area specified in Print Setup Windows or Page Setup Macintosh by displaying a black bor
379. s blank because nothing has yet been added to Model 2 As soon as you begin to draw all geometry automatically adds to Model 2 since Model 2 is the current model space Relationship between Sheets and Models When you create a new model with the Model command a new model is created without creating a new sheet So it is possible to have more models than there are sheets You can only look at one model at a time in any view sheet view or detail view if the geometry is contained in different model spaces i e Model 1 or Model 2 Think of models as a spatial area where geometry is located You cannot view two spatial areas through one window at the same time You can create more models than ort there are view windows So it is is eS Se possible to have a model that is not displayed in any view And you can have a single model displayed in many views at the same time a 7l Model 1 not visible since related to Sheet 1 When you make a Model current in a sheet view it is like the Sheet camera is moved to the new model When you make a Sheet current the Sheet camera is moved to the Model 1 related model whose image is pro jected on that sheet estes Sheet 2 is made current Models Command This command in the Views menu allows you to specify models and switch between models to project them on the current sheet You can display a single model on more than one sheet but you c
380. s in bold black lines Click Next to highlight the second group H 2 H 2 ETF w o a i This problem is like the two squares ResolveiProblem shown earlier Only one group could be Unrelated Groups of Geometry drawn The parametric mechanism does not know how to relate the two groups Problem Shown 1 of 2 Resolve Problem Unrelated Groups of Geometry Problem Shown 2 of 2 Parametric Problems Solution H 2 You must decide how you want to relate Wis the groups Usually you have many 5 options to accomplish this For this exam I ple adding the dimension W 3 is one H alternative We Unrelated Groups where One Group is a Single Point A single point as an unrelated group is like a neon sign saying The problem is right bere Problem The Resolve Problem message may display a single point such as the point on the left hole of this example That point is the endpoint of the circle 16 15 Parametrics Solution On closer examination you can see that the circle is not dimensioned Therefore the solution is to dimension the circle a Another Unrelated Group Problem In this graphic the height of the right side t of the part is dimensioned You assume H that the height dimension applies to the right and left side The parametric mecha nism does not make that assumption w Solutions There are three possible solutions to this problem 1 You can dimension t
381. s that you have not created any additional Models and Sheets 1 Select Views gt Sheets The Sheets dialog box displays 2 Select Views gt Models The Models dialog box displays Models Tech Note The Sheet Into View command also creates a new model for the Sheet View The existing model is placed in the detail view window See a later sec tion of this chapter for more information 14 5 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 6 3 Since the Model dialog box is placed at the same location on the screen move it to another location so you can see both dialog boxes sa Models Sheets X v Model 1 y Sheet 1 Now you can see that a new drawing in Graphite has one Sheet and one Model by default The check mark in each dialog box shows that Sheet 1 and Model 1 are current 4 Display the Sheets dialog box and click New to create a new sheet You see also that a new model automatically appears in the Models dialog box Model 2 5 Make Sheet 2 current by highlighting it and clicking Current If you have any geometry on Sheet 1 it disappears and a blank screen comes up Also the check mark moves from Sheet 1 to Sheet 2 and the check mark also moves automatically from Model 1 to Model 2 Model 2 automatically becomes current because Sheet 2 is related to Model 2 So if you make Sheet 2 current on the screen then Model 2 has to be current as well Sheet 2 now displayed on the monitor i
382. s you want but only one sheet can be visible at a time the active sheet You activate a sheet with the Current command in the Sheets dialog box in the Views menu In Graphite one sheet is always current the active sheet It cannot be deleted 14 1 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 2 If you have multiple sheets imagine them arranged as a stack of sheets behind your computer screen If you make a sheet current you bring it to the front That is why you can see only one sheet at a time the current sheet Multiple sheets are stacked behind the screen The current sheet is always in front and the only visible one Using Sheets Every document contains Sheet 1 You can use the Sheets command in the Views menu to create new sheets delete rename or set the current work sheet You may want to give the sheets distinctive names rather than their default numbers because it is much easier to know what s on a sheet if it s named for instance Detail View rather than Sheet 2 Sheets are Graphite s equivalent to pieces of paper with the added function that Sheet 2 can display geometry associated with Sheet 1 When you are using detail views layers won t serve your needs for printing or plotting because when you hide the layer containing the geometry the detail view is associated with the geom etry is also no longer visible in the detail view You can use sheets to display and print multiple pages of complex drawings The follow
383. se Pen gt Edit Weight to change the weight of one of the pens to any value between 001 0254mm to 050 1 27mm There cannot be more than eight different pen weights in a drawing so changing a pen weight in the Edit Pen Weights dialog box changes the weight of every object drawn with that pen s previous weight Editing Pen Weights 1 Choose Pen gt Weight gt Edit Weight The Edit Pen Weight dialog box appears S S pp 2 Select the pen weight you want to change by clicking on the pen Pen 1 ox number That pen s data field is Pen 2 selected Hens cancer 3 Change the pen weight by typing a Pen 4 new value into the data field If no Bens units are given with the entry Graph Pen 6 ite applies the unit specified in the Pen 7 Units dialog box from Preferences Pen 8 If the entry does not fall with in the valid range from 0 001 0254mm to 05 1 27mm Graphite prompts you with Please make a valid entry for Pen 1 an Alert box similar to the one below Fs 001 and 05 Clicking OK in the Alert box returns you to the Edit Pen Weights dialog box to make the necessary changes 4 Click OK in the Edit Pen Weights dialog box All existing lines drawn in the pen weight you edited change to reflect the new weight as will all future lines drawn in that pen weight Clicking Cancel ignores all changes made to any pen weights and closes the Edit Pen Weights dialog box Undoing a Pen Weight Edit You cannot undo
384. sing the setting in the Linear and Angular submenus However a fractional precision is required if you want fractional dimensions The same is true for decimal dimensions Displays measurements in English units Measure ments less than 1 foot appear in inches and those greater than 1 foot appear in feet and inches Displays measurements in metric units Determines whether or not the zero to the left of the decimal point appears 5 21 Basic Environment Settings 5 22 Trailing 0 s Determines whether or not zeros to the right of the decimal point are displayed If set the precision determines the number of trailing zeros All geometry reflects the new unit measurement converting automatically between English and metric When you change the units existing dimensions update to reflect the change Using the Status Line to Specify the Unit of Measure You can use the Status Line to specify a unit of measure other than the one in effect for the document If the units are set to inches and you draw a line you can use different units of measure such as inches feet feet and inches x y millime ters mm centimeters cm and meters m You can also mix the units in the mathematical expression as long as you label the units properly for example 10 25 4 cm In the following example if the units are set to inches you can still enter 23 in the Length data field as shown below 23 When you pres
385. snap point is on an object 40n The Drafting Assistant snapping onto a circle The Drafting Assistant displays information about the location of the snap point This information appears either beside the pointer or next to the object itself tangent The Drafting Assistant displaying the relationship between the circle and the line that is being constructed The Drafting Assistant tells you when the snap point has locked onto the points of an object Gj center The center of an arc or circle Move the pointer across the arc or circle to display on for the arc or circle then move the pointer near the center to display the center point notation endpoint endpoint The endpoint of lines arcs circles ellipses and splines midpoint intersection quadrant vertex Snapping onto Geometry midpoint The midpoint of lines arcs circles ellipses and splines intersection The intersection of two lines permanent lines and the Drafting Assistant s dynamic construction lines or curves C quadrant Quadrant points on an arc or circle displayed at 3 o clock 6 o clock 9 o clock and 12 o clock C as The vertices of an ellipse spline or dimension point Using Tangents and Perpendiculars If you click a point on an arc or circle and drag the pointer away at about a 45 angle the Drafting Assistant locks onto the tangent If you drag away at a 90 angle the Drafting
386. so indicates the active sheet Docu x Tip Whenever you want to print a part related to one project separately create a new iiit ment Name Sheet Number The name of the sheet Rename sheet only displays in the Title Bar if more than one sheet exists You may want to use several sheets to create related components and associated detail views With the drafting board you use a new sheet of paper for a project with Graphite you create a new sheet Creating a New Sheet Click New to create another sheet Name the sheet by typing the name in the Tip Rename data field and clicking the Rename button You can also type a name and f then click New Note Graphite automatically creates a new model when you create a new sheet See a later section for more information on models Renaming a Sheet 1 Select the name of the sheet from the list box 14 3 Advanced Viewing Techniques Tip Any combination of geome try such as lines arcs circles dimensions text etc you cre ate with any of the creation tools in the tool palette or any tools in the Dimension palette is a Model 14 4 2 Type the new name 3 Click Rename Deleting a Sheet 1 Select the name of the sheet from the list box 2 Click Delete Graphite handles Models and Sheets separately The geometry you create is the model what you see on the sheet is only an image view of that model So when you delete the sheet you delete only the Sh
387. st for creating 3D wireframe models e Start the model creation on the drawing sheet and add views later for editing and viewing the model from different angles e Use a view layout from the beginning and create the model in different view windows simultaneously Method I Open a document and create the geometry on an empty sheet With the on screen Trackball and the view commands in the View submenu you can rotate your model and edit it from different angles as long as you have not created any detail view windows If you want to view your geometry from different angles simultaneously you create detail view windows with the Detail View tool and place them on the sheet The sheet view then shows an image of your model in the Top view on the sheet In the view windows you can display different view orientations of your geometry like front top trimetric etc As soon as you create a view window the sheet view of your geometry remains fixed in the Top view parallel aligned and rigidly fixed to the sheet As a result the view angle can only be changed in the detail view windows The view orientation of a sheet with a detail view cannot be rotated with the Track ball Detail View camera Sheet camera is now rigidly fixed and aligned parallel to the sheet Trimetric wW Model 1 l Sheet1 il 1 Model with 1 additional active Trimetric view window The sheet view of your geometry may
388. sts the keys for finding specific points The desired point must be within the Hit Radius defined later in this chapter of the pointer Press the mouse button first and then press one of the following keys on the keyboard Keyboard snap points only work when there are multiple snap points within the Hit Radius of the pointer Letter Snaps To Align c center e endpoint g grid i intersection m midpoint Snapping onto Geometry n no point o on p perpendicular q quadrant t tangent v vertex the percentage point set in the Snap dialog box Pressing the SPACEBAR or clicking the mouse releases all snap restrictions Keyboard snap points act as a filter For example if you want to place the end of a line at the center of a circle but the intersection of two other objects lies near the center within the specified Hit Radius the Drafting Assistant will not know which point the center or the intersection to snap to By pressing the c on the key board while dragging the line the Drafting Assistant knows to snap to center and to disregard the intersection or any other snap point that falls within the Hit Radius DAssistant Command This command found in Layout gt Prefer pE ences turns the Drafting Assistant on or off When the Drafting Assistant is not checked in the menu the Drafting Assis tant is off Snap Basic Command This Snap command found in Layout gt Preferences sets specifications for the Draftin
389. t only The sizes in this list are the same as those available in the Size submenu from the Text menu Selecting the Other option allows you to specify a non standard font size for dimension text Style This command in the Dimension menu lets you pick the style of dimension text The styles in this list are the same as those available in the Style submenu from the Text menu However these settings here do not affect those in the Text menu Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol Text Font Style Color Weight Layer Arrowheads Arrow Size Witness Lines Show Palette Standards GD amp T Linear Linear Tol Angular Angular Tol vvv Text Font Size Color Weight Layer gt vvv v Arrowheads gt Arrow Size Witness Lines gt 0 125 inches 0 14 0 156 0 18 0 25 Other Bold Italic Underline Dimension Appearance Tech Note The Size command only affects dimensions To change the size of other text objects use Edit Objects or the Size submenu from the Text menu The size submenu from the Text menu has no effect on dimensions Tech Note The Style command only affects dimensions To change the style of other text objects use the Style sub menu from the Text menu The Style submenu from the Text menu has no effect on dimensions 12 29 Dimensions Tech Note The Color command
390. t 11 1 19 3 Box 11 1 11 3 Detail view 14 16 Dimension 12 27 Item numbers 19 10 Menu 3 11 11 5 Scaling 11 7 Spell check 11 4 Tool 11 1 Text appearance Alignment 11 8 Characteristics 11 3 Font 11 5 Indenting 11 9 Scale 11 7 15 24 Size 11 6 Spacing 11 9 Style 11 8 Text operation Editing 11 3 Export 15 15 Import 11 2 15 8 Moving 11 4 Index Rotate 11 6 Spell check 11 4 Through Points Spline tool 7 24 Timing device A 3 Tip 1 2 Title Bar 3 3 3 4 Close 3 5 Control menu 3 4 Macintosh OS 3 5 Maximize Restore 3 5 Minimize 3 4 Windows OS 3 4 Zoom 3 5 Title blocks 15 33 Toggling commands 3 15 Tolerance 12 6 2D analysis 18 2 Dimension 12 6 12 24 GD amp T 20 2 20 7 20 10 Tool Palette Floating Palette 6 1 Tool palette 3 3 3 5 Selecting a tool 3 5 Tools 3D drawing 8 1 BOM 19 5 Dimension 12 1 Drawing 7 1 7 7 Editing 10 1 Selection 9 3 Text 11 1 Top view 2 2 14 19 Total runout GD amp T 20 7 Tracer tool 2D analysis 18 1 3D 8 3 Using 9 5 Trackball 2 3 2 4 2 6 Hide 6 8 Lock 6 8 Show 6 8 8 2 TrackCube 6 8 View menu 6 8 Trailing Os 5 22 Transformation tools 10 2 Expand Shrink 10 10 Mirror 10 10 Move 10 7 Object Rotation 10 9 Rotate 10 8 Stretch 10 11 Triad 2 6 Hide 6 10 Show 6 10 8 2 Trim tools 10 2 Corner 10 6 Relimit 10 5 Segment 10 6 Simple 10 5 Trimetric view 2 4 14 19 True position GD amp T 20 6 U Undo 10 21 Unfold view 14 22 Ungroup Command 7 11 10 33 Unit
391. t AutoSave interval Saame ororieret d oa A For Windows files opened with the READ ONLY attribute are also autosaved Using Documents 15 5 Graphite Documents 15 6 Setting up AutoSave 1 Choose Layout gt Preferences gt AutoSave The AutoSave dialog appears 2 Switch AutoSave on or off The default setting is off 3 Specify the time interval for AutoSaving in minutes in the AutoSave Interval data field The interval can be from 1 to 60 minutes the default setting is 15 minutes An interval of 0 or less is equivalent to turning AutoSave off 4 Click OK If AutoSave is ON your work automatically saves for the specified time interval To save these settings permanently choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Pref erences If you are working files including an untitled file open with no geom etry close that untitled file Otherwise with AutoSave on the Save As command appears as the default setting Close Command CTRL W Windows W Macintosh This command in the File menu closes the current Graphite document the one dis played in the top window If other Graphite documents are open they remain open when you close the current document If you have made any changes since you last saved the current document a dialog box allows you to save the changes You can close the document with or without saving the changes For Windows you can also close the document by double clicking the Control menu at the uppe
392. t Color gt Define Select the color you want to remove Click No Use The eye icon next to the color name is removed You can also click on the eye icon to remove it When you choose Pen gt Color gt Palette the color patch has been replaced by a patch with an X in it Color Palette Weight This command in the Pen menu sets the pen width of the current pen and selected lines without changing any other pen characteristics Pen Characteristics 5 11 Basic Environment Settings 5 12 The line weights shown in this submenu depend on the units selected in the Pref Style gt Color gt erences submenu If you have selected petant EARNER metric units the line weight will be atem g shown in millimeters instead of inches Arrowheads gt Arrow at Start F p Ai E Note Any line thickness of less than 016 rower Ena i ars i i Crosshatch inch appears one pixel wide on the CUR screen When you print or plot such lines Solid Fill you can see the different weights MCE Specifying a New Weight for the Current Pen 1 Choose Pen gt Weight The submenu appears 2 Drag to the weight you want The pen takes on the new weight as selected in the submenu Edit Weight Command This command from the Weight submenu in the Pen menu sets the line weights Graphite comes with eight default line weights ranging from 002 05mm to 050 1 27mm Objects drawn in Graphite are drawn in one of the eight available pen weights Choo
393. t Into View dialog box Method 1 Choose File gt Open and open a Layout file in the Layout folder 2 Save the file under a different name in the Layout folder with by choosing File gt Save As before you do any changes 3 Customize the layout to your needs 4 Save the file 5 Select Views gt Sheet Into View 6 The new layout appears in the pull down menu in the Sheet Into View dialog Tip box You might want to look at Method 2 one of the files in the Layouts folder to see how it is set up Another way to create your own layout is to design it in a new document Be sure not to make any ted ch to th 1 Open a new document by choosing File gt New pe Le eee ayout files 14 29 2 Create a view window with the Detail View function 3 Make the current sheet active by clicking anywhere outside the view window on the sheet 4 Choose Views gt Model and create Model 2 Make Model 2 the current model in the Models dialog box Duplicate the view window as often as you want Duplicating or copying a view was discussed in Chapter 13 7 Set each view window to the desired view orientation with the on screen Track ball pull down menu or the Views submenu in the Views menu 8 Select Properties in the detail view window s control menu to scale each view window 9 Save the new layout under a proper name in the Layout folder of the Graphite folder Drafting Methods with Views and View Layouts Two different methods exi
394. t View 3 Delete Model 2 View Orientation 14 18 You have many options for changing the view orientation within the view window e Rotate the view with the Trackball Choose 3D gt Views and select a view Select a view from the pull down menu on the Trackball e Set a view with the Define View command Define View Command This command in the Views menu allows you to define an auxiliary view orienta tion or change the standard view orientations The standard views cannot be changed unless the locked check box is clicked off The default configurations are defined as follows Front Isometric Right Top Trimetric Specifying a New View Unfold a view with the Unfold View command Set the view to the current work plane with the View the Plane command The view of the x z plane The view of the axes rotates as shown s Y 30 30 f x 30 ee y 30 S z 90 The view of the y z plane The view of the x y plane The view of the axes rotates as shown Vey Trimetric ow r I x 30 Ph y 15 Sx z 90 Views 14 19 Advanced Viewing Techniques 14 20 Follow these directions to specify a new view orientation the desired view click OK Otherwise pro Top Rename ceed with the specification The Normal line of sight specification highlights in the dialog box Redefine View Enter values by typing or dragging the mouse in the draw
395. t affect the actual measurement of the geometry the model This is different from the view orientation of your geometry that you would set using the Trackball or the View commands in the Views menu See Chapter 6 Advanced Environment Settings There are two types of views in Graphite the Sheet View and the Detail View Sheet Views The Sheet view shows all of your geometric construction on the sheet outside of any existing view windows at the scale you specify The Sheet view is the default view when you start Graphite The sheet view is picked up by the Sheet camera and projected on the current sheet The sheet view is infinite in size having no boundaries In other words when drawing on a sheet you can create geometry as large as you desire Referral You will find more about Sheets and Views in the Note When you select File gt New you are looking at Sheet 1 of your untitled file It Chapter 4 Advanced Views is the only sheet available until you add more See Chapter 14 for more information Techniques in this manual about sheets and the Sheet camera Detail Views In drafting details views are used to provide more information about a specific area of the drawing They are typically shown at a larger scale than the original geome try Graphite provides a tool that automatically creates detail views so that you do not have to redraw the geometry A detail view is like a window which looks at some geometry in your
396. t gt Preferences gt Grid 3 Set the grid spacing to 34 and the number of subdivisions to 2 A megahertz is approximately 34 nanoseconds and this becomes the base cycle with two tick marks for drawing half cycles 4 Turn on the grid A 3 Tip You can place the constraint lines on another layer and hide them if you want 5 Use the Connected Lines tool to draw the wave form of the desired specifica tions 6 Use the Expand Shrink tool to stretch the wave form to half and full cycles Using Parametrics for Wave Forms You can use parametrics to speed up this process as shown below The dotted lines are constraint lines GT GT2 22 a GT e GT Decimal Indicators International numeric keypads have a comma in place of the period because Euro peans use commas in decimal expressions Graphite can handle both American and European decimal entries in the Status Line 24 5 or 24 5 however the display is controlled by the Numbers Control Panel Keyboards and Command Keys Since keyboards vary from country to country the Graphite command keys may not respond as described if you are using a non American keyboard Appendix B Special Characters You can use special characters and accents which are available with your computer Usually these characters are described in an appendix of the user manual Many symbols and characters are from the keyboard Windows If necessary unlock the keypad with
397. t setup 15 26 Printing 15 36 Profile of line GD amp T 20 5 Q Quadrant Drafting Assistant 4 3 R Radial Arrow Dimension tool In 12 16 Out 12 16 Random A 2 Recent file list 15 3 Macintosh 5 28 Windows 5 27 Rectangle tool 7 21 3D 8 3 Redo 10 21 Redraw screen 10 34 Referral 1 2 Relimit tool 10 5 Remove Macros 6 5 Remove Dots command 10 22 Resolve Command 16 6 Parametrics 16 5 Index Revolve of steps 8 6 Command 8 5 Origin 8 6 Sweep Angle 8 6 RGB 5 6 Right view 14 19 Right hand rule 6 11 RNG A 3 Rotate Active view 6 8 Sheet camera 2 3 Sheet view 6 8 Text 11 6 Rotate tool 10 8 Rotate view Geometry axis 6 9 Screen axis 6 9 X axis 6 9 Y axis 6 9 Z axis 6 9 Round A 2 Roundness GD amp T 20 5 Rules 3D construction 8 2 Parametrics 16 2 Right hand 6 11 8 6 S Saturation 5 6 Save Attributes 19 5 AutoSave 15 5 Color 5 10 Palette 5 29 5 30 Preferences 3 16 5 28 5 29 Save As 15 4 Save command 15 4 Scale 3 14 15 24 Detail view 13 19 Dimensions 15 24 Drawing at full scale 15 23 Full scale drawing 2 6 5 24 Lines crosshatches 15 24 Paper size 15 25 Patterns 15 24 Text 11 7 15 24 Views 14 16 Scaling views 14 16 Scientific notation A 1 Screen display scale 14 16 Scroll Bars 3 4 Segment tool 10 6 Selectable Points Command 9 3 Selection 9 2 Arrow 3 2 Command 9 2 Deselecting 9 7 Indicating 9 2 Objects 9 1 9 4 of points 9 10 Points 9 3 9 9 9 10 Select All 9 4 9 7 Selectable points 9
398. te of the main tool palette selects one or more objects along a straight line path when you drag a line over the desired objects 1 Choose the Select by Line tool in the Selection tool palette The Message Line reads Select By Line draw line Shift Extend Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macintosh In the drawing area drag across the objects you want to select as shown in the graphic below The objects intersected by the line are selected as shown below in gray and any previously selected objects are deselected Select by Polygon Tool A This tool in the first subpalette of the main tool palette selects one or more objects when a polygon is drawn around them Each object must be completely enclosed by the selection polygon for the object to be selected This tool functions similarly to the Connected Lines tool 1 Choose the Select by Polygon tool in the Selection tool palette The Message Line reads Select By Polygon draw polyline Shift Extend A Click or drag to indicate the endpoints of the line segments that will make up this selection polygon The selection polygon appears as line segments and are selected the default is red Selection Process If you click a point and then change your mind press the ESC key or choose Undo to remove the last line Pressing the BACKSPACE key Windows or the DELETE key Macintosh removes the entire selection polygon 3 Indicate the last point by dou
399. terns inversely with the same scale factor so that all text and dimensions you add after scaling will have exactly the size you specify in the Size submenu in the Text menu That means if you set the text size for text and dimensions to 0 25 inches it will be plotted at a size of 0 25 inches on the paper Make final adjustments Choose File gt Print Drafting with a Drawing Format 1 2 Start Graphite and display an Untitled document If necessary set the Units of measure you want by choosing Layout gt Prefer ences gt Units Construct the geometry at full size saving the construction as you work Use the Zoom commands and tools to display the part at an appropriate magnifica tion so that you can see what you are doing Use the Sheet Into View command from the Views menu to set the visual scale so that the part fits into the size of the drawing format you select in the pop up menu in the Sheet Into View dialog box Dimension the part and add text When you specify the visual scale for your drawing with the Sheet Into View com mand Graphite scales text dimensions hatches and line patterns inversely with the same scale factor so that all text and dimensions you add after scaling will have exactly the size you specify in the Size submenu of the Text menu That means if you set the text size for text and dimensions to 0 25 inches it plots at a size of 0 25 inches on the paper Make any final adjustments Choose File gt P
400. tes Predefined Attributes are attributes that Graphite defines These attributes are calcu lated and displayed using 2D Analysis see Chapter 18 Choose the ones you want from the list by double clicking Assigning Attributes e Perimeter e Area e Weight e Centroid X e Centroid Y e Inertia IXX e Inertia TYY e Inertia IXY For predefined attributes enter the attribute s name since their values and formats are predefined These attributes are displayed in the Status Line but cannot be changed since Graphite calculates the values automatically Assigning Attributes You assign attributes using the BOM tools You activate BOM tools like any other tool in the Graphite tool palette An object s attributes are inaccessible if the object is grouped so that the group itself can have attributes The object s attributes are made accessible by ungrouping the group Ungrouping a group with attributes removes the group s attributes BOM Tools Graphite s BOM tools are on a separate palette which you can drag around the drawing area The palette displays by choosing Text gt Bill of Materials gt Show Pal ette Show Palette Hide Palette When you choose Text gt Bill of Materials gt Show Palette or Hide Palette the BOM tool palette display or hides 19 7 Bill of Materials 19 8 You can also remove the tool palette by double clicking Windows or single click ing Macintosh the button in the title bar of the palette Attri
401. tes that the dimension is the actual value of the object s measurement If you delete this symbol the dimension will no longer be associative that is it won t update if you change the geometry it mea sures If you are going to use parametrics you must delete the symbol and enter values algebraic expressions or variables in the text data field Parametrics are described in Chapter 16 Some of the dimensioning tools such as the Radial tools add a letter in the text status data field which appears in the dimension itself You can add text before or after the symbol You can enter paren theses to enclose the resulting dimension in paren theses or enter 2 Ples to display the dimension followed by the text 2 Plcs When you include the symbol Graphite uses the measure ment of the geometry as well as the text you add Using the Dimension Tools 12 5 Dimensions 12 6 Tolerance The Upper and Lower fields appear if you have specified a tolerance format in the Linear or Angu lar submenu of the Dimension menu You enter the limits for the tolerance in these fields Automatically Placing Dimensions on a Separate Layer Graphite automatically creates a Dimension Layer unless you have removed it from the prefs vc6 Windows or the Graphite prefs Macintosh file To create a Dimen sion layer do the following 1 Create a layer named Dimension This name must be spelled correctly You don t have to make the
402. th point in a series deactivates the first point The Drafting Assistant Referral More information on Layers can be found in Chapter 13 Viewing Geometry 4 10 The figure here illus trates intersecting con struction lines drawn through two existing active points perpendicular Once you re familiar with the Drafting Assis tant you ll see how Graphite streamlines IN e ee ee ene eS eee uintersect design and drafting tasks Setting New Drafting Assistant Construction Angles You can add to or change the angles that the Drafting Assistant uses for dynamic construction lines by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Snap Enter the construction line angles separated by semicolons in the appropriate data field Permanent Construction Lines In addition to the Drafting Assistants dynamic construction lines you may want to create construction lines that remain displayed until you hide or remove them There are two methods for creating permanent construction lines strokes and the Construction command in the Layout menu Construction lines automatically appear on the construction layer not the work layer of your drawing You can hide the construction layer to view or print the drawing without construction lines When you want to get rid of all construction lines choose Layout gt Delete Con structions Everything on the construction layer deletes regardless of the object s pen style Stroke Construction L
403. that object at the nearest tangency point If the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macin tosh key is not held down then the arc will be created directly through that exact point So each of the three points can act separately The Status Line indicates the X Y coordinates for each of the three points Y1 X2 y2 X3 Y3 Tangent Point Arc Tool J This tool in the third subpalette of the main tool palette draws an arc beginning at the first point you specify The second point you specify is the direction vector and the third point you specify indicates the endpoint of the arc Essentially the Tan gent Point Arc tool first creates a line then creates an arc tangent to the line then erases the line Using the Tangent Point Arc Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Tangent Point Arc Pick beginning point of arc tangent line 2 Click the starting point This is both the starting point of the arc and the starting point of the temporary tangent line The Message Line displays the next step for using the tool Click the endpoint of the tangent line Click the endpoint of the arc The arc is drawn between the first and last point you click and tangent to the line between the first and second points Drawing Tools Description and Use First Click Second Click Third Click The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the endpoints
404. that require a platform and software reference a Graphite Windows graphic is used When necessary both Windows and Macintosh graphics will be included User Guide Chapter Breakdown On Line Help Graphite s Help Windows only provides a complete description of the program s many features commands and tools The Help index is organized by menus and tools In addition context sensitive Help is displayed when you highlight a com mand or tool and then press the F1 or the SHIFT F1 key For information on installing Graphite see the Readme text or Ashlar s web page www ashlar vellum com User Guide Documentation Graphite Overview As mentioned in the Getting Started section of this manual Graphite is a powerful program that is quick to learn and use due to its technology Graphite will help you get your job done within your timeframe This chapter provides you with a brief overview of the following concepts e Wireframe Drafting e The Model e The Drafting Assistant e The Design Process including Drawing at Full Scale and Drawing Formats Wireframe Drafting In Graphite you create wireframe models A wireframe model consists of the geometry that makes up the edges of the object A wireframe model can often be used in place of a prototype so that simulations and tests can be accomplished on the computer rather than in the laboratory Mod els can be used for checking the visual specification measuring distances betwee
405. that specify dimensions and their for mat and tolerance Commands to control multi page documents including Perspective on off Perspective Edit and View Mode The menu also contains Define View View the Plane Unfold View Flatten View and Show Trackball Commands to create and invoke macros Graphite s menu items can be chosen with the mouse or with a combination of keys on the keyboard For example you can use various methods for displaying the Edit menu 3 11 The Basics Windows and Macintosh e Click on Edit in the menu bar Windows only e Press the ALT key and then type E e Press the ALT key and then press the RIGHT ARROW key until Edit is highlighted in the menu bar then press ENTER You also have various methods for choosing commands with the keyboard For example you can use any of the following methods to choose Layout gt Show Grid Windows e Press ALT and L and then type G e Press ALT and then use the RIGHT ARROW key to highlight Layout and press ENTER Then press the DOWN ARROW key to move the highlighted area to Show Grid and press ENTER e Hold down the CTRL key and type G The first method is the mnemonic method Press the ALT key with the appropri ate letters for the menu and command as indicated by the underlined character in the names Macintosh e Hold down the z command key and type G The third method for Windows and the only one available for Macintosh is a key board ac
406. the Radial and Diametral require only one You can save the location and the status on off of the Dimension palette by choosing Layout gt Preferences gt Save Palettes Dimensioning and the Work Plane Dimensions appear in the current work plane of the active view You should set the work plane to correspond to the view before you begin adding text or dimensions in a view 12 3 Dimensions For example if the current work plane is the top plane then the dimensions will appear parallel to the work plane regardless of the view See the graphic on the next page ro 7 ees lt 1 500 lt All point to point dimensions are also placed parallel to the work plane If you were working in the front plane and you were using the horizontal dimension tool the dimension would be placed parallel to the front plane Dimensioning Objects and Placement I 2 3 Tech Note Steps 4 and 5 must be 4 done in order If you change the entry in the text box and then press ENTER Win 5 dows or RETURN Macin tosh you can no longer move the dimension because it will no longer be selected If you have this problem select the dimension and drag it to the location you want 12 4 If necessary display the Dimension palette Select the appropriate dimension tool The dimension pointer is a smart pointer with a hot spot the dot shows which side of the object to select first If you select as indicated by the posit
407. the Selection tool or the Expand Shrink tool In some cases it is useful to use the Move tool for sizing objects You can stretch objects by selecting a point and dragging it to a new location Sizing an Object with the Selection Tool You can stretch objects by selecting a point and dragging it to a new location 1 In the Edit menu be certain that Selectable Points is set 2 Click the Selection tool Aline can be dragged to a new length A ab Intersecting lines can be dragged 4 Drag the points to a new location to new lengths 3 Drag a selection fence around the control points that represent the area you want to stretch Sizing an Object with the Move Tool You can also size an object with the Move tool Using the Move tool allows you to specify the distance the selected point s should be moved by specific values along the X and Y direction in the Status Line To move the corner of the rectangle in the next graphic with the Move tool pro ceed as follows 1 In the Edit menu be certain that Selectable Points is set 2 Click the Selection tool 3 Drag a selection fence around the lower right corner of the rectangle 4 Click the Move tool 5 Enter 1 in the X data field and 1 in the Y data field in the Status Line 6 Press ENTER Windows or RETURN Macin tosh The corner of the rectangle moves the distance you specified in the Status Line Use the Move tool for sizing
408. the Status Line 2 Press the TAB key twice and enter the desired width for the Item Number bal loon The units for the indicated width are based on the unit specified in the Units dialog box from the Layout gt Preferences gt Units Enter the desired size 4 Select the desired text size The text size of the Item Number balloon is now set 5 Press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key The size of the Item Number balloon is now set oye Tip Editing Item Numbers j An Item Number s font is specified in the Font sub menu of the Dimension Editing the Size of an Existing Item Number Balloon menu Item Number Text Size and the Size of the Item Number balloon can be changed 1 Select the desired Item Number balloon 2 Choose Item Number Tool 19 13 Bill of Materials Tip The shape of the Item Num ber balloon can also be changed in Edit Objects If you renumber existing Item Numbers all Item Number balloons revert to the default circle balloon 19 14 3 4 In the Status Line enter the new diameter in the width field Press the Enter or Return key The diameter of the selected Item Number balloon updates accordingly Editing the Text Size 1 2 3 4 Select the respective Item Number balloon Choose Edit gt Edit Objects In the Status Line enter the new Text Size in the size field Press the Enter or Return key The text size of the selected Item Number b
409. the default number of sides is six X Y D Sides 6 Circumscribed Polygon Tool This tool in the sixth subpalette of the main tool palette draws a regular polygon for which the radius of the circle determines the midpoint of the sides The default shape is a hexagon but you can specify the number of sides in the Status Line Note The Status Line shows a diameter for the circle the standard way of describ ing a polygon circumscribed around a circle Drawing Tools Description and Use Using the Circumscribed Polygon Tool 1 Select the tool The Message Line reads Circumscribed Polygon Pick center of polygon Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macin tosh 2 Click the center of the polygon and the midpoint of one of the sides as directed by the Message Line or Drag from the center of the polygon to the midpoint of one of the sides You can create a copy of the last circumscribed polygon by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and clicking where you want the center The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the center the diame ter of the circle defining the polygon and the number of sides The default number of sides is six Diameter is the default Status Line selection xL lC IL sd Sides 6 Spline Tools F rm F P Nico we Al The spline tools on the tool palette create NURBS Non Uniform Rational B Spli
410. the item you want Press and hold down the mouse button Quickly press and release the mouse button once Click the mouse button twice quickly in succes sion Press and hold down the mouse button move the mouse then release the mouse button Parts of the Graphite Window Parts of the Graphite Window When you start Graphite the following window appears e4Graphite Untitled 1 File Edit Lay Help bh Single Line Pick N D Title Bar Message Line Menu Bar Windows Only Q e K A Tool Palette Al Drawing Area 2 4 E Al A a P Layer Coordinate Indicator eeu evra XYZ Indicator Bin Pess ee K 719 Zp Eeo ApS 210 JE 4 Title Bar Includes the title of the active document and but tons for controlling the window including boxes for zooming and closing the program Menu Bar Contains the Graphite menus of commands and settings You can make choices from the menus with the mouse or by using special key com binations Tool Palette Contains the drawing and editing tool icons you use for constructing editing and annotating geom etry Pointer Shows the active position on the screen If the Pointer Locator Message Line pointer is in the drawing area its shape represents the current tool Shows the x y coordinates of th
411. the screen Using the draw to scale Zoom All method you can create accurate full scale draw ings which are displayed at the magnification you choose Reminder The actual size of an object is not affected by zoom magnification or reduction Scaling Line Patterns and Crosshatch Patterns If your unscaled construction is very large or very small compared to the size of added text and dimensions line patterns and crosshatch patterns will be inappro priately sized When you set the scale for your drawing with the Drawing Size or Sheet Into View command line patterns and crosshatch patterns are automatically scaled with the inverse scale factor you specified The patterns appear at the appro priate size for the view scale of the geometry Scaling Text and Dimensions If you are drawing objects that will be scaled visually Text Dimensions Line pat terns and Crosshatch patterns behave when scaled differently than the geometry you created While geometry always scales with the specified scale factor text and dimensions scale with the inverse scale factor you have set with the Drawing Size or Sheet Into View command While the inverse scale factor applies immediately to Line patterns and Crosshatch patterns as described in the section above the inverse scale factor applies only to future text and dimensions added after scaling Existing text and dimensions scale with the same scale factor as the object geometry A 12 pt text that was
412. the se ection of the contents of the status field Cc P n cli icking once aces the cu cked If you side the fiel entry is select al ter it 7 4 inside the field rsor where you double click d the entire ted so you can 5 Release the mouse button to set the endpoint Immediately after construction you can make changes in the Status Line at the bottom of the drawing area to alter the length or position of the line If the geom etry is not satisfactory just press the BACKSPACE Windows or the DELETE Macintosh key The Status Line Whenever you select a tool from the tool palette the Status Line appears along the bottom of the drawing area It contains fields that provide information about the current construction For example when the Single Line tool or Connected Lines tool is the current tool the Status Line contains fields for the X and Y coordinates of the beginning point and the change of X and Y values for the endpoint of the line It also contains the value of the length and angle of the line 4 X 425 Y 432 dx 8 25 dY 0 8 25 JALO gt You can use the Status Line in three ways e To create an object with keyboard entries only e To edit an object that was just created and is still selected e To create an additional object using the current tool Whenever you construct an object the status field containing the specification th
413. the title bar shows Untitled 1 and is set with the default options such as pen style or grid display If you open more than one new document the subsequent documents are num bered sequentially until you name them by saving Opening Files You can open files using the Open command in the File menu in the program or by double clicking on the file to launch the program and the file Open Command CTRL O Windows O Macintosh This command in the File menu opens an existing Graphite document The document appears in the drawing area maintaining the same settings as the last time you saved it The dialog box allows you to specify the document you want and lets you change folders if necessary Opening a Document 1 Choose File gt Open The dialog box appears Lt Look in Gy MCSCRW3D er Fou ISCKTHD VC6 History a Desktop amp My Documents a My Computer PAG E Cancel ZA a pme The current folder displays with the files and or folders contained within 2 Display the appropriate folder containing the document you want to open For Windows vc6 is the Graphite file extension 3 Click the file name you want to open in the list box 4 Click OK Opening a File when Graphite is not Running You can open a file and launch Graphite at the same time by double clicking on the file The program launches automatically and the file opens By using this tech nique no untitled file opens Re
414. the tolerance for a dimension is in the feature control frame GD amp T dimen sions are also basic dimensions and appear in a box The value defines the theoret ically perfect location and implies that the tolerance is in the feature control frame To specify the basic dimension format in the Dimension menu go to the Linear and Angular submenus and choose xxx basic 20 3 GD amp T GD amp T Feature Control Frame This section discusses the GD amp T labeling of the left hole in the plate below Typically the GD amp T feature control frame appears as shown below Dimension Geometric Characteristic Diameter 315 Position Tolerance 310 Pa Material Condition 002 Wa B lc Datum C B lt Datum gt A Geometric Characteristics The first section of the feature control frame contains the geometric characteristic symbol The feature control frame on the previous page describes True Position how to locate the circular target area for the hole The possible characteristics are as follows Straightness The axis of an item of revolution or element of a surface is a straight line TSO 20 4 Z Flatness Roundness A Cylindricity Profile of Line Angularity Perpendicularity Geometric Characteristics All elements of a surface in one plane All points of a surface of revolution equidistant from an axis that is intersecte
415. the tool palette construct ellipses inscribed within an invisible rectangle or parallelogram by any of four methods e 2 Point Center e Opposite Corner Drawing Tools 7 18 e 3 Point Center e 3 Corner The 2 Point Center Ellipse uses the center point and one corner location of the rect angle The Opposite Corner Ellipse uses opposite corners of a rectangle The 3 Point Center Ellipse uses the center point the midpoint of a side and the corner of the parallelogram The 3 Corner Ellipse uses three corners on a parallelogram You can click or drag to create the ellipse Dragging creates a rubberband ellipse so you can see the ellipse before it is drawn The ellipse is drawn with the current pen specifications for Color Weight and Pat tern Ellipses do not have center points by design If you draw lines between opposite vertex points on the ellipse the intersection of the two lines will be the center of the ellipse For a 2 Point Center Ellipse inscribed in a rectangle the Drafting Assistant s horizontal and vertical temporary construction lines will cross at the cen ter point once you have touched two vertex points 2 Point Center Ellipse Tool O This tool in the fifth subpalette of the main tool palette constructs an ellipse inscribed within the rectangle calculated from the two specified points the center point and one corner of the rectangle Using the 2 Point Center Ellipse Tool 1 Select the tool The
416. ths Y Length o Step Lengths Number of Rows 1 Total Offset Offset 0 Step Offset The Linear Duplicate dialog box con K 8 Cancel ok tains the following settings Number Per Row The total number of objects you want in each row Be sure to include the selected object itself in this total count If you don t know the number You can also use math operators to determine the number of copies Duplicating Objects For example if you want to place studs 16 inches apart on a 17 foot wall you would enter 17 12 16 and Graphite will truncate the result to create 12 copies X Length Y Length The X Length value determines the horizontal length of a row The Y Length value determines the vertical rise of the row The X Length and Y Length can be set by entering values or by clicking the mouse in the drawing area Total Lengths The Total Lengths is the distance from the selected object to the last copy Step Lengths The Step Lengths is the distance from the selected object to the first copy Number of Rows The total Number of Rows that you want Total Offset The offset is the perpendicular distance between the row containing the selected object and the last row Step Offset The offset is the perpendicular distance between the row containing the selected object and the next row Offset The perpendicular distance setting for the Total Offset or Step Offset You can specify the Offset by entering a value
417. ting Assis tant Graphite Overview 2 6 The Design Process The computer revolutionized the design process Graphite has contributed to this by helping you quickly design a model that previously existed only in your mind s eye Graphite For Graphite 3D depending on your needs you can start your design in 2D and continue on in 3D later or begin designing in 3D For example you can choose to begin your design in the Trimetric view orientation so that you see all three directions at once You can also display other view win dows with the Front Right and Top view orientations at quarter scale to observe the construction from other angles While you are drawing you can zoom in and out to enlarge and reduce areas as needed You can also rotate move the origin and change the work plane to take advantage of the 3D modeling environment Drawing at Full Scale In the paper world you begin designing a model by deciding what scale to use so that the model fits on a particular size sheet of paper With Graphite you postpone scaling until after you have drawn the model at full scale You can scale the geome try to fit on a standard drawing format provided by Graphite and then scale the whole drawing to fit the size of paper you need Constructing a 3D Model You can use several different methods to create a model The following steps are an example of a process for a 3D model e Begin the construction by opening a new document
418. ting a text file for importing a spline weet ete eeeeeeees 15 11 Editing control points of a spline 0 eter ene eeneeenteenteennieey 7 27 Editing the end slope of aSplines siete ums amniiiaio pane A 7 28 Taporiog SPlN SS rk EE OE 15 10 Locking more than one spline control pOint csisersiirerirniniei iiti 7 27 Task Index TI 8 Strokes Symbols Text Unlocking spline control points viiinsceissicsdaiseenestvidesshiesaai tier EA 7 27 Using the Add Spline Control Point tool o 7 26 Using the Lock Spline Control Point tool wo centr eneeneeenes 7 26 Using the Through Points Spline tOOlisis sosirii oiei 7 25 Using the Vector Spline Tolosen EE a temas 7 25 Status Line Altering geometry in progress with status data fields eeeeeetteeeeees 7 5 Creating new geometry with status data fields 0 0 eeeeeteeenetteeeenneeeeees 7 6 Creating geometry offset from a POINE ee eeeeeeeeeeeeetttteeeetteeeesnnteeeeenas 7 6 Moving between status data fields kesisi a a aaa 3 9 Hsing the Stati s Eiusmo e e aaa 7 4 Using the Status Line to specify the unit Of Measure cccrcccerrerererere 5 22 Using Stroke ZOOM cin ues evs E E EES AEE EE 13 4 Using Stroke construction liNESiiesnisciiunini dannii n iia 4 11 Showing and Hiding Points with Stroke ss sisisinusineiinsisnasriernsiinenisnia 9 10 Bringing a symbol into the current COCUMENE cee eeeeteeenteeeeeenteeeees 17 4 Creatine Symbol DTA E Siiani uoit eni ieia hia aE aiin ii i 17 8 Creatine a s
419. to any pattern elements and close the Edit Pattern dialog box Undoing a Pattern Edit You cannot undo a pattern edit with the Undo com mand For the standard patterns that came with the Z y This operation will backu program you return them back to the default by piecing patterns to p clicking Revert in the Edit Pattern dialog box e gt the orginal settings Revert changes the line patterns back to their Do you really want to revert No Basic Environment Settings 5 18 defaults not just the pattern selected from the Edit Pattern list A warning message is presented when you click Revert Clicking Yes changes the patterns back to Graphite s original settings Clicking No returns you to the Edit Pattern dialog box without returning any patterns back to their original settings To undo changes made to user defined patterns previously saved as a preference save the file Gif necessary close and relaunch the program and then open the file All user defined patterns return to their previously defined settings Edited Patterns affect only the patterns in the current file To save the edited pattern so that it is available in all future files choose Layout gt Preferences gt Save Preferences Pen Styles Pen styles help simplify your design process by defining the color weight and pat tern type for each style Then rather than having to set each pen characteristic each time you want a specific type of line you can ch
420. to move or Nudge 3 Use an arrow key to move the selected items in the desired direction By hold ing down the Control key you can double the nudge distance Rotate Tool el This tool in the eleventh subpalette of the main tool palette rotates one or more objects around a specified point You can copy the selection by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while you select the objects If you select more than one object they remain in the same position relative to each other Keep in mind that you always rotate about the Z axis with this tool Editing Tools Using the Rotate Tool 1 Select the object s to be rotated 2 Select the Rotate tool The Message Line reads Rotate Pick center of rotation Shift Select Ctrl Copy Windows or Option Copy Macintosh If necessary use SHIFT Click to select more objects 3 Select the center of rotation 4 Drag the objects or enter an Angle in the Status Line to specify the rotation The Status Line allows you to specify the angle of rotation vo jz fies vp oes Jam pP You can also click the reference point and then click the destination point It is not necessary for the reference and destination points to be on the object you are mov ing If they are not the rotation is performed relative to the specified points With this tool you can rotate the selected geometry around an axis through the ori gin you specify and parallel to the z axis of the work p
421. tolerance of 003 diameter for the total of its length 3 00 inches The second line of the frame means that the hole must be straight for any 1 00 inch portion within a cylindrical tolerance of 001 diameter Graphite cre ates the composite frame automatically if the same symbol is in Line 7 and Line 2 of the dialog box Projected Tolerance Zone This entry box of the feature control frame specifies an area above the actual part where the tolerance of a feature should still apply if the feature were extended or projected into the area For example if an outboard motor has a hole in the hous The GD amp T Label ing the hole has to be straight not only through the housing but also down into the propeller assembly so that the drive shaft aligns properly Venus Marine V 74 005 MIA B IC 24 In the motor example the tolerance for the hole should be checked 24 inches from the actual hole The GD amp T Label GD amp T Command This command in the Dimension menu creates a label a feature control frame for showing dimensions alignment and tolerances The dialog box looks like a com plex GD amp T symbol into which you may enter the information you need The GD amp T label uses Plotter fonts so the font size corresponds to ANSI standards since the sizes of other fonts are not always consistent with ANSI standards If you want the size of your dimensions to be the same as the font in a GD amp T
422. tool The Message Line reads Single Line Pick the beginning point Ctrl Copy previous Windows or Option Copy previous Macintosh 2 Click two endpoints of the line or Drag to indicate the endpoints of the line press at the beginning and release at the end of the line As you drag you see a rubberband line that previews your construction To copy the line just created as the Message Line indicates hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and click once in the drawing area a line appears that is identical to the one just drawn The location of the click designates the location of the first endpoint The Status Line allows you to specify the X Y coordinates of the beginning the rel ative location of the end delta X and delta Y the line length and the angle from horizontal Once a line is drawn the line Length is the selected status field X y dX dY A Drawing a Line Perpendicular to Another Object 1 Construct the object 2 Move the pointer to the object until a Drafting Assistant on notation appears endpoint midpoint quadrant etc will not work only on 3 Drag straight away from the object in a perpendicular direction A perpendicu lar line appears attached to the object Keep holding the mouse down and move the cursor Notice that the line stays perpendicular but slides along the object 4 Drag to the desired length for the perpendicular line
423. tools 10 2 2 Entity 10 3 Angular 10 4 Chamfer Smart wall 7 11 Check boxes 3 14 Circle Center Line Dimension tool 12 21 Circle tools 7 15 3D 8 3 3 Point 7 16 Center Point 7 15 Opposite Point Circle tool 7 16 Tangent Point 7 17 Circular runout GD amp T 20 6 Circumscribed Polygon tool 7 22 Click 7 2 Clipboard 10 20 Close command 15 6 Color Custom 5 6 5 10 Define 5 4 Dimension 12 30 Editing 5 9 Layer 13 5 Name 5 9 Pen 5 3 Saving 5 10 Color display Color wheel 5 8 Crayon picker 5 7 CYMK picker 5 7 HSL picker 5 7 HSV picker 5 7 Color palette 5 6 Customizing 5 10 Displaying a color 5 10 Removing a color 5 11 Color setting Hue 5 6 Lightness slide 5 8 Luminance 5 6 RGB 5 6 Saturation 5 6 Commands Choosing 1 1 Concentricity GD amp T 20 6 Conditional expressions A 2 Connected Lines tool 7 9 Construction 4 10 Angles 4 10 4 12 Command 4 11 Geometry 4 13 Offset 4 12 Pen style 5 2 5 19 X Y coordinates 4 12 Construction line type Dynamic 4 8 Permanent 4 10 Stroke 4 10 Construction lines 2 5 4 8 Command 4 11 Creating multiple 4 13 Index Creating parallel 4 13 Delete 4 14 Layer 4 10 Using 4 8 Control point 7 26 9 2 Spline 7 27 Convert Command 15 21 Convert command 15 15 Copy 10 16 10 19 Detail view 13 18 Objects 10 15 10 20 Corner Trim tool 10 6 Cosine of angle A 2 Counting objects 13 8 Crayon picker 5 7 Creation angles 4 7 Crosshatch 2 8 11 12 Command 11 15 Detail view 14 16 Edit 11 17
424. tor continuously tracks the pointer location when the pointer is in the drawing area displaying the X Y coordinates of the current location relative to the The Basics Tip You can also change objects with the Edit Objects com mand 3 8 origin The origin 0 0 0 is in the center of the screen when you open a new docu ment When you make the grid visible by choosing Layout gt Show Grid a symbol appears at the origin 0 0 Message Line The Message Line across the top of the drawing area provides concise instructions for the use of the selected tool For example after selecting the Center Point Circle tool the Message Line appears as illustrated below Center Point Circle Pick center Ctrl Copy previous k N D amp The instructions in the Message Line for some tools also indicate optional activities For example if you hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while using the Center Point Circle tool the next mouse click creates a copy of the last circle with the center placed where you clicked Status Line The Status Line provides measurements angles X Y coordinates and delta values for the current construction The current tool determines the number of status data fields and which of the status data fields is highlighted after the construction For example if you select the Center Point Circle tool the Status Line shows the X Y coordinates for the center of the circle and
425. ts you set the tolerance for the fill If you want to change the hatch patterns choose Crosshatch and specify the pattern you want to use If you want to change the default hatch pattern make changes to the preferences file as described in Chapter 5 Basic Environment Set tings You can choose the Fill command from the keyboard with CTRL B Windows or 36 B Macintosh and the Hatch command from the keyboard with CTRL H Win dows or H Macintosh Crosshatch Patterns A wide variety of Crosshatch patterns are available in both ISO or DIN styles Cross hatching appears parallel to the work plane and only in the view in which it was created In other words it is drawn correctly when viewed along the z axis of the work plane The following ISO N 7 f Iron Steel Bronze Copper Titanium Electric A Marble ass Zinc i Thread Aluminum Brick Rubber Earth Plastic crosshatching options are available v Grass Fabric Insulation Mud lt gt Concrete The following DIN crosshatching options are available QP Standard Solids Clay Peat Humus Soil Sandstone Wood Horizontal Grain Wood Cut Tar Legend AIBC DIN Patterns Rock Sand Coal Salt Wood Vertical grain Wood Materials
426. type Centimeters A 3 Feet A 3 Inches A 3 Meters A 3 Millimeters A 3 Units 3 9 5 21 A 1 Command 5 21 Decimal places 3 9 Leading Os 5 21 Precision 3 9 5 21 Preferences 5 29 Status Line 5 22 Trailing Os 5 22 Unlock Command 10 33 Splines 7 27 Index 1 18 User coordinate system 8 12 Utilities menu 3 11 Vv Vector Spline tool 7 25 Vertex 7 25 7 26 Vertex Drafting Assistant 4 3 Vertical Dimension tools Base Line 12 9 Chain 12 10 Ordinate 12 11 Vertical 12 9 View 14 14 14 37 3D 6 6 Active 13 16 Cameras 14 38 Detail 2 2 13 13 14 30 14 37 Displays 13 13 Document windows 13 22 Formats 14 26 Layouts 14 25 Menu 13 20 navigator palette 13 23 Orientation 14 18 Sheet 2 2 13 13 Sheets Models 14 34 Trackball 2 3 View the plane 14 23 Window 2 2 13 17 Zoom commands 14 16 View control tools 13 2 View operation Creating custom layouts 14 29 Define 14 19 Edit 14 24 Flatten 2 8 14 24 Rotate 6 8 Scaling 14 16 Unfold 14 22 View orientation Delete orientation 14 21 Front 14 19 Isometric 14 19 New 14 19 Redefining 14 21 Renaming 14 21 Right 14 19 Setting to screen 14 23 Standard 6 11 Top 14 19 Top view 2 2 Trimetric 2 4 14 19 Viewing geometry 13 1 Views Menu 3 11 Views Menu 13 20 Views pop up menu 6 8 Visible Pen length 5 15 Pen style 5 2 5 18 Visualization 6 11 Preference 5 29 W Wall Parametrics 7 12 Smart 7 11 Symbols 7 12 Wave forms A 3 Web page 1 5 Weight 2D analysis 18 3
427. u to limit selection by object type layer and color You can only select objects that are highlighted in the dialog box Selection Mask For example if circles are not highlighted when you choose Select All from the Edit menu everything but the circles is selected In this way you can select such combi nations as only blue splines or only red objects on a particular layer Using the Selection Mask 1 Choose Edit gt Selection Mask The Selection Mask dialog box appears The highlighted items respond to all selection methods and can be detected by the Drafting Assistant 2 Click the items you want to be able to select so they are highlighted While the dialog box is visible you can select create and edit geometry You can move the dialog box if it covers geometry you want to work on The Selection Mask remains in effect even after you close the dialog box until you select a tool When an item in the dialog box is not highlighted the Drafting Assistant and all the tools cannot detect it even though it is visible to you on the screen Selecting or Deselecting Listed Items e To select one item simply click on the item and the rest of the list will be dese lected e To deselect a list quickly click one item in the list e To select a contiguous group of items click on the item at the top or bottom of the desired group list then hold down the SHIFT key and click or drag up or down to select the other items in the grou
428. u would do if you were drafting on paper determining which scale to use so that the finished part fits on the paper size you are using Drawing Scale and Paper Size Tip When you scale your draw ing text and dimensions behave differently from the geometry you created as described under the Scaling Text and Dimensions section earlier in this chapter Referral You will find an exact descrip tion of the Sheet Into View command in the Chapter 14 Advanced Viewing Tech niques 15 27 Graphite Documents 15 28 4 Click OK Your part is now in an independent view scaled as specified Scaling does not change the actual dimensions of the part You can verify this by selecting an object and then looking at the specifications of that object in the Edit Objects dialog box Printing Plotting Region When you choose Drawing Size and choose Always Display Page Bounds a gray rectangle appears in the drawing area This rectangle represents the printing plot ting region of the page so you can see how your drawing fits the paper The plot ting region is smaller than the actual page size because most printers and plotters cannot plot to the edge of the paper allowing room for the margins If you do not want to see the plottable outline all the time uncheck Always Display Page Bounds Paper Size Printing Plotting Region ri f Graphite displays the Printing Plotting region The size of this region i
429. uction Geometry Non construction geometry is placed on the work layer You can create temporary construction geometry such as arcs or circles by making the construction layer the work layer creating the geometry and switching to another layer to continue your work You can use the Construction pen style if you like but it s not essential Lines made with the Construction pen do not go on the construction layer unless you make that layer the work layer Creating Construction Geometry 1 Choose Layout gt Layers 2 Click Construction in the list box 3 Click Set Layer 4 Create the geometry you will use Set Group for construction You can use a Rename the Construction pen style but any oOo pen style is acceptable Tip 5 When the construction geometry is complete make another layer the work You can select construction layer lines in the usual manner from any layer the construc tion layer doesn t have to be 6 Close the dialog box 7 Continue your work the work layer Once you no longer need the construction geometry choose Layout gt Delete Con structions to remove all geometry on the construction layer 4 13 The Drafting Assistant 4 14 Removing Construction Lines If you have many construction lines and you want to delete only one or two of them select the lines you want to remove and then choose Edit gt Delete or press the BACKSPACE Windows or DELETE Macintosh key You can remov
430. umber You can find the proper number for this entry in a handbook pub Perimeter Area Weight Centroid X 2D Analysis Command lished by most material vendors particularly for sheet steel and aluminum Enter the weight for the thickness of the proposed material and click CAL CULATE For example if you had a square that you wanted analyzed as if it were a cube three inches thick you would enter 3 the material s density in the weight per area box The length of all segments which define the selected boundary This is the only value that appears if the boundary is not closed For circles arcs and other curves the accuracy depends on the tolerance setting The surface area enclosed by the selected bound ary For circles arcs and other curves the accuracy depends on the tolerance setting The product of the Area multiplied by the Weight Per Area Centroid Xc Yc a XC 0 0 The X coordinate of the center of mass defined by the selected boundary 18 3 2D Analysis 18 4 Centroid Y The Y coordinate of the center of mass defined by the selected boundary Inertia IXX The moment of inertia about the central X X axis which is parallel to the X axis IXX y Yo dA Inertia IYY The moment of inertia about the central Y Y axis which is parallel to the Y axis IYY x Xc dA Inertia IXY The product of inertia about the centroid IXY x X90 Yc dA
431. ute formats Text Number and Qty Text is the default format and is the choice for all alpha numeric values Text entries like Name Material etc Number is the choice for all values which are expressed by numbers which can be used for fur ther calculations A part number like 3456 or 252 49 would be formatted as Text since this value would never be used for any kind of calculation If you use hyphens or dashes in your Part Number you must use the Text format not Number An attribute would be formatted as Qty if the Bill of Material should calculate the number of identi cal objects in a drawing Normally this format only makes sense for an attribute which is named Qty and has the default value of one 1 The Define Attributes dialog box contains the following buttons New Delete Clicking New creates a new attribute like Attribute 1 2 3 etc You can rename the attribute by typing the name in the Attribute Name entry field and clicking Redefine Clicking Delete deletes the selected attribute from the attribute list Redefine Clicking Redefine does three things First it renames a selected attribute with the name you have specified in the Attribute Name entry field second it assigns a value to the attribute which may be entered in the Default Value entry field and third it assigns the format for the attribute you selected from the Format pop up list Defining Attributes 1 Click New to create a new
432. utomatically set to the offset distance For instance a box that is offset by 25 has a fillet at each corner with a radius of 25 If this option is marked the new offset geometry will be grouped when created This option is by default not selected to produce ungrouped geom etry 1 Select the object you want to offset Changing the Characteristics of Objects 2 Choose Edit gt Offset The Offset dialog box displays Click into the Offset Distance field Input an offset distance by dragging between any two points on the drawing area Click in one of the Ref entry fields Enter an offset direction by dragging between any two points on the drawing area 7 Click the Options button In the Options dialog box specify a Tolerance if needed and whether or not the object will be offset with mitered corners The new geometry ungroups and the original geometry remains selected For Graphite if an offset is created with the work plane not set to match the plane of the object being offset the results may be unpredictable The Z value is ignored in the Offset dialog box and the distance is applied in the plane of the object being offset Changing the Characteristics of Objects You can edit selected objects either by changing individual characteristics such as weight or color from the menu or by changing the specifications in the Edit Objects dialog box The Edit Objects dialog box also provides information about th
433. ve forward throught the visible sheets Click on the S lt button to move backward Only one sheet at a time can be shown Layer Navigation Click on the L gt button to move forward through the visible layers Click on the L lt button to move backwards Click on the L to show all layers Clicking L will pop up a list of available layers Choosing one of the layers will make it become the active layer and all other layers will be visibly turned off You can restore full visiblity to all layers by clicking on the L button or choosing Layout gt Layers and setting the visibility individually Window Navigation Click on the W button to display a popup menu of available documents Choosing one of the documents will make it become the active document 13 23 Viewing Geometry 13 24 Advanced Viewing Techniques Sheets Views and Models are features in Graphite that add a great amount of flexi bility to the design process This chapter explains each of them and how they inter act with each other The following topics are included e Sheets e Models e Views including Sheet into View and View Layouts e Combining Sheets Views and Models Sheets A sheet is an infinite planar area Graphite allows you to have multiple opaque sheets within a drawing A drawing can be a simple part or a complex assembly and you can organize related geometry on as many sheets as the scope of the project calls for You can have as many sheets a
434. way from the screen This plane is folded by 90 and creates the new view orientation from the active view eai folding line g0 Y folding line S before unfolding after unfolding aw Q Unfolded view Note You should use this command only in a view orientation aligned parallel to an object face If you use it in a differently aligned view object face is not parallel to the screen this command will work correctly but the result will be unpredict able in most cases Unfolding a View 1 Choose Views gt Unfold View 2 Click the endpoints of the line to unfold on You don t need an actual line you can just indicate a vector The active view window shows the view unfolded 90 from the line you specify Setting the Screen to the Work Plane Occasionally you might want to change your point of view to look directly at the work plane You can choose Views gt View the Plane to do this View the Plane Command This command in the Views menu rotates the view orientation in the active view window to match the work plane The view changes so the work plane becomes 14 23 Advanced Viewing Techniques horizontal on the screen The y direction of the work plane becomes vertical and the z direction of the work plane becomes the line of sight coming directly out of the screen To leave this view orientation select a view from the Trackball pull down menu or the Views submenu or use the Tra
435. xt file is usually created by word processing software and saved as plain text It usually contains only standard keyboard charac ters letters numbers punc tuation and spaces without the formatting typically found in word processing docu ments This tool the eight tool of the main tool palette allows you to create and edit text on screen The text you enter has the characteristics set in the Text menu Using the Text Tool 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette The Message Line reads Text Pick opposite corners of text entry box Ctrl Copy Previous Windows or Option Copy Previous Macintosh 2 Create a text box by dragging or by clicking two locations to place the opposite corners of the text area The text box is as tall as a single line of text and as wide as you indicate The text cursor appears in the box ready for your typing 3 Enter the desired text from the keyboard Pressing the BASKSPACE Windows or the DELETE Macintosh key erases char acters to the left of the cursor The text you enter automatically word wraps to the next line when it reaches the right side of the text box you created in step 2 If you resize the text box the words rewrap automatically The Status Line allows you to enter the X and Y location of the first text box corner the text box width and height X Y W H Importing a Text File You can import an ASCII file that contains text
436. y A free form curve NURB splines are a superset of Bezier curves A frame showing the boundary of a view The geometry that defines the limits for operations such as trimming relimiting crosshatching 2D analysis or fill An acronym for Computer Aided Design An acronym for Computer Aided Design and Draft ing An acronym for Computer Aided Engineering An acronym for Computer Aided Manufacturing Chamfer Tool Chain Characteristics Circle Tool Circle Center Line Circumference Circumscribed Click Clipboard Construction Lines Control Point Coordinates The tool that constructs beveled or sloping edges between two objects This entity is created when you flatten a surfaced object using the Flatten View command Once an object is flattened these chain entities can be edited See Attributes Draws circles specified by the radius the diameter or tangency to other entities This tool places a center line on circles The distance around a circle along its edge 2_r Enclosing a circle In circumscribed polygons the midpoint of each side of the polygon touches an imaginary circle i e the polygon exactly surrounds the circle To press and release the mouse button When you are told to click an object move the pointer to the object and press and release the mouse button The memory buffer where selections are stored when the Cut or Copy command is used Lines displayed as dotted
437. y type of geometry contains two or more points sometimes called control points A line has two control points one at the beginning and one at the end of the line If you select an object and choose Layout gt Show Points the points are visible on the selected object Unselected point Selected point CC A line without points displayed A line with points displayed Keep in mind that you must select an object first and then the command to execute a function If you select a point without selecting the geometry it defines Graphite treats the point as an object Indicating Selection When you select an object its appearance on the screen shows that it is selected It is a specific color such as red it blinks or both Graphite usually displays selec tions according to your monitor type red for a color monitor and blinking for a monochrome monitor You can change the color or turn blinking off and on for the selection indicator If you wish you can choose both color and blinking Selection Command This command found under Layout gt Preferences determines the appearance of selected objects If you have a color monitor selected objects appear in a color Selection Process which you can change with this setting If you have a monochrome monitor selected objects blink If you have a color monitor you can also specify blinking with or without color Hepenopss g Colon mave the pomerio selection O O OOOO O O the col
438. you enter 11 pt the font size will be 11 point 1 Choose Text gt Size gt Other 2 Enter the size you want The size is measured in the current units as set in the Preferences submenu If you want to specify a point size include pt with your numeric entry Font Size 3 Click OK The size you specify stays in effect until you choose another size Text Size and Scaling If you have made or will make changes to the scale in the Drawing Size dialog box in the Layout menu you must change the text size inversely For example if you scaled your drawing 1 4 you must multiply the text size by 4 for it to display prop erly on your drawing You could also use the Keep Text Size and Keep Dimension Text Size options from the Drawing Size dialog box when changing the Drawing Scale to change the size of the text relative to the size of the other objects Adding Details 11 8 If it looks right on the screen the scaling is appropriate See Chapter 15 Graphite Documents for more information on scaling Style This command in the Text menu sets the style such as Bold or Underline for selected text or future text entries The style you specify stays in effect until you choose another style A check W indicates the current style You can change the default setting by saving the changes in the preferences file prefs vc6 Windows or Graphite prefs Macintosh Choose Layout gt Pref erences gt Save Pref
439. you want to use in your drawing For example you can place specifications you ve written with a word processor on your drawing without retyping it The entire file imports so if you want to use only part of the document create a new file that contains only the information you want entered on the drawing 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette 2 Create a text box by dragging or clicking twice to place the opposite corners of the text area 3 Choose File gt Import A dialog box appears 4 Select the text file you want to import The Import dialog box appears and the Text file type is specified 5 Click OK The text file appears in the text box you created Editing Text 1 Select the Text tool from the tool palette 2 Move the pointer directly over the text to be edited The pointer turns into an J beam text cursor when it is over text This only occurs when the Text tool is active 3 Use the text cursor to select text You can drag either direction to select characters and double click on an individ ual word to select the word You may also simply click to place the text cursor within the existing text if you want to add more to it 4 Modify the selected text by choosing the appropriate commands from the Text menu Changing the Characteristics of a Block of Text You can change the font text size style spacing and indentation of a block of text i 2 Use the Selection tool to select the block o
440. ys 4 Enter 2 in the X data field on the Status Line and 1 in the Y data field A positive or negative value entered in the Status Line determines the direction along the X or Y axis A negative value moves the object to the left or down on the screen and a positive value moves the object to the right or up Copying Objects with Tools 5 Press the ENTER Windows or RETURN Macintosh key The square moves Moving Objects to Another Layer 1 Choose Edit gt Edit Objects 2 In the Layer field scroll down to the layer to which you want to move the object 3 Click OK The object is now located on the new layer Copying Objects with Tools You can copy selections with the Copy command as discussed earlier or by holding down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key while using the following tools e Selection tool e Single Line tool e Center Point and Opposite Point Circle tools e Ellipse tools e Polygon tools e Text tool e Transformation tools Copying with the Selection Tool You can hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key and drag a copy of the selection to a new location 1 Click the Selection tool 2 Select the object s you want copied 3 Hold down the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key 4 Drag a copy of the selection to a new location pi Release the CTRL Windows or OPTION Macintosh key Copying with the Geometry Tools 10 15 Editing Objects
441. yz EBZt amp V_ lt gt 2 7 FG 123456789 Plotter Greek ABXAE T HIGKAMNONOPZLTTVN Z apx s MLAKMUVOTOROT UE t Le 0 bia _ ROLLS HS gi Plotter Roman ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ abedefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz e R _ N 73 maa A BU Plotter Italic A bedefgh j eee iby i TUVWXYZ aocde T mMNOPQYTSLUVWTYZ OSE LEELA 273 123456789 1 Platter Symbal R ZFX 4 lt gt S2aeneVCuUDNE aossen RINN fm Taali OP NOPE Platter ISO ABCDEFGHIKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ abcdefqhiklmnoparstuvwxyz TOR OR Ove o 123456789 Adding Details Tech Note Graphite Crosshatching appears parallel to the work plane and only in the view in which it was created In other words it is drawn correctly when viewed along the z axis of the work plane 11 12 Crosshatching and Solid Fills Graphite can crosshatch and fill any enclosed area in your drawing and then auto matically update the crosshatching or fill when you change the dimensions of the enclosed area You can specify a closed area that has a hole or other cutout in it and Graphite accurately excludes the hole area from the crosshatching In the Pen menu you will find two fill commands Solid Fill and Fill and two crosshatch commands Crosshatch and Hatch Fill creates a solid fill for a selection with the current pen color and Hatch crosshatches the selection with the default pattern or the last pattern you had selected Solid Fill le

4.6MB PDF - Ashlar

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents